Home

Agilent Technologies Cell Phone S GSM User's Manual

1. Figure 2 16 2 31 Making Measurements If You Have Problems with a Measurement Possible Solutions to The signal processing hardware that is used to generate measurement results has to Message Line Errors be told when to take data samples If the trigger to do this is misaligned with the Figure 2 17 signal there may be errors in the results that are displayed Trigger Timing A Check if the trigger is being received On the MEAS SYNC screen press to gain access check if the correct burst type has been defined Trigger Timing B Check if the trigger is being received at the correct time The First Bit field A see Figure 2 17 on page 2 32 on the Phase Freq Data Bits screen displays the time difference between when a trigger is being received and when the first bit of a burst occurred The time difference is only valid if FMErrCount is 0 The timing difference can be corrected by altering the trigger delay B DATA BETS Tre Tiains i i0 a0 30 if DODLOOI00G OIODOOLIO QLGOI1D 11011000010 Firat Bit 40 ag 60 ro LLGLIOBLOL GO0G0L1802 di zii i il r HHAKRH HAN 6H AN ARRAN FHErrCount z a0 Loo Li OLIEDQLLDE QO0I010103 LOQIORLDID STAC EATS Mo Error 2 32 ents Making Measurem nt me ee RETE E 2 33 If You Have Problems with a Measure Trigger Range F
2. Bi 3 7 4 Choices None results in no authentication being performed This field only applies if Special Option HO5 is fitted Full 64 Authentication Mode requires that you use a test SIM that implements the authentication algorithm specified in Rec 11 10 sec II 1 6 3 e You must enter an Authentication Key Ki If no Ki is entered a default value of 0 is used e When an authentication request occurs the BS SRES generated by the Agilent 8922M S should match the MS SRES received from the mobile station Full 54 Authentication Mode requires that you use a test SIM that implements the authentication algorithm specified in Rec 11 10 sec II 1 6 3 e The Agilent 8922M S generates 0 s for the 10 least significant bits of the 64 bit Cipher Key Kc 4 70 2 Ciphering 3 IMSI Attach Detach 4 Ke 5 Last LAI 6 Location Screens MS Information Signaling e You must enter an Authentication Key Ki If no Ki is entered a default value of 0 is used e When an authentication request occurs the BS SRES generated by the Agilent 8922M S should match the MS SRES received from the mobile station Partial Authentication Mode requires that you enter a RANDom number and the associated Kc for a particular SIM The MS SRES from the mobile station will be displayed but no BS SRES will be generated by the Agilent 8922M S This field selects the ciphering mode of the mobile station and the Agilent 8922
3. Agilent Technologies 8922M S Instrument BASIC Overview The Agilent 8922M S contains an HP Instrument BASIC computer that can run programs to control the Agilent 8922M S and any connected GPIB equipped instruments This provides a powerful test instrument and test system controller in one package Programs can be written on an external computer and loaded into the Agilent 8922M S or can be typed directly into the Agilent 8922M S s Instrument BASIC computer Programs can then be stored on memory cards The rest of this section of the manual refers to the HP Instrument BASIC Language known as IBASIC The information in this chapter is divided into two broad categories general information about IBASIC and information about IBASIC programming using the TESTS subsystem The general information category contains four sections e Configuration and Instrument Control e Loading Storing and Running e Entering and Editing Programs e Memory Cards The IBASIC programming category contains information on structuring IBASIC programs to run in the TESTS subsystem and some of the features of the TESTS subsystem that can be used in writing programs The IBASIC programming category contains one section e Programming and Using the TESTS Subsystem The Agilent 8922M S s IBASIC computer is the core of an automated test environment referred to as the TESTS subsystem This environment is available by accessing the TESTS screen Pr
4. 4 71 7 MS Band Capability 8 MS Revision 9 MS IMEI Request 10 MS IMSI 11 MS Originated Number 12 Paging IMSI 13 Paging Period Screens MS Information Signaling This field displays the value encoded in the Frequency Capability bits of the mobile station classmark 2 as defined in ETSI GSM 04 08 10 5 1 6 This field displays the value encoded in the Revision Level bits of the mobile station classmark 1 and 2 as defined in the ETSI GSM 04 08 10 5 1 5 and 10 5 1 6 respectively The field displays a value of Phase 1 or Phase 2 When this field is selected during a call the Agilent 8922M S will attempt to obtain the IMEI International Mobile Equipment Identity number of the mobile station If a correct IMEI number is obtained it will be displayed directly below MS IMEI Request This field displays the mobile station s IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity number obtained from the mobile station during call setup or a location update This field displays the called party BCD number the mobile station sent during the last MS originated call This field is updated each time an MS initiated call is accepted This field is blank if no called party BCD number was included in the message from the mobile station If an emergency call is made 112_EMERGENCY_CALL is displayed This is the IMSI number the Agilent 8922M S will use when paging the mobile station If you would like to automatically ente
5. Syne Mode Midanble 2 34 Possible Solutions to Solution 1 Trigger Timing Check if the trigger is being received On the MEAS SYNC screen press to gain access check if the correct burst type has been defined On the Data Bits screen Sync Status Errors Figure 2 18 Making Measurements If You Have Problems with a Measurement A The First Bit field on the Phase Freq Data Bits screen displays the time difference between when a trigger is being received and when the first bit of a burst occurred A The time difference is only valid if FMErrCount is 0 B Check the delay in the Trig Delay field B tt i0 DODLOOI000 0gignggiio 40 oo LLGLIOBLOL GO0G0L 1801 a0 QLIEOGItOE DATA BETS a0 30 LOOGLEOI1D 1111000010 60 ro OO16001102 it r HHAHMHHHA 6H AN AR RRA Loo Li 0001010103 LOJIOCLOID it ididioni RF Jeve errar Tre liaing Firat Bit 0 958 FHErrCount Hi SACS toe Mo Error ROEILE Chan Te Leu Timeslotr 2 35 Making Measurements If You Have Problems with a Measurement Solution 2 Midamble Sync On the MEAS SYNC screen press to gain access e Check the definition of the signal s burst type A e Check the Burst Sel field B MEASUREMENT STHE idambl e u y i GLOOLOIGLOO0OOLOOL L510 Burat Finition A Burst B au rat Trpel Burst Lenatha 47 Nidgsble Start Bit Fagle lens bl Tris
6. Tbth ed ee eee Notes 1 RP_BURST TL T3 are ignored if Tdtv Demod Sync Burst Sel 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 2 When Trig Delay lt gt 0 Trig Delay should be added to Toth Tbtl and Tdtv 3 Trig Delay must ALWAYS be set to less than the time between two positive going edges of RP_DMOD_TRC aoa ae So pete 7 _ undefined teri O O C 3 undef ined Digital Demod Timing Diagram 6 28 a undef ined t t X undef ined Figure 6 4 Connectors Timing Diagrams time RP_HOP_ADRS6 18 is stable before and or after event time from hop trigger rising edge for RF Gen or RF Analyzer to meet frequency phase specs for 1 timeslot hop time from hop trigger rising edge for RF Gen or RF Analyzer to meet frequency phase specs for 1 timestot hop during simultaneous hopping time between subsequent hop triggers of the same type not useful less than 1 15 ms time after RP_RST_SEQ_HOP returns high until RP_SEQ HOP rising edge can occur time after previous RP_SEQ_HOP rising edge until low RP_RST_SEQ HOP can occur Frequency Hop Timing Specification Table 6 29 Connectors Timing Diagrams Conditions RF Gen Hop Mode Hop RF Gen Hop Trig Arm Hop Address Source Ext RF Anatyzer Hop Mode Non Hop or RF Analyzer Hop Trig Disara Inputs Tr k u Tw gt RP_TX_HOP ae ee m RP_HOP_ADRSO 10 Results Th
7. found Refer to item 2 see Figure 8 2 on page 8 12 The location you select appears in the field 1 area Instrument BASIC Loading Storing and Running Continue Stop ContinuousSingle Qutrut Results Qutrut Destination All Foilures Qutput Heading TESTS Frocedure Location Library Program Autostart i ATRESI i i ott On FaContinue Comment Edit Sean Test Execution Conditions On UUT Failure Run Mode Sten Test Function Edit Sean Loading a Test Procedure 3 Select the Procedure field Refer to item 3 see Figure 8 3 on page 8 13 4 Choose the Test Procedure file that you want to download Refer to item 4 see Figure 8 3 on page 8 13 The Test Procedure you select appears in the field 3 area 5 Read the Comment field to ensure that the loaded Test Procedure file is the one you want Refer to item 5 see Figure 8 3 on page 8 13 8 12 NOTE Figure 8 3 Making or Deleting Test Procedure Files Instrument BASIC Loading Storing and Running The Test Procedure file should have a Test Library file with the same name Refer to the Programming and Using the TEST Subsystem for descriptions of Test Procedure and Library files and how these files relate to the program s code file 3 5 TESTS Procedure Location Library Program Autostart i RMN nee On ETT Comment Edit ec 4 Test Execution Conditions On UUT
8. 142 into the burst The measurement processor discards the 0 sample bin This effectively removes the ramp up overshoot Each measurement is also RF Power Qualified to ensure only valid bursts are measured Measurements with a result below the qualification level are discarded The remaining sample bins 1 5 are averaged for the displayed measurement result Each measurement is therefore based on a 375uS 102 bit sampling of the burst A mobile which does not meet the amplitude mask and has erratic amplitude across the burst could give erroneous results with this measurement algorithm It is therefore essential that mobiles first comply with the amplitude mask in GSM Rec 11 10 There are two ways of making a synchronized external measurement using triggers from the Agilent 8922M S Measurements Using 1 Use the G_EXT_TRIG on the rear panel SYSTEM_BUS connector See Triggers From The Agilent 8922M S Chapter 6 Connectors for a pin out diagram This is a separate trigger directly from the Protocol Processor It is only selectable from the SERVICE screen Once set it will provide continuous triggers on each frame Caution must be used as this trigger can have up to a 0 75 bit error due to the 156 157 bit variance in timeslots GSM Recommendations allow use of 156 157 bit timeslots instead of the 156 25 bit length To use the G_LEXT_TRIG signal Go to the CONFIG screen Select the SERVICE field on the right hand side of the sc
9. AF Anl In Specifications IN AM SPEECH and AM IN a rear panel connector are connected directly in parallel Avoid putting signals on both inputs simultaneously 8 IN HI AUDIO 9 IN LO AUDIO Connectors Front Panel Connectors of the Agilent Technologies 8922M S The input high connector is connected to the audio analyzer input This connector is used as the main external audio analyzer input connection when selected This connector is also used in combination with the audio input low signal to input a floating input signal for better noise performance to the audio analyzer See Also Screens Audio Audio In Lo The input low connector is connected to the audio analyzer input This connector is the main external audio analyzer input connection when selected and in FLOAT mode This connector is used in combination with the audio input high signal to input a floating input signal for better noise performance to the audio analyzer See Also Screens Audio Audio In Lo 10 IN OUT DATA MODULATION Agilent 8922M Only NOTE 11 MONITOR DEMODULATION OUT Agilent 8922M Only Connectors Front Panel Connectors of the Agilent Technologies 8922M S Data Input This connector is a data input when the instrument is settable See the Cell Configuration screen It is used to input 0 3 GMSK modulation data if selected to the RF generator This connector is selected when RF generator s modulation
10. Amplitude Resolution 0 4 dB Dynamic Range dB Offset kHz 100 200 300 400 600 800 to 1800 Range dB 24 42 53 60 63 64 NOTE When using Output RF Spectrum due to the Ramping measurement the dynamic range is decreased by 12 dB due to Peak Hold 3 23 Verifying Performance Agilent Technologies 8922M S Specifications Spectrum Analyzer Specifications Option 006 Frequency Range Frequency Span Resolution Bandwidth coupled Display Display Range Log Linearity Reference Level RF In Out Aux RF In Non harmonic Spurious Responses Residual Responses Image Rejection Supplemental Characteristics Level Accuracy Frequency Overrange Displayed Average Noise Level 10 MHz to 1 GHz Span Bandwidth lt 50 kHz 300 Hz lt 200 kHz 1 kHz lt 1 5 MHz 3 kHz lt 4 MHz 30 kHz Log 10 dB div 80 dB 1 1 dB 44 to 24 dBm 23 to 55 dBm 50 dBc max for inputs lt 30 dBm lt 70 dBm no input signal 0 dB attenuation gt 50 dB 2 5 dB To 1015 MHz lt 116 dBm 0 GB attenuation lt 50 kHz spans 3 24 Audio Analyzer Specifications Audio Source Frequency Specifications Range Accuracy Supplemental Characteristics Minimum Resolution Output Level Range Maximum Output Current Output Impedance Accuracy Residual Distortion THD noise amplitude gt 200 mV js Supplemental Characteristics Minimum Resolution DC Coupled Offset Range Accuracy Exte
11. Lage Delay Char 106 0 Seeech Fres TX La dea Tineaiot Bit Error Rate Measurement 2 19 NOTE NOTE Output RF Spectrum Measurements Available if Option 006 Spectrum Analyzer is Fitted Making Measurements Measurements By varying the Base station Amplitude field 4 you can test the mobile phone s receiver sensitivity Actual results can be compared with the values reported by the radio If the Base Station amplitude is lowered too much the radio will lose the call This will need to be re established by increasing the base station amplitude returning to the cell control screen and originating the call before you can continue measurements Not all phone types support burst by burst BER measurements The Output RF spectrum measurement shows the spectral power due to the effects of ramping or modulation at a specified frequency offset These are relative measurements that compare the result at the offset frequency with the value at the center frequency You can also view the output RF spectrum trace from this screen Method Select OUT RF SP in the cell control screen To make a measurement do the following e Ensure the Freq Offset is set to zero 1 see Figure 2 11 on page 2 21 e Select Ramp Ref or Mod Ref 2 depending on whether you want to make a ramping measurement or a modulation measurement 2 20 Making Measurements Measurements This sets the reference level to which the offset freque
12. Setting Up the HP Agilent 37900D Ensure that HP Agilent 37966B and HP Agilent 37967A software has been installed into the HP Agilent 37900D This software enables the HP Agilent 37900D to communicate with the Agilent 8922M From the HP Agilent 37900D start up screen highlight PERSONALITY and select _ This will display a submenu of personality options Select until 8922G is highlighted then hit Q Retur PERSONALITY APPLICATIONS MANUAL MODE HELP It is acceptable to select 8922G from the HP Agilent 37900D This option is a drop in replacement for 8922M Set Up Interface Ensure that the HP Agilent 37913A Interface Card is set up correctly Refer to the list below for Port A setting requirements Card Table 1 Interface Connection Setup DCE DTE Clock Source TxD Timing Source Mark Polarity A 6 Port A Settings RS 449 442 MONITOR DCE T FACE HIGH TX CLOCK DTE SOURCED NORMAL APPENDIX A Setting Up the HP Agilent 37900D From the HP Agilent 37900D start up screen highlight MANUAL MODE Select until CONFIGURATION is highlighted then hit 4 Retur_ PERSONALITY APPLICATIONS MANUAL MODE HELP Then from the CONFIGURATION MODE menu press M and select the slot to be modified Set up the parameters for Port A as shown below RS 449 422 RS 232 SLP Port A Port B Slot Card eh a ee ee ese se Se SS Se ae ae SS Ses Se 3 RS449 422 RS232 RS449 DCE I FACE HIGH MI
13. 1 AF Anl In This field selects the AF analyzer input Choices Scope In selects the SCOPE IN MEASURE front panel connector Speech Out selects the signal going to the MON SPEECH DEMODULATION OUT front panel connector AM Mod In selects the IN AM SPEECH MODULATION front panel connector Speech In selects the IN AM SPEECH MODULATION front panel connector FM Demod selects the FM demodulation discriminator Pls Demod selects the pulse demodulation detector Audio In selects the IN AUDIO front panel connector Audio Out selects the signal going to the AUDIO OUT front panel connector NOTE Scope In AM Mod In and Speech In are not featured in the Agilent 8922S 4 75 2 Controls 3 Marker 4 Meas Reset 5 Time div 6 Vert div 7 Vert Offset Screens Oscilloscope Main Controls This field selects the set of oscilloscope controls Choices Main Trigger Marker This field displays the signal level at the current marker position The units of measure for this field are determined by the AF Anl In selection See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG Units Selecting Meas Reset will erase any accumulated measurements used for calculating a final result and re start the measurement process for the following functions e HI LIMIT e LOLIMIT e AVG See Also Keys HI LIMIT LO LIMIT AVG This field selects the horizontal sweep time per division Choices 200 100 50 20 10 5 2 or
14. 6 0 dBm AUX RF OUT 127 0 to 14 0 dBm This field selects the alternate Controls of the Spectrum Analyzer measurement Choices Main RF Gen Marker Auxiliary This field sets the non hopped frequency or if the RF Gen Hop Control Hop Mode is set to Hop this field will show the frequency status as Hopped Range 10 0 to 1015 0 MHz This field displays the frequency and the level of the current marker position 4 124 1 Controls 2 Center Freq Marker To 3 Marker 4 Next Peak Marker To 5 Peak Marker To Screens Spectrum Analyzer Marker Controls Option 006 Only Spectrum Analyzer Marker Controls Option 006 Only SPECTRUM ANALYZER a a R REW 30kHz S WENS SEN AOE ee ee T S ER E L Yaga penen Ee ME O H H 314 600000 Lul 19 58 Ref Level MOBILE Chan Th Lev Tiweslot Center Freq 2 Ref Level Nore 5 7 This field selects the alternate Controls of the Spectrum Analyzer measurement Choices Main RF Gen Marker Auxiliary This field changes the center frequency setting to the frequency at the marker position This field displays the frequency and the level at the current marker position This field moves the marker to the next amplitude peak to the right of the current marker position This field moves the marker to the highest amplitude point on the trace 4 125 Screens Spectrum Analyzer Marker Controls Option 006 Onl
15. CW Freq CW Meas 4 54 CW Power CW Meas 4 55 CWFregErr CW Meas 4 54 cyclic redundancy check 4 9 4 12 D data bits 4 93 data bits measurement 2 19 Data Collection 8 35 record size 8 35 data input selection 4 18 4 24 Data Length 8 6 Configure 4 59 DataLink A 12 Date Configure 4 50 DC AM RF Generator 4 115 4 116 dc coupling AF generator 4 111 DCS1800 input attenuation 4 127 device programmer 8 23 discontinuous transmission 4 40 disk address 4 59 Display Logging Screen HP Agilent 37900D A 8 Display Messages A 9 Do Open Cal RF Analyzer 4 113 Done Phase Freq Multi burst 4 88 Downlink messages A 10 Download A Program 8 10 download code files 8 23 DRX Cell Control 4 40 DTX Cell Control 4 40 E echo 4 60 Echo Delay Cell Control 4 5 4 40 E GSM channel number 4 31 4 34 4 35 input attenuation 4 127 end call keys 5 4 ending a call A 10 Equipment required A 3 equipment supplied 1 2 ERROR 85 8 21 error message what to do 2 30 errors detected 4 89 Execute Cell Control 4 40 Ext Load R Audio 4 5 external disk specification Configure 4 59 external load resistance 4 5 external protocol logger A 2 F Fall Pos Pulse 4 104 Fast Bit Error Round Trip Delay 4 58 ff at end T O configuration 4 59 ff at start T O configuration 4 59 field types alphanumeric 4 2 data entry 4 2 list of choices 4 2 underlined entry 4 3 File Descriptions 8 37 Fi
16. Cell Configuration 4 17 4 23 Cell Control 4 37 Measurement Sync 4 64 assign keys 5 3 Atten Hold RF Generator 4 115 audio frequency generator 4 111 Audio In Audio 4 4 4 75 4 77 4 80 Audio In Lo Audio 4 5 audio input floating 4 5 grounded 4 5 Audio Out Audio 4 4 4 75 4 77 4 80 Auto Bit Error Test 4 13 auto all range hold 4 51 Auto Norm Oscilloscope Trigger Controls 4 78 automatic gain control RF analyzer 4 112 automatic level control speaker 4 6 autostart 8 32 Aux BCCH Cell Configuration 4 18 4 24 Aux RF In Configure 4 49 Aux RF Out Configure 4 50 average keys 5 3 transmitted power 4 96 4 98 4 100 averaging measurements 5 3 Avg TX Pwr Pwr Ramp Fall Edge 4 100 Pwr Ramp Rise Edge 4 96 Pwr Ramp Top 2 dB 4 98 B BA Cell Configuration 4 18 4 24 backing up memory card files 8 23 bad sync message 7 4 Bad Syncs Cell Control 4 31 4 37 base station allocation 4 18 4 24 base station identity code 4 20 4 26 battery discarding 8 25 in SRAM memory cards 8 23 replacing on memory cards 8 24 warning 8 25 battery holder 8 24 baud rate 4 62 BCC Cell Configuration 4 18 4 24 BE Count Bit Error Test 4 8 4 12 4 13 BE Ratio Bit Error Test 4 8 4 12 4 13 Beeper Configure 4 50 Bit Error Round Trip Delay 4 9 Bits Tested Index 1 Index Bit Error Test 4 12 Bits to Test Bit Error Test 4 12 buffers A 11 Burst Length Measurement Sync 4 64 Burst N
17. IMPORTANT Screens Cell Control 2 17 10 CELL CONTROL 2 i Inactive Call Counts Coller RRIBCCH Ciphiott Pages 0 Decode Errst MM Inactive RACKS Bad Syncs SACCH Neos HED Full Partial Adi bell B opsic RK i NCCE TX Levi RX Leut RE Levi Leut 1 1 Tin Adv RX Quali RX Quali ARF CH BCC 13 Demod Arn TCH Parms Relative MS Audig Cntl M3 Cnt Ary Disarm Tining Err Loopback a Hode n st DTX 18 tart ARF CN DAT ORK Signaling Timeslot HS Farms i a Tyre Tining Ady Speech 2 Q prii FS GEES o Screen mm Echo Delay Linit Coll Status Poo Posing TCH State TA Level S 16 Hode RF Gen H tro ARFCH RF Anl Amel Anplitude C Fl Timeslot Control 5 e dEn This field selects how an Mobile Station MS originated call will be connected Choices Manual connection means that a mobile initiated call must be answered manually using the key Auto connection means that a mobile initiated call will be answered automatically This field indicates the number of decode errors since the last Reset This field arms or disarms triggering for digital demodulation It is identical to the Demod Arm State field on the Digital Demod screen This field is set to Disarm whenever a measurement screen Output RF Spectrum Phase Frequency or Pulse is accessed When Demod Arm is disarmed the Agilent 8922M S cannot display information about the uplink When Demod Arm is re
18. Logical Channel if any Data Link Frame Header Layer 3 Message Type Layer 3 Message Contents in hexidecimal TDMA Frame number The Service Access Points SAP in the BS Agilent 8922M S that are recorded are Between CC and MM Between MM and RR Between RR and DL Between DL and PH The call is BS originated to a class II MS Authentication and encryption are not used The initial TCH is full rate on ARFCN 30 using timeslot 4 The intra cell handover is to a hopping TCH using ARFCN 10 62 and 114 with MAIO set to zero using timeslot 6 The inter cell handover is back to the ARFCN 30 timeslot 4 TCH The call is BS terminated The BCCH CCCH is using SD 4 organization on ARFCN 20 Paging mode is normal and DTX is off Requested MS transmit level is 15 This is an early assignment call without use of start times The MS in this case is using DL I frames for acknowledgement rather than piggybacking acknowledgement on following DL I frames This is a Phase I MS and therefore only BMO format BA CA and MA tables are used Uplink traffic is in bold typeface downlink traffic is in normal typeface APPENDIX A Protocol Log of a Typical Call Base originated call HST gt CC CC_SETUP_REQ Frame 2446544 To TCH1 non hopped ARFCN 30 CC gt MM MM_ESTABLISH Frame 2446544 Timeslot 4 SD 4 MM gt RR RR_EST Frame 2446544 organization RR gt DL DL_UNIT_DATA PCH RR Paging Request Type 1 06 21 03 08 09 10 10 76 98 10 32 54 Frame 244654
19. This field selects the alternate Views of the Pulse On Off Ratio measurement Choices Rise Edge Top 2 dB Fall Edge Summary 4 108 1 Amplitude 3 Marker Screens Pwr Ramp Pulse Fall Option 006 Only Pwr Ramp Pulse Fall Option 006 Only PULSE FALLING EDGE 7 r r 3 Lul 76 83 PONDE F o_ 1am 5 74 09 SyncStatus No Error Pmamamamnnn 6 MOBILE Chan TX Ley Timeslot View uls P Fall 8 4 3 8 1 This view displays Pulse On Off power spectral density versus time for the falling portion of the burst This is a copy of the RF Analyzer Amplitude field This is the amplitude to be assumed at the selected input port Range RF IN OUT 27 9 to 41 0 dBm AUX RF IN 58 0 to 20 0 dBm See Also Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Analyzer Chapter 3 Specifications This field displays the level at the current marker position See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT RFF AVG Units 4 109 3 MarkerPos 4 POnOffFall 5 SyncStatus 6 Trig Delay 7 View Screens Pwr Ramp Pulse Fall Option 006 Only This field selects the marker position for the rising trace Choices MarkerPos Fall Pos Range 0 0 to 56 0 us This field displays the measured amplitude at the fall position time relative to the average On power over the useful bits in the measured burst This field displays any errors that occurred while trying to synchronize to the demodulated da
20. To escape press 4 118 1 Broadcast Status 2 Code 3 Identifier Screens SMS Cell Broadcast SMS Cell Broadcast SNS CELL BROADCAST fessage essa STONED Broadcast Status Idle eooo Message Fields E Message 1 Code Identifier _ Lanauage Contents This is a test of the Short Message Service Message 2 Code Identifier Language Contents 15 poses containina the entire GSM alphabet iei Page Poge Zi To Screen Pose L4t ssrorssrenia Fage 15 This field indicates whether there is a valid Sending or invalid Idle message being sent on the cell broadcast channel CBCH This field switches to Sending when a valid message is being sent The Off status indicates that a CBCH is not configured This field identifies the particular message to be sent The default for message 1 is 0 The default for message 2 is 4095 Range 0 to 4095 This field selects the source and type of message The default for message 1 is 0 The default for message 2 is 0 Range 0 to 65535 4 119 4 Language 5 Message Broadcast NOTES Screens SMS Cell Broadcast This field selects the data coding scheme used for the message Default GSM sets the value of the data coding scheme to OxFO The default for message is English The default for message 2 is German Choices German English Italian French Spanish Dutch Swed
21. trigger source measurement synchronization 4 68 oscilloscope 4 79 tuning mode Configure 4 52 Type Cell Control 4 48 Typel 4 10 4 14 Typela 4 10 4 14 TypeIB 4 10 4 14 Typell 4 10 4 14 U units keys 5 12 Uplink messages A 10 use memory keys 5 9 Using the Knob 8 16 V verifying performance 3 2 Vert Offset Oscilloscope Main Controls 4 76 Vert div Oscilloscope Main Controls 4 76 vertical offset Index oscilloscope 4 76 vertical sensitivity oscilloscope 4 76 View Output RF Spectrum Main View 4 83 Pwr Ramp 4 103 volume speaker 4 6 W Wanted Phase Freq Multi burst 4 89 4 90 write protect switch setting 8 22 X Xmt Pace 8 6 Configure 4 62 Xon Xoff 4 62 Y yes keys 5 9 Z Zero Power CW Meas 4 55 Pwr Ramp Summary 4 103 Index 11
22. 1 ms 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 2 or 1 us This field vertical sensitivity sets the vertical amplitude per division The units of measure for this field are determined by the AF Anl In selection When selecting upper or lower limits of vertical sensitivity an UNCAL message appears on the display This message indicates that the scope is operating out with calibrated ranges See Also Screens Audio AF Anl In This field moves the displayed signal trace above or below the oscilloscope s fixed centerline 4 76 Screens Oscilloscope Trigger Controls Oscilloscope Trigger Controls r OSCILLOSCOPE Harker Tine EEN 10 00 Lvl E 0 08364 MOBILE ceseneedeneeceedaeen s e e Cha y SpeechQut i TR Lew i i Timeslot Controls 1 2 6 4 3 1 AF Anl In This field selects the AF analyzer input Choices Scope In selects the SCOPE IN MEASURE front panel connector Speech Out selects the signal going to the MON SPEECH DEMODULATION OUT front panel connector AM Mod Im selects the IN AM SPEECH MODULATION front panel connector Speech In selects the IN AM SPEECH MODULATION front panel connector FM Demod selects the FM demodulation discriminator Pls Demod selects the pulse demodulation detector Audio In selects the IN AUDIO front panel connector Audio Out selects the signal going to the AUDIO OUT front panel connector NOTE Scope In AM Mo
23. 19 Serial Baud 20 Serial In 21 Stop Length 22 Xmt Pace Screens 1O Configuration This field is used to select if data will be paced through the serial port Choices None disables the Xon Xoff function Xon Xoff sets ASCII control codes Xon and Xoff to either start or stop data transmission from the computer to the instrument This field sets the baud rate for serial port Choices 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 This field configures the serial port Inst communication to the serial input port or IBASIC control of the serial input port e Inst configures the serial port to connect to an external ASCII RS 232 terminal or computer e IBASIC allows the IBASIC controller to read the serial port This field sets the number of stop bits used for serial communication Choices 1 bits 1 5 bits 2 bits This field is used to select if data will be paced through the serial port Choices None disables the Xon Xoff function Xon Xoff sets ASCII control codes Xon and Xoff to either start or stop the instrument from transmitting to the computer 4 62 Screens Logging Logging LOGELHG IMPORTANT Option 003 must be installed and an external Protocol Logger must be connected for Logging functions to work For full details on this option and this screen refer to Appendix A Protocol Logging 4 63 1 ARFCN 2 Burst Length 3 Burst Number Screens Measurement Sync Measurement Sync 3 20 14 12
24. 3 Index 4 GPIB Mode Talk amp Listen 8 3 GPIB port 8 5 GPIB printer 8 31 GSM900 input attenuation 4 127 H handovers A 10 high limit keys 5 4 setting 5 4 turn off 5 4 high stability time base option 001 4 51 hold keys 5 4 hold all range hold 4 51 Hop Meas Freq RF Analyzer 4 113 Hop Mode RF Analyzer 4 113 RF Generator 4 116 Hop Offset RF Analyzer 4 113 Hop Trig RF Analyzer 4 114 RF Generator 4 116 How to obtain a Protocol Log A 8 HP AdvanceLink 8 7 HP Agilent 15756A Interface Cable A 3 HP Agilent 37900D A 11 HP Agilent 37900D Option 004 A 3 HP Agilent 37910A Slave Signalling Card A 3 HP Agilent 37913A RS232 449 Interface Card A 3 HP Agilent 37966A GSM software A 3 HP Agilent 37967A protocol monitor application software A 3 HP Agilent 8922M Option 003 A 3 IBASIC computer initializing memory cards 8 21 may be programmed 8 29 to configure external instruments 8 35 IBASIC Echo 8 6 8 9 Configure 4 60 IBASIC programming language code 8 29 IBASIC programs file structures 8 29 user written 8 29 IMSI attach detach 4 71 increment keys 5 4 initializing memory cards 8 21 input amplitude CW Meas 4 54 Input Atten Spectrum Analyzer Auxiliary Con trols 4 127 input attenuation DCS1800 radio 4 127 E GSM radio 4 127 GSM900 radio 4 127 input attenuator spectrum analyzer 4 127 Inst Echo 8 6 8 9 Configure 4 60 installation overview 1 5 installing software 3 5 ins
25. 4 RERS n HE Aidanal a u uabhar ELi DLODELIDIO fyoel 1 1116 7 This screen defines settings that determine how synchronization will occur for any of the following measurements e Pwr Ramp and Pulse e Output RF Spectrum e Pulse On Off Ratio If Auto is chosen in the Hopped TCH ARFCN Cntl field the measured ARFCN will be displayed as soon as a measurement is completed on a Hopped TCH This will be the lowest frequency ARFCN in the hop sequence If Specific is chosen from the Hopped TCH ARFCN Cnitl field enter a specific ARFCN from the hop sequence After Meas Arm is selected the Agilent 8922M S will make a measurement when the mobile is transmitting on the selected frequency This field displays the burst length of the Burst Type selected If Burst Type is set to User Defined the Burst Length will be 87 or 147 This field selects which burst definition is being displayed Range 0 to 3 4 64 4 Burst Sel 5 Burst Type 6 Burst Type 7 Burst Used Screens Measurement Sync This field selects the burst that the measurement will synchronize to Choices 0 1 2 3 Ext is used for selecting burst number 0 1 2 or 3 in real time using the SYSTEM BUS rear panel connector or using internal signals while Activated This field defines the burst type Choose from eleven burst types or User Def for specifying a user defined burst type Choices TSCO through TSC7 Training Sequence Codes are used for normal
26. 5 Figure 2 2 Making Measurements ACTIVE CELL COHTROL BASE STATIOH Broadcast On Chaneel E Les IS 13 da Aam ituds Channel 30 RE Law 23 E 98 to Br dea Tineslot 4 Re Qual 0 0 25 BER dba BERSHRENEHTS ROBILE PROHE Pack Fower BEL se aa ec g LE HEKS Tiapal r Exeected newt TR Level L5 dEr Active Cell Mode Making a Call From To call or page the mobile phone from the Agilent 8922M S it is necessary for the the Agilent 8922M S Agilent 8922M S to know the number of the SIM in the mobile phone This number to the Mobile Phone is the International Mobile Subscriber Identity IMSI This and other information is NOTE stored on the SIM card The Network number cannot be used to make a call The Network Telephone number is allocated to the SIM and is used in a real network to page the IMSI There are two ways the Agilent 8922M S can receive this information e Make a call from the mobile phone to the Agilent 8922M S Once the call is originated from the mobile phone the Agilent 8922M S automatically reads the IMSI on the SIM card If the previous call on the Agilent 8922M S was made with the SIM card inserted in the mobile phone and the mobile phone is camped to the Agilent 8922M S the mobile can be called by pressing e Enter the MS Information screen and enter the IMSI into the Agilent 8922M S manually 2 6 Making Measurements ACTIVE CELL Pre
27. 6 REN DIO 8 DIO 7 DIO 6 DIO 5 ISOMETRIC THREAD M3 5 x 0 6 24 PIN MICRO RIBBON SERIES 57 CONNECTOR Logic Levels The General Purpose Interface Bus logic levels are TTL compatible that is the true 1 state is 0 0 Vdc to 0 4 Vdc and the false 0 state is 2 5 Vdc to 5 Vdc Programming and Output Data Format Refer to Section 3 Operation Mating Connector Agilent 1251 0293 Amphenol 57 30240 Mating Cables Available Agilent10833A 1 meter 3 3 ft 10833B 2 meters 6 6 ft Agilent 10833C 4 meters 13 2 ft 10833D 0 5 meters 1 6 ft Cabling Restrictions 1 A General Purpose Interface Bus system may contain no more than 2 meters 6 6 ft of connecting cable per instrument 2 The maximum accumlative length of connecting cable for any General Purpose Interface Bus system is 20 meters 65 6 ft 6 OPT 001 REF OUT Connectors Rear Panel Connectors of the Agilent Technologies 8922M S The option 001 reference output connector when present is connected to an high stability 10 MHz reference Typically it is connected to REF IN using an Agilent supplied short jumper cable to get all timebase references locked to the high stability timebase reference This connector can also be used as a general purpose output This output should be turned off when not in use to reduce spurs and other unwanted signals Option 001 REF OUT is turned on and off by the OPT 001 REF OUT field on the Configur
28. 6 print address selecting 4 61 Print Adrs 8 5 Configure 4 61 Print Cancel Configure 4 61 Print Title Configure 4 61 Print To 8 5 printer configure to GPIB 8 35 for showing test results 8 31 options 8 35 RS 232 or GPIB 8 31 printer port T O configuration 4 61 printouts for the test results 8 30 problem solving 2 30 Procedure Files 8 26 Procedure files 8 2 Program Development Tools disk 8 16 Program Example 8 37 PROGram Interface Commands 8 16 Program Listing Explanation 8 40 program status run indicators 8 29 Program Structure 8 37 programming techniques 8 29 programs IBASIC file structures 8 29 protocol buffer A 8 protocol error messages 7 5 protocol interface connector A 2 Protocol Interface Port A 11 protocol messages A 8 Protocol Monitor A 11 protocol units A 8 Index 7 Index Pseudo Random Bit Sequence 4 42 Pulse RF Generator 4 117 pulse demodulation test RF analyzer 3 12 pulse measurement 2 16 pulse modulation RF generator 4 117 pulse modulation test 3 8 Pulse On Off Fall Pulse 4 105 pulse on off ratio 4 104 Pulse On Off Rise Pulse 4 105 Pwr Ramp Summary 4 101 R RACHs call counts 4 43 Cell Control 4 43 radio frequency analyzer 4 112 radio frequency generator 4 115 radio specifications 8 33 radio tests reduce testing time 8 33 selecting 8 32 ramping output RF spectrum power 4 83 Range Hold Configure 4 51 Rcv Pace 8 6 C
29. Agilent 8922M and Mobile Station may still be active with Agilent 8922M accumulating protocol messages to send to the HP Agilent 37900D With a call up this occurs about every 15 seconds The Agilent 8922M Option 003 occasionally send ABORTS to the attached protocol monitor These ABORTS are normal and logging data is not lost The ABORTS will normally only appear on the Display Logged Data screen of the HP Agilent 37900D Before logging can begin it is important to ensure that connection has been made With the HP Agilent 37900D on the main Signaling Test Set STS screen highlight MANUAL MODE and using the o1 key select MONITOR to get to the MONITOR MODE menu Set the instrument to monitor the link by pressing M which then takes you to the MONITOR SIGNALLING LINKS menu Press 1 to get a more detailed look at link 1 on the MONITOR ISDN SIGNALLING LINK 1 screen This is the link to which the cable from the Agilent 8922M is attached If the link is good then the Signalling Bit Rate under Channel 1 should be shown as 64000 Hz If 0 Hz appears under Channel 1 then there is a fault Check the following and if the signalling bit rate still does not change contact your local Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office for assistance 1 Check all cable connections 2 Check Service Latch on the Agilent 8922M 3 Check Interface Card setup in the HP Agilent 37900D APPENDIX A How to Obtain a Protocol Log MONITOR ISDN SIGN
30. Agilent 37900D A 4 bar graphs A 9 checking A 8 diagram A 4 indication A 9 verification A 9 connector protocol interface A 2 connectors 10 MHz output 6 10 13 MHz output 6 10 AM input 6 11 AM Speech input 6 4 audio input high 6 5 audio input low 6 5 audio output 6 7 auxiliary RF input 6 2 auxiliary RF output 6 2 clock 6 3 clock output 6 3 data input output 6 6 data output 6 4 EMMI bus 6 11 FM output 6 4 GPIB 6 12 monitor 6 7 opt 001 reference output 6 14 oscilloscope input 6 8 Parallel Port 6 15 PCN Interface 6 15 Protocol Interface 6 16 pulse modulation 6 8 pulse output 6 7 reference input 6 16 reference output 6 14 RF input output 6 8 serial port 6 17 speech 6 7 system bus 6 17 trigger input 6 9 valid data 6 9 video output 6 17 Cont Single Oscilloscope Trigger Controls 4 78 Control Bit Error Test 4 10 RF Analyzer 4 113 Control Ch Cell Config 4 19 4 25 control channel 4 19 4 25 Control mode 4 60 Controls Oscilloscope 4 76 Spectrum Analyzer AuxiliaryCon Index trols 4 127 Spectrum Analyzer Main Controls 4 122 Spectrum Analyzer Marker Controls 4 125 Spectrum Analyzer RF Gen Controls 4 124 COPY_PL program 8 21 how to run 8 23 country code 4 20 4 26 Coupling AF Generator 4 111 coupling bit error ratio 4 5 Creating A Library 8 44 Creating A Procedure 8 44 CRT for showing test results 8 31
31. Agilent 8903BAudio Analyzer HP Agilent 3456A Voltmeter Theory of the Test The audio analyzer is used to generate CW reference signals which are characterized by the voltmeter and fed into the UUT The voltmeter reading is used to normalize the reading from the UUT oscilloscope The oscilloscope measurements are taken using the UUT marker function which is set to the peak of the input sinewave Things To Check In Case Of Problems e The voltmeter reading is used as a reference to normalize the reading from the UUT The output measured result is the actual reading from the UUT normalized by the actual reading from the voltmeter If the voltmeter makes a faulty reading it will normalize the actual UUT response and cause it to appear 3 10 Verifying Performance Understanding the Tests faulty also If the front panel reading from the UUT is significantly different from the printed measured response the normalization may be the cause If the oscilloscope triggers incorrectly the peak search may not find the actual peak response on the display Test 08 RF Analyzer Equipment Required Level Test 09 RF Analyzer GMSK Modulation HP Agilent 8657A B Signal Generator HP Agilent 8902A Measuring Receiver HP Agilent 11722A Sensor Module Theory of the Test The signal generator is used to generate CW signals at various frequencies and power levels These are accurately characterized by the HP Agilent 8902A 11722A and used as
32. Analyzer Available if Option 006 Spectrum Analyzer is Fitted NOTE NOTE Making Measurements Measurements The spectrum analyzer allows you to view the mobile phone s signal over a wide dynamic range It also allows you to view any adjacent interference which may exist The spectrum analyzer can detect very low power signals where Active Cell and even Test Mode cannot operate Broken cable or connectors can be found using this function Method Select SPEC ANL in the cell control screen Selecting 1 provides access to other functions of the spectrum analyzer These are e Main the default screen has basic spectrum analyzer functions see Figure 2 12 on page 2 25 e RF Gen this controls the RF generator in the Agilent 8922M S The generator signal can be fed back into the spectrum analyzer for signal confirmation The Aux RF OUT port should be connected to the RF In Out and the RF Output set to Aux RF OUT If both the input and output are set to RF IN OUT large errors in measured signal level will be seen e Marker this screen allows you to control the marker for the input signal e Auxiliary the auxiliary screen controls the inputs and the attenuator settings 2 24 Making Measurements Measurements NOTE The RF Generator and spectrum analyzer can be tuned to different frequencies allowing the inspection of the IF signals inside the mobile phone SPECTRUM AHALYZER i i i i EBH 30tHz Hax Hold T
33. Call disconnected timer T expired An unknown timer is reported as Call disconnected cause unknown 7 5 Physical Layer Timer Data Link Layer Timers Radio Resource Management Timers Mobility Management Timers Messages Timers Timers The following is a brief description of the timers T100 T200 7 6 T3109 3111 rTOL 3250 3260 3270 3299 Radio Link Failure Loss of SACCH on uplink Data Link Failure Failed to receive RR or other acknowledgment of an I frame IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT timer MS failed to seize the assigned channel MS failed to seize the assigned channel Physical information repetition timer ASSIGNMENT COMMAND timer MS failed to seize the assigned channel Loss of communication timer Channel deactivation delay timer PAGING REQUEST timer MS did not respond to page TCH loopback timer TMSTI_REAL_CMD or LOC_UPD_ACC timer S failed to acknowledge a new TMSI AUTHENT_REQUEST timer MS failed to authenticate IDENTITY_REQUEST timer MS failed to identify HP Unique timer CIPHER_REQUEST HP 8922M S failed to configure for ciphering Call Control Timers Timer Values Table 2 1 T301 T303 T305 T306 T308 T310 T313 T323 Call Received timer MS failed to con
34. DSP Analyzer Communication Failure e Hop Controller Communication Channel Failure e Protocol Processor Communication Channel Failure e Communication failure with Signaling Board 7 2 Messages Firmware Error Firmware Error During a power up cycle the following error message may appear Firmware revision error in module XXXXX Take a note of the module name and contact your local Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office for more information 7 3 Bad Sync for demodulation only FM Error Level Late Level Short Low Level No Error RF Ovrload ShortBurst Messages Sync Status Sync Status This field displays any errors that occurred while trying to synchronize the demodulated data Some screens use this field to display progress during multi burst measurement When the measurement is completed to field returns to its normal state This message appears if a synchronization error happened since the last Demodulation Arm when Adjust Mode is disabled or since the last change to Trig Delay when Adjust Mode is enabled with Demod Arm already selected Possible causes of Bad Sync are e Useful bits occurred while power was too low e Demodulation trigger too early or too late e FM bit errors found while synchronizing to desired midamble RF overload At least one bit error was detected when comparing the measured midamble to the selected Midamble or User Defined Sync Pattern Sync Mode Mid
35. Disk Drive GPIB RS 232 printer 8902A 11722A 8903B 3456A 8657A B Opt 022 8904A Opt 001 002 8116A 8566B HP9000 Series 200 300 HP 2225A 3 4 Understanding the Tests To Load the Program Using the Compatibility Switch Verifying Performance Installing and Operating the Software Installing and Operating the Software Performance Test Software is supplied on a 3 5 inch double sided floppy disk and is written to run with BASIC 5 0 and later Modifications to the program should be limited to changing the default addresses and storing copies for back up purposes Test Descriptions contains a description of each test that is performed by the Performance Test software This description is intended to help locate problems if the software fails to execute properly or to help users understand the test methodology that is used in each performance test The descriptions are not step by step procedures for manual performance tests To verify the performance of the Agilent 8922M you need to convert the instrument back from an Agilent 8922G or convert the Agilent 8922S to an Agilent 8922E To do this refer to the following section titled Using the Compatibility Switch Back Conversion You are now ready to run the Performance Test Software 1 Put the disk in the disk drive 2 Type LOAD PT_8922 press CENTER After you have completed the Performance Tests return the instrument back to the Agilen
36. EAEE Se E oaeee 2 9 CW GENERATOR iseen renr oro rena ches E aeea EE anA EERENS 2 12 Measurements oechtccescntectecusceszeteshs oscncensssixoceseaceane raltutesaspentichencteeneeas 2 13 If You Have Problems with a Measurement ceeceeeeeeeseeeeeeees 2 30 Advanced HOatures icenen oe ene e S Ean ROERE Eni 2 39 3 Verifying Performance About This Chaptetiss 0 chic ie datie O Rs 3 2 Setting Up the LESS ss cesiesacessiass usiessa oi eere aeir i eea Eeee dae 3 3 Getting the Right Equipment essssesseseseesseressseesrsrererreeereserrrsereesee 3 4 Installing and Operating the Software sessesseeeeeseseerreerererrrrerses 3 5 Understanding the Tests eee eececesesesseeeecseeceesssesaecsseeeenrenseeneees 3 7 Understanding Test Failures o oo eeeeceeeeeeseeseecseesecaeesaeeaes 3 13 Agilent Technologies 8922M S Specifications ceeeceeeeeeeees 3 14 Contents 1 Contents 4 Screens Field TYPE Secas o tsceteet een cagneusetita A A 4 2 AUI cess iesesctacbesousssacceiscediansoediceansesdssesnastsaks IEE ER EES ESE EE EEIE SEAE 4 4 Bit Emor enea een e A ea 4 8 Bit ErrOL 2 sepapan RE OE 4 11 Cell Configuration GSM 900 ou ee eeeeeesesesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeceeseeeeeees 4 16 Cell Configuration E GSM DCS 1800 PCS 1900 oo 4 22 Cell Control Active Cell cccccsccscssssssessveesscecsensosssocsesesseesessonevens 4 27 Cell Control Active Cell oo eeceeeeececseseceeeeeeeeseteeesaeeseeeeesaes 4 31 Cell Control Test Mode s
37. Foilure Run Mode Choices Hue St OP Continuous Single Sten GGSMDIAG Qutput Results Output Destination GOCSDIAG rt Printer RF_ DIAGS MS_DLAGS Output Heading PER_CAL S S_CAL RAM_MNG SECURE LIT Test Function COPY CARD Edit Sean Failures Loading a Test Procedure 1 Select the front panel key and then select the Test Function field shown by item 1 see Figure 8 4 on page 8 14 2 Select Proc Mngr shown by item 2 see Figure 8 4 on page 8 14 8 13 Instrument BASIC Loading Storing and Running es llil Frach ire Locatica Library Fraris A lasiari ii Taai Eneti ien Conditgana Bast Sra See Un ULE Fialure Aun Bade Qeteut Results iret Destieaiica Dieut Hecding Test Fence ion Figure 8 4 Test Procedure and Test Library Files 3 Select the Procedure field shown by item 3 see Figure 8 5 on page 8 15 4 Enter the Test Procedure filename that you want to make or delete by using the alpha numeric list of characters shown by item 4 see Figure 8 5 on page 8 15 5 Select the Location to Make or Delete field shown by item 5 see Figure 8 5 on page 8 15 then select the file s location to be on memory card RAM or Disk from the list of choices shown in item 4 6 Enter up to two lines of comments to identify the new Test Procedure Refer to item 6 see Figure 8 5 on page 8 15 7 Select whether the new Test Procedure will use the current Test Library or if it will use
38. Input These are the rear panel serial transmit data and rear panel serial receive data lines Ground signals not listed individually here Pin 28 Input This is the rear panel trigger signal input for hopping the RF generator if selected It is used when externally addressing the hop frequencies It is connected to the hop controller It can also be configured to control RF generator output pulsing automatic level pulsing when this trigger occurs You must supply signals on the rear panel hop frequency table address input lines to select each RF generator hop frequency for each hop trigger Also the hop controller s hop address Source field must be set to Ext This line is active when the hop controller s Source field is set to Ext the RF generator s hop mode is set to Hop and the RF generator s hop trigger is set to Arm Requirements Amplitude TTL levels High drive requirement 100 uA Low drive requirement 2 mA Triggered by rising edge See Also Screens RFG RFA Hop Control Specifications Timing Diagrams Pin 9 Output This is the sequence trigger output It is connected to the DSP analyzer It outputs a positive going pulse when an internal sequence goes through something other than the next higher address or when reset occurs Hop Address Source Int 6 25 USE_MEM_EXT_T RIG Connectors Signal Descriptions for SYSTEM BUS 27 Pin Input This is the external trigger source for Use Mem When Trig Source is
39. Key Ki When the Authentication Mode is Partial or None this field is not displayed 4 73 RAND MS SRES BS SRES Screens MS Information Signaling This field displays the RAND number when the Authentication Mode is Full You must enter the RAND number and Kc when the Authentication Mode is Partial This field is not displayed when Authentication Mode is None This field is the Mobile Stations Signed RESponse to an authentication request When the Authentication Mode field is None this field will be blanked When the Authentication Mode is Full BSRES and MSRES should match If BSRES and MSRES don t match the call will be cleared This field is the Base Stations Signed RESponse and is only displayed when Authentication Mode is Full BSRES is calculated by the Agilent 8922M S then used to validate MSRES by checking for a match between BSRES and MSRES When the Authentication Mode field is Partial or None this field will be blanked 4 74 Screens Oscilloscope Main Controls Oscilloscope Main Controls y OSCILLOSCOPE 3 f Marker Hae a ae eae a a a erage O Tine EE 10 00 EEE AEIR A BEP EEEE EN E ENET A AEE E E EA tae sd il a EEE vl EE or ogves __ 4 AF Anl In i MOBILE pastes paataecues peine ae aa Possessed pn PEPEPEPE Chan SpeechQut i i i i i i i TX Lev 1 i i Timeslot Controls Yert div Vert Offset Time div 1 0 00 di 6 7 5
40. MA2 selects the MA2 table for frequency hopping Other Settings ARFCN appears in this field when Mode is set to Single 4 40 19 MM 20 Mode 21 Norm Screens Cell Control 2 22 CELL COHTERL Cal Suatyee CH banerater aot ar stideriss P inens Cheng i Decade Gere 19 H Cadet lie E Bad Soars FR Lyi EEI 21 ARFEH 20 i Pte netay a am 24 ARF z a mael Pipes lot Bone ria This field displays the latest events from the Mobility Management sublayer e Loc Upd e Ident Auth e TMSI Inactive Active This field selects the mode for the traffic control channel selected in the TCH Parms field Choices Single selects a single ARFCN Hopped selects a hopped traffic control channel using an MA table See Also Screens Cell Config MA1 Screens Cell Config MA2 This field uses the digital audio interface DAD to select the normal operating mode for the mobile station 4 41 NOTE 22 Pages 23 Paging 24 PRBS Pattrn Screens Cell Control 2 This field is not featured in the Agilent 8922S This field indicates the number of calls pages made to the mobile since the last Reset This field selects the paging mode Choices Single pages just once when attempting to make a call Cont pages continuously until a connection is made This field allows you to choose from 6 different bit patterns The Agilent 8922M S will send the selected sequence to a mobile statio
41. MONITOR OUT connector The output is always active See Also Screens Audio 12 MON SPEECH Agilent 8922M Only 13 AUDIO OUT 14 PULSE DEMODULATION OUT Agilent 8922M Only Connectors Front Panel Connectors of the Agilent Technologies 8922M S This connector is the output of the audio analyzer One of several uses for this connector is to monitor the received speech from an MS To choose demodulated speech select SpeechOut from the Audio screen AF Anl In field The same signal choices made for Audio measurements apply to this output The same signal that goes to the Audio appears at this connector MON SPEECH is directly in parallel with the rear panel MONITOR OUT connector This output is always active See Also Screens Audio AF Anl In The out connector is connected to a general purpose audio signal s output No internal connection is provided for this signal See Also Screens Audio AF Gen The pulse connector is connected to the receiver circuitry This signal provides the demodulated envelope of the RF input signal This output is always active See Also Specifications 15 PULSE MODULATION Agilent 8922M Only NOTE 16 RF IN OUT WARNING 17 SCOPE IN MEASURE Connectors Front Panel Connectors of the Agilent Technologies 8922M S The PULSE connector connects to the hop controller and to the RF output section when selected as active This signal is the TTL input to ex
42. Measuring Receiver HP Agilent 8902A Sensor Module HP Agilent 11722A Theory of the Test The UUT is set to generate CW signals at various levels and frequencies The HP Agilent 8902A 11722A is used as a power meter to measure high level signals and the HP Agilent 8902A tuned RF level function is used to measure low level signals Things To Check In Case Of Problems e The HP Agilent 8902A 11722A must be calibrated and zeroed for accurate measurement results The HP Agilent 11722A calibration factors must be entered into the HP Agilent 8902A e Low level signals from the Agilent 8922M S must be very stable to be measured by the tuned RF level function of the HP Agilent 8902A The instrument timebases should be locked together Also if the Agilent 8922 source has unusually high residual FM it may cause the low level measurements to fail because the HP Agilent 8902A cannot lock onto the signal e Mismatch uncertainty causes a high level of uncertainty in this measurement Test 02 Signal Generator Spectral Purity Test 03 Signal Pulse Modulation Verifying Performance Understanding the Tests Equipment Required HP Agilent 8566B Spectrum Analyzer Theory of the Test The UUT is set to generate a CW signal at various levels and frequencies The HP Agilent 8566B is used to measure the signal level and then the level of the harmonics or spurious signals Things To Check In Case Of Problems e The instruments should have their tim
43. Midanble s0 100 Tria Delay Marker Pos PHASE FRO DATA BITS More 3 6 4 This view displays phase error versus time The vertical range is scaled to the measurement The horizontal range is 0 to 147 or 0 to 87 bit periods depending on the burst type When multiburst is turned on display update rate for power versus time and phase traces will be slowed down while multiple bursts are collected This field is only shown when multi burst is ON It shows the burst count setting This field displays the marker position in time relative to bit 0 of the received burst This field sets the position on the trace that phase error will be measured and displayed The marker position is settable in units of division div only 4 91 4 Midamble NOTE 5 SyncStatus 6 Trig Delay 7 View Screens Phase Freq Phase Err This field provides the option of specifying the bits used for calculating an ideal phase trajectory The DSP Analyzer calculates the ideal phase trajectory then compares it with the transmitted signal s phase trajectory to determine phase and frequency error Choices Expected causes the DSP Analyzer to calculate the ideal phase trajectory using the bits displayed on the Meas Sync screen This field is called Midamble or User Defined Sync Pattern depending on which Burst Type is chosen Measured causes the DSP Analyzer to calculate the ideal phase trajectory based
44. NEMA6 15P Black United States Canada 8120 2956 3 90 STR Gray Denmark 8120 2957 4 90 90 4 STR STR 7 STR STR IEC83 B1 Black South Africa India 8 STR 90 Gray 6 8120 2191 8120 3997 STR STR CEE22 V1 59 Jade Gray Systems Cabinet Use STR STR Jade Gray STR 90 Jade Gray 8120 4379 90 90 Jade Gray Part number shown for plug is industry identifier for plug only Number shown for cable is Agilent Number for complete cable including plug E Earth Ground L Line N Neutral STR Straight 100V Same piug as above 8120 4211 9 9 7 8 7 7 8 8 9 9 9 7 7 7 8120 4600 7 8120 1860 0 0 9 o 9 9 0 0 10 0 0 9 9 9 9 8120 1575 31 59 80 1 4 Installing Your Agilent 8922M S Installation Overview Installation Overview 1 Connect a 1 2 5 10 or 13 MHz signal to the REF IN If you are using option 001 connect as shown see Figure 1 2 on page 1 5 with the supplied cable OPT 001 REF OUT to REF IN 2 Connect the supplied power cord to the Agilent 8922M S and power up the instrument 1 g I g a o o p Power Source a QD M A _ ciol Figure 1 2 Rear View Connections 1 5 Installing Your Agilent 8922M S Installation Overview 3 Access the CONFIG screen to customize the set up of your Agilent 8922M S This is done by e Moving to the CONF IG field in the bottom right hand corner of the C
45. Output Destination BLL Failures ert Printer Output Heading Test Function Edit Sean Tests Screen of the Agilent 8922M S Making a Test Sequence The Test Sequence menu lets you select radio tests and the order you want them performed 1 Select the Edit Seqn field A test sequence screen similar to that shown in Figure 8 14 on page 8 33 appears 2 Select the Insrt Stp field or Delet Stp field as needed to insert or delete tests on the screen Refer to item 1 in Figure 8 14 on page 8 33 3 Select the Step field and turn the knob to the test you want to change As you turn the knob the test s step number name and description changes 4 Select the Test Name field and turn the knob to select the desired test Refer to item 4 in Figure 8 14 on page 8 33 As you turn the knob the test name and description changes along with the test number shown in the Choices menu 8 32 Instrument BASIC Programming and Using the TESTS Subsystem 5 Select the Yes No field and decide if the test is to be run on all channels select Yes or if the test is to be run on prime channels only select No Prime channels are selected from the Edit Freq field Four factors determine how long it takes to test a radio e The number of tests selected in the sequence e The kind of tests that are selected e The order in which the tests are selected e The number of points measured in a test This is determined by the start stop and
46. Pulse Option 006 Only Pwr Ramp Pulse Option 006 Only 4 5 3 Meas Syne Heas ee Syne Status No Error RF Analyzer 1 dBm MOBILE Chan TH Lew Timeslot Meas Def Meas Tria Single Cont Tria Delay 473 4 7 2 9 8 This is a copy of the RF Analyzer Amplitude field This is the amplitude to be assumed at the selected input port Range RF IN OUT 27 9 to 41 0 dBm AUX RF IN 58 0 to 20 0 dBm See Also Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Analyzer Chapter 3 Specifications This field selects the time relative to the center of the last bit that the amplitude on the amplitude envelope will be measured Range 0 0 us to 56 us This field displays the frequency at which measurements are being made Test Mode only 4 104 4 Meas Sync Sync Status 5 Pulse On Off Fall NOTE NOTE 6 Pulse On Off Rise 7 Rise Pos 8 Single Cont Screens Pwr Ramp Pulse Option 006 Only This field displays any errors that occurred while trying to synchronize to the demodulated data See Also Making Measurements Solving Problems Messages This field displays the measured amplitude at the fall position time relative to the average On power over the useful bits in the measured burst See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG METER Units The Pulse On Off Ratio measurement requires the use of measurements on three bursts the first is
47. Quali B Hens Svit Haas Srne Burst Gal Syvec Stotus i ft JI EACH Tris Source eI THES Ext Penod Burst Used FH ErrCoant SIRACH Tria Delay T Gras Mode Iria Tinting Deaod fra Hoemed TCH ENM Firat Fit REFCH Crt ea Oisara th Check the bit pattern of your measurement Perform a Data Bits measurement D An M will display under the bits that are identified as the midamble bits DATA BETS i i0 20 a0 DODLOOI0OD O7igpggiio 100ILIQIIO 1111000010 Tre alnas Firat Bit 40 30 60 rg PLGLIOGLOL d d hiis i di iii i il r HHAK HHHA HHHHHRHHAH FHErrCount z a0 Loo Lid O10 DLIKOGILDIE QODIQEQI0I Laden oie A 7 STARE Sea Lae Mo Error D Leo Dimgitii i idi t RF lewe rrg Polarier Tria Delar Hideable 2 36 Making Measurements If You Have Problems with a Measurement Solution 3 Level Check the Gamay fields on the RF Generator RF Analyzer screen press SHIFT CELL CNTL RFG RFA to gain access Pulse field a if signal is pulsed Ext or Hop Trig should be selected Amplitude field b for the expected amplitude Frequency field c for the correct frequency RF Input field d for the correct connector choice NA uu A U AGC Mode field e If either Open or Auto is the selected mode check the value in the Open Loop DAC f Value field If Closed is the selected mode check that the burst is repetitive
48. RS232 DTE I FACE HIGH M 2 Slave Signal 1 No Card No Card 0 No Card No Card CURRENT SETTING I Interface gt gt RS 449 442 gt gt RS 449 442 S connection Setup gt gt MONITOR gt gt MONITOR D DCE DTE gt gt DCE gt gt DTE C Clock source gt gt I FACE HIGH gt gt I FACE HIGH T TXD Timing source gt gt TX CLOCK DTE SOURCED gt gt TX CLOCK DCE SOURCED P mark Polarity gt gt NORMAL gt gt NORMAL O modify Other port A Auto configure other port Q Quit Enter menu option For Example to change the Interface Setting Press T A new menu is shown listing the available options When you have selected the required option you are returned to the above menu Select Quit Q from keyboard twice Select Yes Y from keyboard to return to start up screen Refer to the HP Agilent 37900D Monitor Guide for detailed information on using the HP Agilent 37900D Signaling Test Set A 7 NOTE NOTE NOTE Check connection If Connection not working APPENDIX A How to Obtain a Protocol Log How to Obtain a Protocol Log Protocol units are stored in a buffer in the Agilent 8922M until a certain number 100 has been accumulated and then they are sent out to the interface in a block This means that it is not possible to have time stamps attached to the messages by the HP Agilent 37900D Also even though there is nothing happening on the HP Agilent 37900D the
49. Rise Option 006 Only I ponotfRise 4 64 96 E E EO Pecccecesedeecesnsteapenesaneenteceeeeoed SyneStatus No Error MOBILE I Chan 5 Ta Ley Timeslot dB Amplitude View Tria Delay 3 6 1 This view displays Pulse On Off power spectral density versus time for the rising portion of the burst 1 Amplitude This is a copy of the RF Analyzer Amplitude field This is the amplitude to be assumed at the selected input port Range RF IN OUT 27 9 to 41 0 dBm AUX RF IN 58 0 to 20 0 dBm See Also Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Analyzer Chapter 3 Specifications 2 Marker This field displays the level at the current marker position See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF AVG Units 3 MarkerPos This field selects the marker position for the rising trace Choices MarkerPos Rise Pos 4 107 4 POnOffRise 5 SyncStatus 6 Trig Delay 7 View Screens Pwr Ramp Pulse Rise Option 006 Only This field displays the measured amplitude at the rise position time relative to the average On power over the useful bits in the measured burst See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET Units This field displays any errors that occurred while trying to synchronize to the demodulated data See Also Making Measurements Solving Problems Messages This field sets the time delay between a valid trigger event and the beginning of a measurement Range 0 to 5000 00 us
50. This First Bit field displays the position in time of the first useful bit relative to the delayed measurement trigger See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG Units The FMErr Count field displays the number of bit differences detected when comparing the demodulated data bits to the selected midamble or user defined synchronization pattern when Sync Mode is set to Midamble This field will display 0 if Sync Mode is set to Amplitude Screens Measurement Sync Syne Mode This field selects alternate views of the measurement Choices Phase Frq Phase Err 4 94 NOTE 1 Amplitude 2 Marker 3 Marker Pos Screens Pwr Ramp Rise Edge Pwr Ramp Rise Edge r AMPLITUDE RISING EDGE Marker 2 Time o 0 Lvl 0 21 a g 896 0 MHZ Pk OTK Pur 5 SyneStatus No Error MOBILE Chan k TX Ley 6 Timeslot More 4 3 T 1 This view displays the rising portion of the amplitude envelope with the amplitude mask superimposed The vertical range is 40 to 5 dB The horizontal range is 8 to 4 bit periods When multiburst is turned on display update rate for power versus time and phase traces will be slowed down while multiple bursts are collected This is a copy of the RF analyzer Amplitude field This is the amplitude to be assumed at the selected input port Range RF IN OUT 27 9 to 41 0 dBm AUX RF IN 58 0 to 20 0 dBm See Also Scre
51. Time since calibration X Aging rate Temperature Effects Accuracy of calibration External Reference Input Frequency 13 10 5 2 or 1 MHz 30 ppm Level 0 to 10 dBm Supplemental Characteristics Nominal Impedance 50 Q 10 MHz OUT rear panel BNC Level gt 8 0 dBm nominal Impedance 50 Q nominal 13 MHz OUT rear panel BNC Level gt 8 0 dBm nominal Impedance 50 Q nominal Fixed Reference Mode Aging lt 2 ppm year Temperature Stability 1 ppm 0 to 55 C Warm up Time lt 30 minutes 2ppm of final frequency Tunable Reference Mode Allows offsetting the internal reference by a selected amount relative to the High Stability Reference Option 001 or an External Reference Required External Reference Accuracy 0 5 ppm Tune Range 30 ppm Reference Accuracy 1 ppm accuracy of External Reference or High Stability Option 001 Temperature Stability lt 4 ppm for selected offsets of up to 30 ppm The Video Out connector on the rear panel outputs a 15 kHz PAL CVBS underscanning compatible signal 3 30 Verifying Performance Agilent Technologies 8922M S Specifications 3 31 NOTE Screens If you have the Agilent 8922M S Option 010 Multi Band Test System refer to the appropriate A gilent 8922 Multi Band User s Guide for more information on additional screens and screen differences 4 1 1 Alphanumeric 2 Data Entry 3 List of Choices Screens Field Types Fie
52. a reference The CW signals are then used to test the UUT which is compared to the reference reading taken by the HP Agilent 8902A 11722A Things To Check In Case Of Problems e Mismatch uncertainties cause a high level of measurement uncertainty in this measurement If the HP Agilent 11722A or HP Agilent 8657A B has a high SWR the accuracy of the results may be reduced Equipment Required HP Agilent 8116APulse Generator HP Agilent 8904A Opt 001 002Multifunction Synthesizer HP Agilent 8657A B Option 022 Signal Generator Theory of the Test The HP Agilent 8904A frequency modulates the GMSK signal generator with a known amount of phase error This test signal is used to verify the UUT s ability to measure this known signal The actual measurements are compared to the predicted to determine the accuracy of the UUT The HP Agilent 8904A is also used to create the 270 833 kHz clock signal and the pulse generator is used to create a random data pattern Polarity of the data signal from the HP Agilent 8657A B Option 022 is not important in this measurement Things To Check In Case Of Problems e Make certain the option 022 part of the 8657A B is locked up to the 270 833 kHz 3 11 Test A RF Analyzer Pulse Demodulation Test B Spectrum Analyzer Option 006 only Verifying Performance Understanding the Tests clock signal The option does not have GPIB control so the program cannot verify that the option is operational Equipment R
53. a traffic channel is established using the parameters from a TCH1 setup see TCH Parms Cell Control screen e TCH2 indicates that a traffic channel is established using the parameters from a TCH2 setup see TCH Parms Cell Control screen e None is displayed when the instrument mode is Settable see Cell Configuration screen 4 44 31 SACCH Meas N Node e T 32 fall Cntl ARFCN c DAI Sisnaling Timeslot MS Porns i E Normal Type Timing Ady Speech Connect mi Echo T Echo Delay Limit Coll Status Paging TCH State TR Level Node 15 TCH Control ARFCH RF Anl Anel T an Call Statusi Inactive Call Counts Calleri RRIBCCH Ciph Ott Fases 0 Decode Errst MM Inactive RACHs 0 Bad Symes 9 saa Meas EEB Full Portial Adi Cell BSIC TH Levi RK Levi RX Levi RX Levi NCC Screens Cell Control 2 CELL CONTROL 2 Tin Ady RX Qual RX Qual ARFCH BCC Demod Arm TCH Parns Relative MS Audio Cntl MS Cntl ro Disarn Timing Err Loopback Timeslot Control NS TE 4 These fields indicate the measurement results of a slow associated control channel measurement TX Lev indicates the mobile station s reported transmitter power level Tim Adv is the mobile station s reported timing advance Full RX Lev is the mobile station s received level of power from the serving cell using the Full measurement method Full RX Qual is the mobile station s received quality of si
54. allows one test to be performed Cont allows testing to automatically repeat This field displays any errors that occurred while trying to synchronize to the demodulated data See Also Making Measurements Solving Problems Messages This field sets the time delay between a valid trigger event and the beginning of a measurement Range 0 to 5000 00 us This field selects alternate views of the measurement Choices Phase Err Data Bits 4 87 NOTE 1 Amplitude 2 Done Screens Phase and Frequency Error Multi burst ON Phase and Frequency Error Multi burst ON 6 PHASE AND FREQUENCY ERROR Error Mean Haxinum Minimum Last Peak Phase 6 40 7126 3648 6 43 n BE dea RMS Phase 2126 2 60 1 40 2 09 5 EE Hz Freauency 10 38 8 10 26 80 0 90 8 gt bad RF Analyzer MOBILE Anplitude Chan EP L dBn Tineslot Y PHASE ERAI be DATA BITS Hore When multiburst is turned on display update rate for power versus time and phase traces will be slowed down while multiple bursts are collected This is a copy of the RF Analyzer Amplitude field This is the amplitude to be assumed at the selected input port Range RF IN OUT 27 9 to 41 0 dBm AUX RF IN 58 0 to 20 0 dBm See Also Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Analyzer This field displays the number of bursts that have been carried out during a measurement cycle It is updated every three bursts When the measurement cycle
55. at least one timeslot every two frames Check the actual amplitude of the input signal Perform a Peak Carrier Power measurement EF GEHERRTOR 7 RF FHALTZER AF Gan Hod Source EF Gen Hor Comirod CHEK Ext aT a Anplitude 64 l Asp i tude Pulse ay ot Cc Hoe Offset GE Hode AES kHE d EF input Deen Auto Hoehne RF rea ORC Valus MHz 2 37 Making Measurements If You Have Problems with a Measurement Solution 4 Amplitude Envelope e Check if the Pulse Amplitude is 1 dB of the expected value during the useful part of the burst If FM Errors Perform a Phase Freq Data Bits measurement Dashes a will display under the bits where the power is too low If No FM Errors Perform pulse demodulation measurements Connect PULSE DEMODULATION OUT connector to SCOPE IN MEASURE connector on the front panel DATA BETS Ira liains i i0 20 30 DODLOOIOOD O7igpggiio LOODLEOTID 1111000010 Firat Bit a Le SQ 60 Oo GOOGHL IGOR ddi tii i iild r FHErrCount MHARMHAAN 6A ARR b a0 Loo Lid QLILOGTIOE DONDE LOJIOCLTEIQ STR PATHS Mo Error 140 LOidioon RF Jevel erra J E Tineslot 47da decsured 2 38 Other Screens Making Measurements Advanced Features Advanced Features The screens mentioned in this section are not necessary for simple measurement of mobile phones as the work is done by the functions
56. bursts RACH Random Access Channel is used for access bursts SCH Synchronization Channel is used for synchronization bursts FCH Frequency Channel is used for frequency correction bursts User Def User Defined is used when your burst does not conform to any of the burst types listed such as PRBS or when measuring noisy signals User defined burst lengths must be 87 or 147 plus 4 guard bits and the User Defined Sync Pattern can comprise part of or all of the bits in the burst To measure a noisy signal approx 10 deg rms enter the entire burst in User Defined Sync Pattern and use Midamble Expected see Screens DSP Analyzer Data Bits or Phase Err The ideal phase trajectory will be calculated from the User Defined Sync Pattern eliminating the problem of extremely high peak phase error due to bit errors User Def is not allowed for Digital Demod This field displays a summary of the Burst Type definitions for the four definable bursts This field displays which one of four possible burst types was used for synchronization or alignment during a measurement Refer to the Burst Definition or Burst Def fields 4 65 8 Demod Arm IMPORTANT 9 First Bit 10 FM ErrCount 11 Hopped TCH ARFCN Cntl 12 Midamble Screens Measurement Sync This field arms or disarms triggering for digital demodulation It is identical to the Demod Arm State field on the Digital Demod screen This field is set to Disarm whenev
57. customized information Agilent supply both micro and standard Test SIMs e Connect the mobile phone to the RF IN OUT connector on the front panel of the Agilent 8922M S e Switch on the mobile phone and wait for it to camp to the Agilent 8922M S most mobile phones display 001 01 when the mobile phone has camped e Dial any number on the mobile phone and press send The call set up should now proceed The CALL STATUS field on the screen should display CONNECTED 2 see Figure 2 2 on page 2 6 Once the call has been established the following information is displayed e Peak Power transmitted by the mobile phone is displayed in the center of the screen e Inthe CELL STATUS area 3 see Figure 2 2 on page 2 6 the mobile phone reports its e Transmit power level TX Lev e Received level RX Lev e Received signal quality RX Qual e Confirmation of the Traffic Channel and Timeslot is displayed to the left of the mobile phone reports If the call does not proceed there may be a problem with the mobile phone Refer to Test Mode in this chapter which explains how to configure the Agilent 8922M S to troubleshoot the mobile phone When a call is connected any speech received from the mobile phone is echoed back by the Agilent 8922M S into the mobile phone with a 0 5 second delay This allows provisional checking of the mobile phone s audio sections by speaking into the mobile phone and listening for the echo of your voice 2
58. dBm the actual level out this port is 10 dBm When this port is used as an input the CW Power Peak TX Power measurements and Spectrum Analyzer Marker Level Lv1 are automatically reduced e Enter a negative value to indicate a loss such as cable loss The RF Generator level out this port is automatically set to that amount above which is indicated in the RF Generator s Amplitude field to compensate When used as an input the CW Power PK TX Power Fast TX Carrier Power measurements and Spectrum Analyzer Marker Lv1 are increased This field selects between 50 ohm and emf voltage units for the RF generator amplitude settings 4 52 17 RF Level Offset 18 Screen Freeze 19 SERVICE 20 Time Screens Configure This field enables disables the effects of the RF In Out Aux RF Out and Aux RF In fields below it e When set to On the RF Generator amplitude and RF Analyzer power measurement are offset by the values entered in these fields e When set to Off the values in these fields are ignored See Also Aux RF InAux RF Out RF In Out This field enables disables screen updating The default setting is screen updating OFF When enabled all keys and control knob are still active The primary use of this field is for GPIB control When this field is returned to ON the screen returns to the state it was in when measurements were being made Screen freezing is used to enhance speed improvements This f
59. displayed below the measurement e Enter the desired number of measurement samples to be used for calculating the average or e Press to use the currently displayed number of samples To turn averaging off position the cursor in front of the unit of measure and press SHIFT CINGRXID AVG then ONOFF This key cancels the current operation This key accesses the Cell Control screen This is the screen that appears at power up or after preset See Also Screens Cell Control 6 CELL CONFIG 7 END CALL 8 HI LIMIT 9 HOLD 10 INCR 10 11 INCR x10 Keys Function Keys This key accesses the Cell Config screen giving access to Base Station emulation parameters See Also Screens Cell Config This key ends a call in progress This key is used if you want to be alerted when a measurement exceeds a specified value To Set a High Limit e Position the cursor at the measurement field of your choice Press SHIFT HI LIMIT e Enter the value you want the high limit to be e Press or a units key A HI or H annunciator will appear If a limit is exceeded during a measurement a beep will sound the beeper ON OFF control can be found in the Configure screen and Measurement high limit exceeded will be displayed The HI or H annunciator will also flash as long as the measurement is displayed To Turn Off or On a High limit When a limit is turned off its value is retained but is no
60. div only 4 97 4 Mask NOTE 5 Pk TX Pwr 6 SyncStatus 7 Trig Delay 8 View Screens Pwr Ramp Top 2 dB This field turns the amplitude mask on or off In PCS 1900 mode only requires HP Agilent 83220A E this field has three choices Off Narrow or Relax Narrow refers to the old ETSI phase 1 power vs time mask Relax refers to the new ETSI phase 11 power vs time mask where the specifications are relaxed at lower power levels This field displays the average power over the useful bits in the measured burst It is measured from the center of the first useful bit to the center of the last useful bit This measurement is only available when using the RF IN OUT port See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG Units This field displays any errors that occurred while trying to synchronize to the demodulated data During multi burst measurement this field indicates the measurement progress When the measurement is complete the SyncStatus is displayed See Also Making Measurements Solving Problems Messages This field sets the time delay between a valid trigger event and the beginning of a measurement Range 0 to 5000 00 us This field selects alternate views of the measurement Choices Rise Edge Top 2 dB Fall Edge Summary If you have option 006 spectrum analyzer installed you will also be offered the following measurement screens e Pulse e Puls Rise e Puls Fall 4 98 NOTE 1 Amp
61. entirely on demodulated data bits When measuring noisy signals approx 10 deg rms define your entire burst as a User Defined Sync Pattern and select Expected This will eliminate the problem of bit errors causing gross peak phase errors See Also Screens Measurement Sync This field displays any errors that occurred while trying to synchronize to the demodulated data See Also Making Measurements Solving Problems Messages This field sets the time delay between a valid trigger event and the beginning of a measurement Range 0 to 5000 00 us This field selects alternate views of the measurement Choices Phase Main Data Bits 4 92 NOTE 1 Bursts 2 Midamble Screens Phase Freq Data Bits Phase Freq Data Bits DATA BITS Tra Timing 6 10 20 30 0000100101 1000010011 1000110101 1110000010 First Bit 0 782 40 50 l 70 iooooooo0o 1100010010 0010011101 O110000010 FHErrCount MMM AMM MMMM MM Met 0 80 a0 100 110 Bursts 10 0111010001 101011100 0110101100 1110011000 MME SyncStatus No Error 120 130 140 Q110011011 110101000 11100000 MOBILE Sy Chan 4 MH nidanble bit RF level error TH Ley Timeslot Polarity Tria Delay Midamble Toaale 4735 Measured More 3 5 2 This screen displays the measured demodulated data bits and tags indicating how each bit was interpreted by the measurement When multiburst is turned on display update rate for power versus time and phase
62. for a valid trigger event then make the measurement currently selected Meas Arm only applies to Phase Freq Pwr Ramp BER Output RF Spectrum and Pulse On Off measurements It can be particularly useful for measuring RACH bursts See Also Screens Measurement Sync Meas Trig 15 MEAS SYNC 16 METER 17 MS INFO 18 MSSG 19 NO 20 ON OFF 21 ORG CALL 22 PREV 23 PRINT Keys Function Keys This key is used to access the measurement synchronization screen See Also Screens Measurement Sync This key is used to display a measurement in both a digital readout and an analog meter display You can choose your own meter scale by selecting the Meter choices in the bottom right hand corner of the screen 1 Position the cursor in front of the unit of measure for the measurement you want to display 2 Press SHIFT CNCR SET METER To display the Meter menu in the lower right corner of the screen 3 Select On Off to display the meter This key is used to access the MS mobile station Information Signaling screen This key is used to access the message screen See Also Screens Message This key is used to respond to Yes No questions that appear on the screen This key is used to turn functions on or off This key Originate Call is used to make a base station originated call from the This key is used to return to the screen displayed prior to the current screen This key is used to print
63. hop controller This signal is primarily used to reset the internal hop address register to zero before a hopping sequence reaches the end of the hop frequency table s The signal should normally be kept TTL high This signal is always active To reset the internal hop sequence counter however the reset will only occur on a subsequent RP_SEQ_HOP signal when the hop controller s hop address source is set to Seq Requirements Amplitude TTL levels High drive requirement 100 uA Low drive requirement 2 mA Active level Low See Also Screens RFG RFA Hop Control Specifications Timing Diagrams 6 23 RP_RX_ HOP RP_SEQ HOP Connectors Signal Descriptions for SYSTEM BUS Pin 10 Input This is the rear panel trigger signal input for hopping the RF analyzer if selected It is used when externally addressing the hop frequencies You must supply signals on the rear panel hop frequency table address input lines to select each RF analyzer hop frequency for each RF analyzer hop trigger Also the hop controller s hop address source must be set to Ext This line is active when the hop controller s hop address source is set to Ext the RF analyzer s hop mode is set to Hop and the RF analyzer s hop trigger is set to Arm Requirements Amplitude TTL levels High drive requirement 100 uA Low drive requirement 2 mA Triggered by rising edge See Also Screens RFG RFA Hop Control Specifications Timing Diagrams Pin 29 Input
64. in the Procedure field and then select the Run Test field Refer to Loading a Test Procedure on page 8 11 for help Select the Run Test field Read the instructions on the screen and continue with the copy program when you are ready Directions are provided on the screen as you continue Press the front panel PREV key to exit the screen 8 24 Figure 8 9 WARNING Instrument BASIC Memory Cards The Memory Card Battery A memory card battery should last between 3 and 5 years depending on its use Write the date a battery is installed in the memory card The date is important for determining when to replace the battery When the battery needs replacing insert the card into the Agilent 8922M S and turn the POWER switch on An inserted memory card takes power from the Agilent 8922M S preventing the card s contents from being lost Replace the battery as shown in Figure 8 9 on page 8 25 with a 3 volt 2016 coin cell Hold the card in with your other hand while pulling the battery out Also be sure to install the battery with the side marked on the same side marked on the battery holder Replacing the Memory Card Battery Avoid touching the flat sides of the battery when replacing it Finger oils may contaminate battery contacts in the memory card Do not mutilate puncture or dispose of batteries in fire The batteries can burst or explode releasing hazardous chemicals Discard unused batteries a
65. is complete this field will display the same number of bursts originally selected for the measurement cycle This field includes bursts which are counted as errors See Also Screens Phase and Frequency Error Wanted Error 4 88 3 Errors 4 Meas Frequency 5 ON OFF 6 Peak Phase RMS Frequency Error 7 Single Cont Screens Phase and Frequency Error Multi burst ON This field displays the number of bursts which could not be used as part of an overall calculation This field is updated when the measurement is completed When the measurement cycle is complete this field will display the total number of unused bursts See Also Screens Phase and Frequency Error Wanted Done This field displays the frequency at which measurements are being made This field is only used in the TEST MODE This field enables or disables multi burst measurement The default for this field is OFF Choices ON enables multi burst measurement OFF disables multi burst measurement These fields show the measurement results made during a measurement cycle when multi burst is on The table below explains each of the measurements made Error Mean Maximum Minimum Last Peak phase Mean of the Largest peak Smallest Peak phase peak phase phase error peak phase error of the errors of in any of the error in any last burst each burst bursts of the bursts RMS phase Mean of the Largest RMS Smallest RMS phase RMS phase pha
66. it fer o tiawranian Ya ne Re io Tr t DOR m tor Bira Gratia coati eretian La ctaeleta rias LiF LO on Piilar aobila on JBIC adibi a IaT7EH1 tiae DERI LG aa Please w it for Diis Statice ceafiverdtaan be couplete Rime LS Efg4 mA Paaine wabile ea IAID dda1babsesa rie hiag FIRIR an Pleane moit tor Boos Statiom comfieeretian ta coamjeiss nias O090F3 aa Periny eobaile om IREL G01 092949e rhe niaga G05 07 LF aa Guieut OF Seectrunm rederence aparyreapnt coem ehede nias 0900057 aa ta ibpl iT as EE tires Eesngt cheese eeities eile Aree Fer Dasital Deaade hae 0506841 a This screen makes a record of any messages Up to 10 messages can be displayed If the 10 message limit is exceeded the latest message is added to the bottom of the screen and the top message is removed from the screen If the same operation error occurs multiple times you will see the number of occurrences at the end of the message 4 69 1 Authentication Mode Screens MS Information Signaling MS Information Signaling 10 8 11 14 5 NFORMATION Z SIGNALING Ms I HS INSI NS Originated Number 001010123456789 01313311000 ME 1 Last Current Power Classi 47 j S MENEE gt is Revision Phase 2 MEE 6 430103204671380 Band P GSM es 107 f _ Posing INS Cipherina 001010123456789 T TE Ruthentication Mode 15 THL MEE 1 8 3BIE ra INSTAttoch ond 17 Fein LOCATION
67. measurements on the uplink burst are made from the center of bit 0 and are relative to the default trigger delay value of 473 4 T see Measurement Sync Trigger Delay The Agilent 8922M S normally expects the uplink burst 468 75 bit periods after the beginning of the downlink burst The trigger delay s default value of 473 4 T reflects an additional Agilent 8922M S delay of 4 65 T 468 75 4 65 473 4 T The accuracy of this measurement is 0 25 T For more accurate measurements refer to DSP Analyzer Data Bits First Bit See Also Screens Phase Freq Data Bits First Bit This field clears out the counts of pages RACHs synchronization and decode errors detected This field clears out all of the SACCH measurements 4 43 Screens Cell Control 2 29 RF Anl Ampl This field selects control of the RF analyzer s amplitude setting field Control Choices MS TX Lev automatically sets the RF analyzer s amplitude setting based on the TX Level field Manual requires manual setting of the RF analyzer s amplitude 30 RR This field displays the currently established logical channel as indicated by the Radio Resource sublayer e BCCH indicates that a broadcast channel is being transmitted and the Agilent 8922M S is ready to receive a RACH e DCCH indicates that a control channel is established The physical channel organization depends on the Control Channel setting see Cell Configuration screen e TCH1 indicates that
68. mentioned previously However the advanced user may find it worthwhile to know what these screens are and what they are capable of doing RF Generator RF Analyzer this screen controls the Agilent 8922M S RF generator and RF analyzer This screen can be accessed by pressing the following keys CD CND ercieea MS Information the MS INFO Mobile Subscriber Information screen gives you access to the information about the mobile phone itself A Location Update can be verified from this screen This screen can be accessed by pressing CD ED Ms Nro Cell Configuration the CELL CONFIG screen gives you access to the control parameters for the configuration of the cell This screen can be accessed by pressing CELL CONFIG Cell Control 2 gives you the capability to control the additional cell parameters This screen is relevant in the set up of a call This screen can be accessed by highlighting the More field in any main screen and selecting CELL CNTL2 Hopping the hopping screen allows you manual control of the hopping frequencies This feature is only available in the Agilent 8922G compatibility mode Logging the logging screen allows control over the Protocol Interface port on the rear panel option 003 To access this screen highlight More and select LOGGING Configuration the configuration screen is a full instrument control screen which allows you to set up the Agilent 8922M S Screen set up compatibility
69. section The Agilent 8922M S GSM Test Sets have three main modes of operation these are e ACTIVE CELL e TEST MODE e CW GENERATOR The first mode is the default mode and configures the Agilent 8922M S as a GSM Base Station emulator This allows calls to be made from the Agilent 8922M S to the mobile phone and vice versa Measurements can then be made to verify the mobile phone s performance This mode is used when measurements need to be made on the mobile phone without a call being set up This mode configures the Agilent 8922M S as a standard Continuous Wave CW Signal Generator This is used for test applications that require an unmodulated RF carrier 2 3 NOTE Figure 2 1 Making Measurements Agilent Technologies 8922M S Operating Modes To configure the Agilent 8922M S to the desired operating mode carry out the following instructions referring to Figure 2 1 on page 4 for the position of the fields e Ensure 1 is set to mobile phone type you require GSM900 E GSM DCS 1800 or PCS1900 For use with DCS1800 or PCS 1900 refer to the HP Agilent 83220A E Users Guide which explains how to configure the Agilent 8922M S to test other mobile phone formats e Use the knob to move the cursor to the lower field below the Operating Mode 2 e Push the knob and select the desired Operating Mode ACTIVE CELL TEST MODE or CW GENERATOR from the menu which appears at the bottom right hand side of the screen 1 2 C
70. see Note a RF Generator g output freq previous hop freq freq of RP_HOP_ADRSB 16 Notes 1 If RF Analyzer Hop Mode Hop and RF Analyzer Hop Trig Ara then this timing diagram applies only ff RP_RX_HOP occurs at least 250 us before RP_TX_HOP 2 If RF Analyzer Hop Mode Hop and RF Analyzer Hop Trig Ara and RP_RX_HOP occurs between 26 us and 258 us before RP_TX_HOP then Th above doesn t apply Rather the RF Generator Output will be hopped within Th2 of the RP_RX_HOP 3 When the RF Analyzer should hop before the RF Generator RP_RX_HOP rising edge should tead the RP_TX_HOP rising edge by at least 10 us 4 The RF Generator Output meets phase frequency accuracy specs for the RF Generator Hop Frequency based on the address on the RP_HOP_ADRSB 18 signals 5 The RF Generator Output can also be pulsed off automatically during hopping by selecting RF Generator Mod Source Pulse Hop Trig Figure 6 5 RF Generator Hop Address Source Ext Timing Diagram 6 30 Connectors Timing Diagrams Conditions RF Analyzer Hop Mode Hop RF Analyzer Hop Trig Arm Hop Address Source Ext RF Gen Hop Mode Non Hop or RF Gen Hop Trig Disare Inputs Tr ku 1 7 RP_RX_HOP 7 f jtn RP_KOP_ADRS6 18 Results Th see Note 2 4 RF Analyzer Notes 1 If RF Gen Hop Mode Hop and RF Gen Hop Trig Ara then this timing diagram applies only if RP_TX_HOP occurs at least 250 us before RP_RX_ HOP 2 If RF Gen Ho
71. source GMSK field is set to Ext This connector is connected directly in parallel with FP_DATA on the SYSTEM BUS connector The two inputs are directly coupled to each other Avoid putting signals on both inputs simultaneously Data Output See Also Data Input Requirements High drive requirement 100 pA Setup Time 150 ns Hold Time 0 Low drive requirement 1 2 mA An internal differential data encoder is used Sense TTL HIGH results in a positive frequency deviation IN OUT DATA becomes a data output when Active Cell is selected and Aux BCCH is set to Adjacent To simulate an adjacent cell BCCH IN OUT DATA and Modulation Clock can be connected to an external 0 3 GMSK signal generator The channel characteristics of the auxiliary BCCH will be the same as the serving cell BCCH except that the base station Colour Code BCC for the auxiliary BCCH is modulo 4 Data Output Requirements Drive 4 mA TTL Valid rising edge of modulation clock Termination 50 ohms at destination Bit Rate 13M 48 bps Screens Cell Configuration Activated Aux BCH and Serving Cell Colour Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Gen Specifications Signal Descriptions for the System Bus The monitor output is connected to the output of the audio analyzer The same signal choices made for Audio measurements apply to this output The same signal that goes to the Audio appears at this connector This connector is directly in parallel with the rear panel
72. step values in certain test parameters Tests can be selected in any order but to reduce testing time you should strategically organize the test sequence Tests requiring operator intervention changing volume channels and so forth should be grouped together TESTE Edit Sequence Sirti leapt Saas Tah E lcal 2 Pa infarnagtiar E T inechance ipti J TH peak bower a T3 ORFS due fo aomelatian 3 TH ORFS due ta remtine E EX reflareerte gengdtleitr lich Fal FX ungale inesi Jews ronte Peet Fure i ion Figure 8 14 Test Sequence Screen Editing Test Specifications Test Specifications are the upper and lower limit values that are used by the Test Executive to describe the manufactured specifications of the radio itself For a radio to pass a test the measured value must fall within the test s specified value lower limit upper limit or both upper and lower limits 1 and select the field Test Function at the bottom of the screen 2 From the list of Choices in the revealed box select Edit Seqn and edit the 8 33 Instrument BASIC Programming and Using the TESTS Subsystem Test Sequence as described below 3 When finished editing sequence select TESTS to return to test screen a Select either Edit ParmorEdit Spec from the test function field to continue editing OR b If editing is complete select and press or select Continue to return to the Edit Proc screen then press or select Run to run the modified
73. than screens that display numbers If no measurements are being made while in continuous Cont check Trig Qual see Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer If it is set to RF Power change it to Normal This field will indicate whether any data is available for a Use Mem measurement and whether current data has had a measurement performed on it The Use Mem function allows DSP measurements over one archived GSM burst e No Data No data has been stored e Old Data Data is available for a measurement but Digital Demod has been disarmed and then armed again since the data was stored This indicates that a measurement was made on the data e New Data Data is available for a measurement and Digital Demod has not been disarmed and then armed again since the data was stored See Also Keys Use Mem Screens Measurement Sync Status Use Mem Screens Digital Demod Trig Source Use Mem This field selects how the location of the demodulated data bits are determined within the measured burst Choices Midamble attempts to bit pattern match the demodulated data bits to the selected Midamble or User Defined Sync Pattern Amplitude centers the demodulated data within the detected amplitude envelope 4 67 17 Sync Pattern Start Position 18 Sync Status 19 Trig Delay 20 Trig Qual NOTE 21 Trig Source Screens Measurement Sync This field is only displayed when Burst Type is set to User Def It selects the starting bi
74. the Active Cell is selected the three MOBILE PHONE parameters are also available on the bottom right hand side of all measurement screens This provides control of the mobile phone during measurements 2 8 Making Measurements TEST MODE TEST MODE To enter this mode select TEST MODE as described in the section titled Agilent 8922M S Operating Modes In TEST MODE the Agilent 8922M S no longer controls the mobile phone The TEST MODE is used when it is not desired or not possible to set up a call between the Agilent 8922M S and the mobile phone The MOBILE PHONE area available in Active Cell controls three functions simultaneously e The traffic channel transmitted by the Agilent 8922M S e The traffic channel transmitted by the mobile phone e The corresponding channel used by the Agilent 8922M S to measure the mobile phone In Test Mode these functions are now separated The traffic channel transmitted by the Agilent 8922M S is now controlled by the Traffic Chan parameters 1 see Figure 2 3 on page 2 10 The mobile phone s transmission must be controlled manually using the mobile phone manufacturer s service and test modes The Agilent 8922M S measurements are controlled by the fields below Expected Input 2 see Figure 2 3 on page 2 10 These fields are e Channel e TX Level e Burst Type 2 9 NOTE Figure 2 3 Mobile Phone Transmitter Testing Using Test Mode Making Measurements TEST MO
75. the Cell Configuration screen s settings are in use activated and cannot be changed RF Generator Serv Cell Aux BCCH and LAI screen settings can be changed Settable means that most of the settings on this screen can be set When the Agilent 8922M S operating state is changed from Settable to Activated some fields are automatically changed or overwritten Use the following table to locate the fields that might affect your setup 4 16 2 Amplitude 3 ARFCN Field RF Gen Hop Trig RF Anl Hop Trig Hop Address Address Source RF Gen Settling RF Analyzer Settling RF Gen Hop Mode RF Analyzer Hop Mode RF Analyzer Hop Frequencies Address RF Generator Hop Frequencies Address Hop Address Hop Address Next Burst Num 0 Burst Type Burst Num 1 Burst Type Burst Num 2 Burst Type Burst Num 3 Burst Type Burst Num 0 Trig Qual Burst Num 1 Trig Qual Burst Num 2 Trig Qual Burst Num 3 Trig Qual Demod Sync Burst Sel Demod Trig Trig Source Demod Arm State Meas Sync Sync Mode Meas Sync Burst Sel See Also Screens Cell Configuration GSM 900 State Am check setting Seq Normal Normal Hop check setting 0 0 0 check setting Depends on Serv Cell BCC RACH Depends on Serv Cell BCC RACH RF Power RF Power Normal Normal Ext Ext Demod Am Midamble Ext Screens Cell Configuration Settable This field changes the RF generator amplitude It is a duplicate of the RF Gen Amplitude field on the RF Generator RF Analy
76. the current screen See Also Screens Configure 24 RCV CALL 25 RECALL Keys Function Keys This key configures the so that it will receive a mobile phone originated call It is not necessary to press this key when you are in the Cell Control screen See Also Screens Cell Control Configure This key is used to recall instrument setups To Recall an Instrument Setup 1 Press RECALL 2 Use the knob to select the desired setup to be recalled from the choices at the bot tom right of the screen When Recall is pressed the following fields are ALWAYS set to their default settings regardless of their setting in the saved setup e Demod Arm Arm Disarm is always reset to Disarm Cell Control 2 screen e Settable or Activated is always reset to Activated Cell Configuration or Active Cell Cell Control screen e Hop Mode Non Hop Hop is always reset to Hop RF Generator RF Analyzer screen e Hop Control Arm Disarm is always reset to Arm RF Generator RF Analyzer screen If the recalled state includes being on a call the will assume that mobile phone is connected It will attempt to establish a call This may require you to answer the call on the mobile phone 26 REF SET 27 RELEASE Keys Function Keys This key is used to set a reference if you want a measurement result to be offset by a certain value To Set a Reference 1 Use the knob to position the cursor at the measurement field of your choi
77. times faster than the conventional method This is also sometimes known as Fast Bit Error Measurement Channel Coding The baseband digital process used to arrange the error protected Class I Bits Class II Bits CRC DCS1800 Equalization Error Correction FACCH speech data into the final form necessary for RF transmission Channel coding involves adding the following data for channel control training sequences tail bits and guard bits In an error correction scheme the most important data bits This class is subdivided into classes Ia and Ib In an error correction scheme the slowly changing or long term data bits Class II bits receive no error correction Cyclic Redundancy Check A method for detecting errors by dividing the reception polynomial which expresses the reception data by the generator polynomial and then detecting errors by residuals Digital Cellular System DCS1800 is technically very similar to GSM900 with wider frequency bands leading to more channels and at a frequency of 1 8 GHz DCS1800 systems are designed to cope with higher user densities DCS1800 mobiles have a lower output power than GSM900 mobiles therefore the cell size is smaller The process used by digital radios to correct for the fading which occurs in real world conditions A way to provide reasonable voice quality for digital radios that are subject to Doppler shifts and multipath fading Types of error correction include p
78. to establish the reference amplitude level of the burst the second is to measure the rise portion of the burst and the third is to measure the fall portion of the burst Between the measurements the analyzer amplitude and trigger delay is internally changed for the following measurement Since RF Rise triggering is based on a variable rising edge of the incoming signal the measurement result cannot be considered valid unless the burst timing is consistent When the Test Mode or CW Generator mode is selected on the cell control screen the RF rise trigger is automatically selected This field displays the measured amplitude at the rise position time relative to the average On power over the useful bits in the measured burst See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG METER Units This field selects the time relative to the center of bit zero that the amplitude on the amplitude envelope will be measured Range 56 0 us to 0 0 us Single allows one test to be performed Cont allows testing to automatically repeat 4 105 9 Trig Delay 10 View Screens Pwr Ramp Pulse Option 006 Only This field sets the time delay between a valid trigger event and the beginning of a measurement Range 0 to 5000 00 us This field selects the alternate Views of the Pulse On Off Ratio measurement Choices Rise Edge Top 2 dB Fall Edge Summary 4 106 Screens Pwr Ramp Pulse Rise Option 006 Only Pwr Ramp Pulse
79. to peer messages That is only DL_UNIT_DATA DL_DATA and PH_DATA messages are passed out as they carry the L3 peer to peer and L2 peer to peer messages e Service will pass these messages as defined by GSM recommendations e peer to peer messages between the network layers e peer to peer messages between data link layers e intra layer inter layer service request and response messages e Service primitives exchanged between the signaling layer of the Agilent 8922M This includes NetwkOnly plus DataLink and all interlayer messages defined by GSM recommendations It does not include HP proprietary messages Remote Control of Itis possible to control the logging functions of the Agilent 8922M over the GPIB Protocol Logging interface For more details on how to do this refer to the Agilent 8922M S GSM Test Set Programming Reference Guide APPENDIX A Protocol Log of a Typical Call Protocol Log of a Typical Call For brevity the protocol log shown in the User s Guide is in a shorter form than that presented by the HP Agilent 37900D GSM 04 08 decoding option This is a protocol log of the Common Air Interface CAI for a typical call placed between the Agilent 8922M S and a GSM Mobile Station You are expected to be familiar with ETSI standards GSM 04 06 and 04 08 to understand these protocol logs The logs are in a simplified format and contain the following information Source Layer gt Destination Layer PRIMITIVE
80. type of radio to be tested Choices GSM 900 E GSM DCS 1800 PCS 1900 This field selects the ranging mode for the AF analyzer and the spectrum analyzer Choices Auto All selects auto ranging Hold All selects range hold allowing manual setting of spectrum analyzer input attenuation and AF Analyzer gain control See Also Screens Spectrum Analyzer Input Atten 4 51 14 Reference 15 RF IN Out NOTE 16 RFGen Volts Screens Configure This field selects the external reference frequency that the instrument locks to and sets the reference tuning mode Choices 13 MHz 10 MHz 5 MHz 2 MHz 1 MHz Normal locks the instrument to the external reference frequency selected Tunable enables the instrument to adjust its internal frequency reference Frequency adjustment is relative to an external reference which the internal reference is calibrated to Calibrate calibrates the internal reference to the external reference for use in Tunable mode This field is used to indicate losses or gains between the RF IN OUT port and the device under test This field is only used when the RF Level Offset field is set to On e Enter a positive value to indicate a gain such as an amplifier gain When the RF IN OUT port is used as an output the RF Generator level is automatically set to that amount below which is indicated in the RF Generator s Amplitude field Example if this value is 10 dB and the Amplitude field shows 0
81. use of this material Agilent Technologies assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that is not furnished by Agilent Technologies Restricted Rights Legend If Software is for use in the performance of a U S Government prime contract or subcontract Software is delivered and licensed as Commercial computer software as defined in DFAR 252 227 7014 June 1995 or as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR 52 227 19 June 1987 or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause Use duplication or disclosure of Software is subject to Agilent Technologies standard commercial licenseterms and non DOD Departments and Agencies of the U S Government will receive no greater than Restricted Rights as defined in FAR 52 227 19 c 1 2 June 1987 U S Government users will receive no greater than Limited Rights as defined in FAR 52 227 14 June 1987 or DFAR 252 227 7015 b 2 November 1995 as applicable in any technical data Copyright 200X Agilent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Statement of Compliance This product conforms to EN61010 1 1993 IEC 1010 1 1990 A1 1992 A2 1994 CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 1993 Safety requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement Control and Laboratory Use and has been supplied in a safe condition The instruction documentation contains information and warnings which must be follo
82. you have option 006 spectrum analyzer installed you will also be offered the following measurement screens e Pulse e Puls Rise e Puls Fall Refer to Pwr Ramp Pulse Pwr Ramp Pulse Rise and Pwr Ramp Pulse Fall screens for a description 4 96 NOTE 1 Amplitude 2 Marker 3 Marker Pos Screens Pwr Ramp Top 2 dB Pwr Ramp Top 2 dB m AMPLITUDE MIDDLE _ _ _ gt 2 ier a EES SEEEN TT aii bs t 4 x f 7 f 4 1 Time si E Poni teat Wee R 0 0 Lvl E 08 Pk TR Pur pnt seiner eet TX Ley 6 Timeslot Tris Delay Amplitude 473 4 13 0 dB 4 3 T 1 When multiburst is turned on display update rate for power versus time and phase traces will be slowed down while multiple bursts are collected This view displays the middle portion of the amplitude envelope with the amplitude mask superimposed The vertical range is 1 2 to 1 2 dB The horizontal range is 10 to 160 or 6 to 96 bit periods depending on the burst type This is a copy of the RF analyzer Amplitude field This is the amplitude to be assumed at the selected input port Range RF IN OUT 27 9 to 41 0 dBm AUX RF IN 58 0 to 20 0 dBm See Also Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Analyzer Chapter 3 Specifications These fields display the time and level at the current marker position This field sets the marker position The marker position is settable in units of division
83. you must consult the relevant User s Guides for all Safety Considerations that are to be observed while using this equipment APPENDIX A Equipment Required Equipment Required HP Agilent 37900D Latest Revision HP Agilent 37967A HP Agilent 8922G protocol monitor application software HP Agilent 37966B GSM software HP Agilent 15756A Interface Cable HP Agilent 37910A Slave Signalling Card HP Agilent 37913A RS232 449 Datacomms Interface Card Agilent 8922M Option 003 OdQadaaduda du 1 All software should be loaded into the HP Agilent 37900D A 3 Figure A 1 Figure A 2 APPENDIX A Connecting the Agilent 8922M to the HP Agilent 37900D Connecting the Agilent 8922M to the HP Agilent 37900D MALE D MALE D Type 15 Type 39 GSM Mobile Station Handset PIN PIN Agilent 922M onooo0000 o o o oppo0p0000 i Sono ooo00 a O o000 oono ooo00 L HP Agilent 37900D Oo J oo a o HP Agilent _ E 15756A i COAX LINK ooo Cabling Setup Front View Agilent 8922M Rear Panel Protocol Interface Port HP Agilent 15756A Interface Cable HP Agilent 37913A Interface Card gt RSCL9 422 OR RS232 WEN USED WTH CORRECT ADAPTER CABLES a7etah HP Agilent 37900D Option 004 Rear Panel Cabling Setup Rear View Using HP Agilent 15756A Interface cable connect PORT A on the rear of the HP Agilent 37900D to the
84. 0 547 9999 Latin America Agilent Technologies Latin American Region Headquarters 5200 Blue Lagoon Drive Suite 950 Miami Florida 33126 U S A tel 305 267 4245 fax 305 267 4286 United States Agilent Technologies Test and Measurement Call Center P O Box 4026 Englewood CO 80155 4026 tel 1 800 452 488 In any correspondence or telephone conversations refer to the power sensor by its model number and full serial number With this information the Agilent Technologies representative can quickly determine whether your unit is still within its warranty period Agilent Technologies 8922M S Documentation Description Agilent Technologies 8922M S Documentation Description Documentation Shipped with Your GSM Test Set Agilent 8922M S GSM Test Set Quick Start Guide This guide gives a brief description on how to make each of the measurements required to test a GSM mobile phone More detailed descriptions are given in the Agilent 8922M S GSM Test Set User s Guide Agilent 8922M S GSM Test Set User s Guide This guide contains information on how to set up the Agilent 8922M S for making measurements and verifying performance It also contains more detailed information on each of the screens keys and connectors and how to use the IBASIC facilities available on the Agilent 8922M S Agilent 8922M S GSM Test Set Performance Test Software This 3 5 inch floppy disk allows you to verify the performance of th
85. 0 3 dB lt 0 3 dB 30 dB lt 3 0 dB lt 4 2 dB lt 2 2 dB 3 8 dB 7 5 dB 2 6 dB 3 20 Verifying Performance Agilent Technologies 8922M S Specifications Phase and Frequency Measurements After one timeslot 5774s from an isolated Receiver Hop Trigger in the GSM Frequency bands Range RF In Out 6 to 41 dBm Aux RF In 36 to 20 dBm Input Frequency Setting Error 10 kHz Input Level Setting Error 3 dB RMS phase error accuracy lt 1 rms Peak phase error accuracy lt 4 peak Frequency error accuracy 0 02 ppm 18 Hz reference accuracy for normal bursts Typically 0 03ppm 27 Hz reference accuracy for RACH bursts Supplemental Characteristics After three timeslots 1 73 ms from an isolated Receiver Hop Triggering the GSM frequency band RMS phase error accuracy lt 0 5 rms Peak phase error accuracy lt 2 peak Frequency error accuracy 0 01 ppm 9 Hz reference accuracy for normal bursts 0 02 ppm 18 Hz reference accuracy for RACH bursts 0 3 GMSK Data Recovery Agilent 8922M only After one timeslot 577s from an isolated Receiver Hop Trigger in the GSM Frequency bands Range RF In Out 6 to 41 dBm Aux RF In 36 to 20 dBm Input Frequency Setting Error 100 Hz Required Input Phase Accuracy lt 5 pms 20 peak Demodulation Duty Cycle 1 timeslot per frame Outputs Data Clock and Data Valid Data Output Clock Clocked at 1 MHz rate
86. 0 MHz This field displays the expected amplitude transmitted by the mobile phone The fields display this information as a power level and as a dBm value If you alter the dBm field the power level shown will not correspond to the channel in amplitude This field defines the expected burst type of the mobile phone s transmitted bursts When the Traffic Channel TCH is selected the correct Colour Code should be chosen There are two Base Station fields The Amplitude field sets the amplitude of the Agilent 8922M S transmission The Channel field selects which channel the Agilent 8922M S transmits the Broadcast Control Channel BCCH information If this is changed during a call the call will be deactivated There are three traffic channel fields The Traffic Chan On Off field toggles the traffic channel The Channel number allows you to set the traffic channel to any channel number between 1 through 124 for GSM900 The Timeslot allows you select a timeslot from 2 through 6 For an E GSM mobile phone the channel number may vary from 0 through 124 and 975 through 1023 If you change the channel number the frequency field value also changes The converse of this is not the case You may enter a non GSM standard channel frequency on another screen between 10 MHz and 1000 MHz 4 34 1 Base Station 2 Burst Type 3 Channel Screens Cell Control CW Generator Cell Control CW Generator CELL STATUS CONTROL 1 a B
87. 0 dB or 175 uV 0 01 distortion 3 26 Audio Filters Verifying Performance Agilent Technologies 8922M S Specifications There are seven filters used in the Agilent 8922M S e 50 Hz HPF e 300 Hz HPF e 300 Hz LPF e 3kHzLPF e 15 kHz LPF e 750 us de emphasis 1kHz notch Audio Detectors The audio detectors available in the Agilent 8922M S are e Pk e Pk e Pk hold e Pk hold e Pk 2 e Pk 2 hold e Pk max e Pk max hold e RMS Oscilloscope Specifications Frequency Range 3 dB Scale Division Amplitude Accuracy 20 Hz to 10 kHz Time Division External Trigger Level Maximum voltage Scope In Audio In Supplemental Characteristics 3 dB Bandwidth Internal DC Offset 2 Hz to 50 kHz 10 mV to 10 V in 1 2 5 and 10 steps 1 5 of reading 0 1 division 10 us to 100 ms in 1 2 5 and 10 steps TTL 5 V peak 30 Vims Typically gt 100 kHz lt 0 1 division for 250 wV div sensitivity 3 27 Verifying Performance Agilent Technologies 8922M S Specifications Remote Programming GPIB IEEE Standard 488 2 Functions Implemented SH1 AH1 T6 L4 SR1 RL1 LEO TEO PPO DC1 DT1 C4 C11 E2 RS 232 3 wire RJ 11 connector used for serial data in and out Baud Rates 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 selectable General Specifications Size 177H x 426W x 574D mm 7 X 16 75 X 23 in nominal Weight 32 kg 70 Ibs Operating Temperature 0 to 55 C Storage Tempe
88. 00 us Pk t Anp110 0 00 0 00 us SyncStatus Amplit No Error 0 00 us MOBILE Ameli2 EER 6 0 00 Chan TX Lev Timeslot Measurement Summary Amplitude 13 0 10 4 8 2 When multiburst is turned on display update rate for power versus time and phase traces will be slowed down while multiple bursts are collected These fields display the amplitude measured on the amplitude envelope at the corresponding time set in the Time1 12 fields See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG Units This is a copy of the RF analyzer Amplitude field This is the amplitude to be assumed at the selected input port Range RF IN OUT 27 9 to 41 0 dBm AUX RF IN 58 0 to 20 0 dBm See Also Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Analyzer Chapter 3 Specifications 4 101 3 Flatness 4 Measurement Summary 5 Pk TX Pwr 6 SyncStatus 7 Timel1 12 8 Trig Delay Screens Pwr Ramp Summary This field displays the positive and negative amplitude peaks relative to the average power over the useful bits in the measured burst e Pk peak relative to the average power e Pk is the negative amplitude peak relative to the average power See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG Units This field displays whether HI LO limits set for the measurement display fields Ampll1 12 and flatness were exceeded in the last measurement See Also Making Measurements Solving P
89. 01 RR gt DL DL_DATA FACCH_F RR Channel Release 06 Od 00 Frame 2449801 RR gt DL MDL_RELEASE SACCH_TF Frame 2449802 CC gt HST CC_REL_IND Frame 2449802 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2449803 DL gt PH PH_DATA FACCH_FINr2 Ns PO CR1 SAPIO MO CC Release Com plete Frame 2449803 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2449812 PH gt DL PH_DATA FACCH_F RR Nr2 PF0 CR1 SAPIO MO Frame 2449839 DL gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2449839 DL gt PH PH_DATA FACCH_ FI Nr2 Ns2 PO CR1 SAPIO MO RR Channel Re lease Frame 2449839 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2449846 PH gt DL PH_DATA SACCH UI P0 CRO SAPIO MO RR Measurement Re port Frame 2449866 PH gt DL PH_DATA FACCH_F RR Nr3 PFO CR1 SAPIO MO Frame 2449874 DL gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2449874 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND SACCH Frame 2449886 PH gt DL PH_DATA FACCH_F DISC P1 CRO SAPIO MO Frame 2449909 DL gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2449909 DL gt PH PH_DATA FACCH_F UA F1 CRO SAPIO MO Frame 2449909 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2449916 DL gt RR DL_RELEASE FACCH_F Frame 2449930 Call termination complete HP 8922M S configures to BCCH A 23 APPENDIX A Protocol Log of a Typical Call A 24 Glossary B 1 Glossary ARFCN BCH BCCH Bit Error Rate BS BTS Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number The BCH Broadcast Channel is a beacon which is always turned on so that mobile can look out for it when trying to find service
90. 1 Log A 11 Log Pause A 11 Logging A 11 Logging Messages A 11 Logging Screen A 11 aborts A 8 clear log A 11 DataLink A 12 flush log A 11 Log Pause A 11 NetwkOnly A 12 options A 5 Pass Filter A 12 selecting A 5 A 11 Service A 12 set up A 5 Logging screen A 5 Logging start up A 9 Loop Delay Speech Frames Bit Error Test 4 15 4 58 Loopback Bit Error Test 4 13 Cell Control 4 40 low level message 7 4 low limit keys 5 5 setting 5 5 turn off 5 5 Lvl Pulse Fall 4 109 Pulse Rise 4 107 MAI Cell Configuration 4 19 4 25 Cell Control 4 40 MA2 Cell Configuration 4 20 4 25 main screen 4 27 4 33 4 35 MAIOI1 Cell Configuration 4 20 4 26 MAIO2 Cell Configuration 4 20 4 26 Making a Call A 9 HP Agilent 37900D A 9 Marker Oscilloscope Main Controls 4 76 Oscilloscope Marker Controls 4 81 Output RF Spectrum Trace View 4 84 Pwr Ramp Fall Edge 4 99 Pwr Ramp Rise Edge 4 95 Pwr Ramp Top 2 dB 4 97 Spectrum Analyzer Main Controls 4 123 Spectrum Analyzer Marker Controls 4 125 Spectrum Analyzer RF Gen Controls 4 124 Marker Pos Index 5 Index Output RF Spectrum Trace View 4 85 Phase Freq Phase Err 4 91 Pwr Ramp Fall Edge 4 100 Pwr Ramp Rise Edge 4 95 Pwr Ramp Top 2 dB 4 97 marker position 4 97 4 100 pulse fall 4 110 pulse on off ratio 4 107 Marker To Peak Oscilloscope Marker Controls 4 81 Marker To Ref Level Spec
91. 1 screen select 1 Occasionally the bar graph indicators will rise up to 100 and then fall back as the Agilent 8922M empties its cache of messages This only occurs when a call has been established A 9 APPENDIX A How to Obtain a Protocol Log System Once the call is up then System Information messages will begin to appear for the Informationsent entire duration of the call Since there is only one BTS there will be no handovers and received during the call The System Information messages contain power measurements and bit error indications for both uplink and downlink directions End Call To end the call on the Mobile Station handset press END At this point the call will drop There may not have been enough messages on the Agilent 8922M to fill the cache for the last messages to be put out to the HP Agilent 37900D Flush Log To see the last protocol messages from the Mobile Station handset go to the logging screen on the Agilent 8922M Select Flush Log Press S on the HP Agilent 37900D to stop logging and Quit Press Q to get back to the MONITOR MODE menu Refer to the HP Agilent 37900D Monitor Guide for detailed information on using the HP Agilent 37900D Signaling Test Set A 10 Logging Screen APPENDIX A Additional Information Additional Information The logging screen gives you control over the Protocol Interface port on the rear panel option 003 This function is selected by highlig
92. 3 MHz according to the frequency reference you intend to use A Padis Tree References Compatible RFoenm Volts Pansa Hold EELT Haag Cni Figure 1 4 High stability timebase set up COMF I CURE ntensity Roomer oke ope Be Tre FR OE Tine BH AF GC Peer Freeze EF Level Offset dE RF Inele fax RE Out Firauare B 07 0a To customize your Agilent 8922M S further refer to Chapter 4 Screens 1 7 Operation and Storage Environment Instrument Options Specifications Installing Your Agilent 8922M S General Information General Information Refer to General Specifications in the Agilent 8922M S Specifications section of Chapter 3 Performance Verification for information about the operation or storage environment Refer to Agilent 8922M S Specifications in Chapter 3 Performance Verification for information about instrument options Refer to Agilent 8922M S Specifications in Chapter 3 Performance Verification for instrument specifications 1 8 Making Measurements 2 1 NOTE Making Measurements Using This Chapter Using This Chapter Use this chapter to obtain an overview of how to operate the Agilent 8922M S GSM Test Sets This chapter is divided into the following sections e Making Measurements e Agilent 8922M S Operating Modes explains how to configure the Agilent 8922M S so that measurements can be made e Measurements details how to perform the many d
93. 4 DL gt PH PH_DATA PCH L2 ABIS MO RR Paging Request Type 1 Frame 2446544 PH gt DL PH_RANDOM_ACCESS RACH Frame 2446643 DL gt RR DL_RANDOM_ACCESS RACH Frame 2446643 RR gt DL DL_UNIT_DATA AGCH RR Immediate Assignment 06 3f 03 20 a0 14 92 aa 2e 00 00 Frame 2446653 DL gt PH PH_DATA AGCH L2 ABIS MO RR Immediate Assignment Frame 2446653 Agilent 8922M S PH gt DL PH_CONNECT SDCCH Frame 2446654 configures to DCH PH gt DL PH_CONNECT SACCH Frame 2446654 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND SDCCH Frame 2446694 DL gt PH PH_DATA SDCCH UI PO CR1 SAPIO MO Frame 2446694 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND SACCH Frame 2446714 DL gt PH PH_DATA SACCH UI PO CR1 SAPIO MO Frame 2446714 PH gt DL PH_DATA SDCCH SABM P1 CRO SAPIO MO RR Paging Re sponse Frame 2446718 DL gt RR DL_ESTABLISH SDCCH RR Paging Response 06 27 04 03 01 00 00 08 09 10 10 76 98 10 32 54 Frame 2446718 RR gt MM RR_EST RR Paging Response 06 27 04 03 01 00 00 08 09 10 10 76 98 10 32 54 Frame 2446718 MM gt CC MM_ESTABLISH Frame 2446718 CC gt MM MM_DATA CC Setup 03 05 04 01 a0 34 3f Frame 2446718 MM gt RR RR_DATA CC Setup 03 05 04 01 a0 34 3f Frame 2446718 RR gt DL DL_DATA SDCCH CC Setup 03 05 04 01 a0 34 3f Frame 2446719 PH gt DL PH_DATA SACCH UI P0 CRO SAPIO MO RR Measurement Re APPENDIX A Protocol Log of a Typical Call port Frame 2446738 DL gt RR DL_UNIT_DATA SACCH RR Measurement Report 06 15 37 77 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Frame 2446738 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND SDCCH
94. 83 41 Frame 2446988 DL gt PH PH_DATA FACCH_F RR Nr2 PFO CRO SAPIO MO Frame 2446988 RR gt MM RR_DATA CC Alerting 83 41 Frame 2446989 MM gt CC MM_DATA CC Alerting 83 41 Frame 2446989 CC gt HST CC_ALERT Frame 2446989 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2446995 RR gt DL DL_UNIT_DATA SACCH_TF RR System Information Type 6 06 le 00 01 00 f1 10 00 01 63 ff Frame 2447056 PH gt DL PH_DATA SACCH UI P0 CRO SAPIO M0 RR Measurement Re port Frame 2447058 DL gt RR DL_UNIT_DATA SACCH RR Measurement Report 06 15 37 77 4e 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Frame 2447058 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND SACCH Frame 2447078 DL gt PH PH_DATA SACCH_TF UI PO CR1 SAPIO MO RR System Information Type 6 Frame 2447078 PH gt DL PH_DATA FACCH_F I Nr0 Ns2 PO CRO SAPIO MO CC Connect Frame 2447092 DL gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2447092 DL gt RR DL_DATA FACCH_F CC Connect 83 07 Frame 2447092 DL gt PH PH_DATA FACCH_F RR Nr3 PFO CRO SAPIO MO Frame 2447092 RR gt MM RR_DATA CC Connect 83 07 Frame 2447093 MM gt CC MM_DATA CC Connect 83 07 Frame 2447093 CC gt HST CC_SETUP_CONF Frame 2447093 CC gt MM MM_DATA CC Connect Acknowledge 03 Of Frame 2447093 MM gt RR RR_DATA CC Connect Acknowledge 03 Of Frame 2447093 RR gt DL DL_DATA FACCH_F CC Connect Acknowledge 03 Of Frame 2447093 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2447099 Intra cell handover to TCH2 hopped TCH on MA2 slot 6 Agilent 8922M S GOES TO NEW TCH2 APPENDIX A Protocol Log
95. A unique subscriber number which is contained on the SIM card Minimum Shift Keying A form of digital modulation in which a frequency shift is chosen to exactly twice the data bit rate It is called minimum shift keying because the frequency spacing between the two frequency states is the minimum spacing that allows the two frequency states to be orthogonal to each other Personal Communications System This is a system used in the USA bands have been released around 1 9 GHz Pseudo Random Bit Sequence A pattern of bits used in bit error testing An in channel test of the mobile phone s ability to correctly turn its transmitter on and off RACH Random Access Channel is used to grab the attention of the BS RACH is a special short burst used to inform the mobile of its timing advance These bursts are short to avoid collisions with other timeslots RPE LTP RSSI SACCH SDCCH SIM SMSCB Speech Coder Trigger Delay Glossary Regular Pulse Excitation Long Term Prediction A commonly used technique for converting voice from analog to digital form This is the CODEC that is used by GSM DCS1800 and PCS1900 systems Received Signal Strength Indicator Reception level There is a spare frame every 12 TCH frames and this is used for the SACCH Slow Associated Control Channel On the down link the SACCH is used to send slowly but regularly changing control information to the mobile The up link carries informati
96. A useful BCH always carries information in timeslot 0 The BCH ARFCN has to be active in all timeslots to allow mobiles to synchronize to other cells There are a number of other areas to the BCH e TCH Frequency correction Channel is a special burst on the BCH It has special fixed bit sequences to allow the mobile to tune onto the midamble e SCH Synchronization Channel has a burst with extended midamble It is used by the mobile to adjust its internal timing and get synchronized to the multiframe sequence e BCCH Broadcast Control Channel has information encoded on it which identifies the network It also carries lists of the channels in use in the cell BA and CA tables e CCCH Common Control Channel is like a message board Like the FCH SCH and BCCH it can be received by any mobile Sub channels like PCH Paging Channel and AGCH Access Grant Channel are posted on the CCCH Broadcast Control Channel A unidirectional channel used by the base station facilities to broadcast control information to land mobile units The digital receiver test that measures of the quality of the recovered information sensitivity and usable input level range equivalent to SINAD in an analog system Base Station Base Transceiver System Burst by Burst Bit Error Rate Glossary The Burst by Burst Bit Error Measurement makes use of a new loopback path within the mobile to calculate the equivalent Class II BER This measurement is 5
97. ALING LINK 1 N Signal OK Agilent 8922M Logging Start up Make Call Real Time Message Display Channel 1 Channel 2 In Service Line status 64000 Hz 0 Hz Signaling Bit Rate 0 25 50 75 100 0 25 50 75 100 ISDN Frames E l Frames S Frames U Frames Erored Frames 0 cumulative BIB Inversion 0 0 cumulative FIB Inversion 0 0 25 50 75 100 0 25 50 75 100 Buffer usage Logging started Logging status Waiting for start trigger 1 4 detailed link display M Multi link display R Real time decode display S Stop current measurement Enter menu option To log protocol messages into the Agilent 8922M 1 Select Log Pause 2 Select Clear Log 3 Select Log Pause With the real time display enabled To see the messages themselves on the HP Agilent 37900D Press R to get a real time display of incoming messages Theese are short summaries of each message To return to the MONITOR ISDN SIGNALLING LINK 1 screen select 1 press 123 on the Mobile Station handset keypad and press SEND just as you would when making a real call on a GSM cellular phone As the call comes up there will be assignment appearing on the display of the HP Agilent 37900D To see the messages themselves on the HP Agilent 37900D press R to get a real time display of incoming messages These are short summaries of each message To return to the MONITOR ISDN SIGNALLING LINK
98. Activated means that most of the Cell Configuration screen s settings are in use activated and cannot be changed RF Generator Serv Cell Aux BCCH and LAI screen settings can be changed Settable means that most of the settings on this screen can be set When the Agilent 8922M S operating state is changed from Settable to Activated some fields are automatically changed or overwritten Use the following table to locate the fields that might affect your setup 4 22 2 Amplitude 3 ARFCN Screens Cell Configuration E GSM DCS 1800 PCS 1900 Field RF Gen Hop Trig RF Anl Hop Trig Hop Address Address Source RF Gen Settling RF Analyzer Settling RF Gen Hop Mode RF Analyzer Hop Mode RF Analyzer Hop Frequencies Address RF Generator Hop Frequencies Address Hop Address Hop Address Next Burst Num 0 Burst Type Burst Num 1 Burst Type Burst Num 2 Burst Type Burst Num 3 Burst Type Burst Num 0 Trig Qual Burst Num 1 Trig Qual Burst Num 2 Trig Qual Burst Num 3 Trig Qual Demod Sync Burst Sel Demod Trig Trig Source Demod Arm State Meas Sync Sync Mode Meas Sync Burst Sel See Also State Am check setting Seq Normal Normal Hop check setting 0 0 0 check setting Depends on Serv Cell BCC RACH Depends on Serv Cell BCC RACH RF Power RF Power Normal Normal Ext Ext Demod Am Midamble Ext Screens Cell Configuration Settable This field changes the RF generator amplitude It is a duplicate of the RF G
99. Agilent 8922S 4 80 2 Controls 3 Marker 4 Marker To Peak 5 Marker To Peak 6 Meas Reset 7 Position Screens Oscilloscope Marker Controls This field selects the set of oscilloscope controls Choices Main Trigger Marker This field displays the signal level at the current marker position The units of measure for this field are determined by the AF Anl In selection See Also Screens Audio AF Analyzer AF Anl In Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG Units This field causes the marker to move to the highest positive peak displayed This field causes the marker to move to the lowest negative peak displayed Selecting Meas Reset will erase any accumulated measurements used for calculating a final result and re start the measurement process for the following functions e HILIMIT e LOLIMIT e AVG See Also Keys This field controls the position of the marker 4 81 1 Amplitude 2 Freq Offset 3 Sync Status Screens Output RF Spectrum Main View Option 006 Only Output RF Spectrum Main View Option 006 Only QUTFUT EF SPECTRE 8 2 4 7 6 The Agilent 8922M S uses a 3 pole synchronously tuned filter to make Output RF Spectrum measurements rather than a 5 pole filter as specified in the GSM recommendations Refer to Section titled Output RF Spectrum Measurements Using a 3 Pole Synchronously Tuned Measurement Filter in Chapter 2 This is a copy of the R
100. Agilent Technologies Manufacturer s Address Agilent Technologies South Queensferry West Lothian EH30 9TG Scotland United Kingdom Declares that the product Product Name GSM MS Test Set Model Numbers Agilent Technologies 8922M and 8922S Product Options This declaration covers all options of the above products as detailed in TCF A 5951 9852 02 Conforms with the protection requirements of European Council Directive 89 336 EEC on the approximation of the laws of the member states relating to electromagnetic compatibility Against EMC test specifications EN 55011 1991 Group 1 Class A and EN 50082 1 1992 As Detailed in Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Technical Construction File TCF No A 5951 9852 02 Assessed by Dti Appointed Competent Body EMC Test Centre GEC Marconi Avionics Ltd Maxwell Building Donibristle ndustrial Park KY115LB Scotland United Kingdom Technical Report Number 6893 2200 CBR dated 23 September 1997 Supplementary Information The product conforms to the following EN 61010 1 1993 IEC 1010 1 1990 A1 1992 A2 1994 safety standards CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 93 EN 60825 1 1994 IEC 825 1 1993 The product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and carries the CE marking accordingly South Queensferry Scotland 17 November 1997 i pt oo ai Location Date R M Evans Quality Manager Safety Information Safety Information The f
101. C Programming and Using the TESTS Subsystem IF T_itS Y THEN PRINT TABXY 2 6 RX FREQUENCY Rx_f PRINT TABXY 2 7 TX FREQUENCY Tx_f PRINT TABXY 2 8 TEST THIS FREQUENCY T_itS Run_ts 1 RUN THROUGH THE SEQUENCE OF TESTS REPEAT Done_t 0 ENTER IN THE TEST SEQUENCE OUTPUT 800 TESTS SEQN amp VAL Run_ts I_og ENTER 800 I_o Tst VAL I_o 4 2 IF THIS TEST IS TO BE SKIPPED THEN SET THIS IF I_o 7 1 N THEN Tst Tst l IF THIS IS A PRIME FREQUENCY RUN THE TEST IF Tst amp lt 0 AND PrimeS Y THEN CALLS THE SUBROUTINE NAME T ABS Tst T ABS Tst Test_return IF Test_return 1 THEN GOTO Test_error Done_t 1 END IF IF THIS TEST IS TO BE DONE AND IS NOT A PRIME FREQUENCY IF Tst gt 0 AND NOT Done_t THEN CALLS THE SUBROUTINE NAME T ABS Tst T ABS Tst Test_return IF Test_return 1 THEN GOTO Test_error END IF Run_ts Run_ts 1 UNTIL Tst 0 OR Run_ts 5 END IF Ch Ch 1 UNTIL Ch 51 OR Tx_f 1 OR Rx_f 1 Stp_test CLEAR SCREEN PRINT TABXY 2 10 FINISHED TESTING GOTO End_program Test_error CLEAR SCREEN PRINT TABXY 2 10 PROGRAM STOPPED TEST ABS Tst FAILED End_program END T01 SUB TO1 Test_return COM I_o I_o COM Fregq Rx_f Tx_f DIM Calling_name 22 Model1 22 Options 22 TEST ROUTINE NUMBER 1 PRINT TABXY 2 12 DOING TEST NUMBER 1 FOR FREQ Rx_f GET THE PARAMETER 1 FOR THIS TEST OUTPUT 800 TESTS PARM
102. Call disconnected MM Error 0x00 Causes 0x0001 0x0002 Authorization procedure failed MS rejected Call Control sub layer error codes are actually CC cause values as defined by Rec 04 08 Table 10 53 The cause values used by the Agilent 8922M S are as follows Call disconnected CC Cause 0x00 Causes 0x0001 0x0002 0x0003 0x0006 0x001 0x001 0x001 0x001 0x001 0x001 0x001 0x001 ATDUWNEFO Unassigned number o route to specified transit network No route to destination Channel unacceptable ormal call clearing User busy User not responding User no answer Call rejected no good reason umber changed Destination out of order Invalid number 0x001 0x001f 0x0022 0x0026 0x0029 0x002a 0x002b Ox002c Ox002f 0x0039 0x003a 0x003f 0x0041 0x0046 0x004f Response to STATUS_ENQUIRY ormal unspecified No circuit channel available Network out of order etwork temporary failure Switching equipment congestion Access information discarded Requested circuit channel not available Resource unavailable unspecified Bearer capability not authorized Bearer capability not available Service or option not available unspecified Bearer service not implemented Only restricted digital information bearer capability is available Service or option not implemented unspecified 7 9 Host I O Error Operating System Error Unknown Errors Messag
103. Coupled Sensitivity 100 AM per volt nominal Calibration 0 VDC input produces calibrated output from the RF Generator Rise Fall Time 10 to 90 lt 10 us Verifying Performance Agilent Technologies 8922M S Specifications RF Analyzer Specifications Frequency Range Resolution Hop Mode Resolution Offset Frequency Offset Resolution RF In Out SWR Supplemental Characteristics Frequency Overrange Offset Resolution 10 MHz to 1 GHz 1 Hz 100 kHz lt 50 kHz 1 Hz lt 1 5 1 To 1015 MHz 500 Hz for FM demodulation out CW RF Frequency Measurement Range Level Range RF In Out Aux RF In Input Frequency Setting Error Accuracy Supplemental Characteristics Minimum Resolution 10 MHz to 1 GHz 6 to 41 dBm 36 to 20 dBm 500 kHz 1 Hz reference accuracy 1 Hz Range Input Frequency Setting Error Accuracy Supplemental Characteristics Accuracy Minimum Resolution CW RF Power Measurements RF In Out Only 5 to 41 dBm 500 kHz 0 5 dB noise effects 4 to 41 dBm 0 2 mW 0 5 dB noise effects 5 to 4 dBm 0 2 mW 0 01 dB 3 18 Verifying Performance Agilent Technologies 8922M S Specifications Peak Transmitter Carrier Power Measurement RF In Out only After one timeslot 577 us from an isolated Receiver Hop Trigger in the GSM bands Range Input Frequency Setting Error Input Level Setting Error Accuracy Supplementa
104. DE While the Test Mode is selected the three MEASURE ON parameters are also available on the bottom right hand side of all measurement screens This provides control of the Expected Input parameters during measurements CELL STRTUS LOH TROL Bosa Station Generator OFERATIWG WODE BASE STATOR BCCH ONLY ee Broadcast On Channel TRAFFIC fin Litwde 4 Channel Pee Tineeles aha RERSHREXEXTS M Paok Poser Traffic Char Chanel Tineslo B Expected peut To irten TK Lave Burgi Trap Tf Channel oe MHz Test Mode To measure an incoming signal from the mobile phone s transmitter perform the following steps Select TEST MODE In the Expected Input area 2 see Figure 2 3 on page 2 10 enter the GSM channel number of the signal to be measured This will automatically update the input Frequency field below it 3 see Figure 2 3 on page 2 10 If a frequency needs to be measured which does not correspond to a standard GSM channel enter the non standard value into the Frequency field This value can be anywhere from 10 MHz to 1000 MHz A direct entry in the Frequency field over rides the frequency defined by the Channel field above Enter the expected transmit level of the mobile phone in the TX Level field This will automatically update the Amplitude field below with the equivalent TX level represented in dBm If a non standard input level is
105. DEMONSTRATE THE USE 80 OF THE TEST SUBSYSTEM ON THE Agilent 8922M 90 00 REVISION 1 APRIL 1991 10 20 30 COM I_o I_o 470 40 INPUT OUTPUT STRING 50 COM Fregq Rx_f Tx_f 60 PRESENT RX AND TX FREQUENCIES IN MHZ 70 80 INTEGER Test_return 90 TITLE SCREEN FOR OUR TESTS 200 CLEAR SCREEN 210 PRINT TABXY 2 2 _ __ DEMO PROGRAM FOR THE TESTS SUBSYSTEM_ 220 230 SET UP A SOFT KEY TO HALT THE PROGRAM 240 ON KEY 1 LABEL Stop Test 5 GOTO Stp_test 250 260 CLEAR THE INTERNAL HP 8922M BUS 270 CLEAR 800 280 290 NOW READ THE TEST FREQUENCIES IN ONE AT A TIME AND DO THE 300 SEQUENCE OF TESTS ON THEM 310 Ch 1 320 REPEAT 330 OUTPUT 800 TESTS FREQ amp VALS Ch 340 T_og 350 ENTER 800 I_o 360 SET THE VALUE OF THE RX FREQUENCY 370 Rx_f VAL I_o 4 12 380 l SET THE VALUE OF THE TX FREQUENCY 390 Tx_f VAL I_o 30 12 400 SET WHETHER TO TEST THIS FREQUENCY 410 T_it I_o 56 1 420 SET IF THIS IS A PRIME FREQUENCY 430 IF LEN I_o gt 57 THEN 440 Prime I_o 58 1 450 ELSE 460 PrimeS N 470 END IF 480 IF THIS FREQUENCY IS TO BE TESTED 8 38 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 000 010 020 030 TEST 040 050 060 070 080 090 100 Instrument BASI
106. Delay data lt 1 frame 4 62 ms Output Level TTL 3 21 Verifying Performance Agilent Technologies 8922M S Specifications FM Demodulation Output Agilent 8922M only Range RF In Out Aux RF In Sensitivity Input Frequency Setting Error Input Level Setting Error Supplemental Characteristics 3 dB Bandwidth Output Impedance DC Offset 6 to 41 dBm 36 to 20 dBm 20u V Hz 5 into an open circuit 50 kHz with 100 kHz pk deviation 3 dB DC to 270 kHz 600 Q lt 5 mV Pulse Demodulation Output Agilent 8922M only Range RF In Out Aux RF In Input Frequency Setting Error Input Level Setting Error Rise Time 10 to 90 Fall Time 90 to 10 Supplemental Characteristics Output Impedance Output Level 6 to 41 dBm 36 to 20 dBm 50 kHz 3 dB lt 2 5 us lt 2 5 us 600 Q DC Coupled 2 Vpk into an open circuit 3 22 Verifying Performance Agilent Technologies 8922M S Specifications Output RF Spectrum Measurement Requires Option 006 After one timeslot 577s from an isolated Receiver Hop Trigger in the GSM Frequency bands Range RF In Out 6 to 41 dBm Aux RF In 36 to 20 dBm Input Levels for Optimum Dynamic Range RF In Out 7 17 27 37 dBm Aux RF In 23 13 3 7 dBm Input Frequency Setting Error 10 kHz Input Level Setting Error 3 dB Supplemental Characteristics Log Linearity 0 4 dB Amplitude Flatness 1 0 dB
107. EADY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2447716 DL gt RR DL_ESTABLISH FACCH_F Frame 2447717 DL gt PH PH_DATA FACCH_F UA F1 CRO SAPIO MO Frame 2447717 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2447724 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND SACCH Frame 2447728 DL gt PH PH_DATA SACCH_TF UI PO CR1 SAPIO MO RR System Information Type 6 Frame 2447728 PH gt DL PH_DATA FACCH_F I Nr0 Ns0 PO CRO SAPIO MO RR Assign ment Complete Frame 2447751 DL gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2447752 DL gt RR DL_DATA FACCH_F RR Assignment Complete 06 29 00 Frame 2447752 DL gt PH PH_DATA FACCH_F RR Nr1 PFO CRO SAPIO MO Frame 2447752 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2447759 RR gt MM RR_SYNC Frame 2447772 MM gt CC MM_SYNC Frame 2447773 Intra cell handover is complete HST gt CC CC_SYNC Frame 2448955 CC gt MM MM_SYNC Frame 2448955 MM gt RR RR_SYNC Frame 2448955 RR gt DL DL_DATA FACCH_F RR Handover Command 06 2b Od 14 Oc a0 le 3b Of dO Frame 2448955 DL gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2448955 DL gt PH PH_DATA FACCH_FINr1 Ns0 PO CR1 SAPIO MO RR Handover Command Frame 2448955 PH gt DL PH_DATA SACCH UI P0 CRO SAPIO M0 RR Measurement Re port Frame 2448957 DL gt RR DL_UNIT_DATA SACCH RR Measurement Report 06 15 37 37 00 77 01 a0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Frame 2448957 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2448963 Agilent 8922M S configures to new TCH APPENDIX A Protocol Log of a Typical Call PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND SACCH Frame 2448976 DL g
108. ED TEST NUMBER N SELECT N CASE 1 r01 1 CASE 2 T02 1 CASE 3 CASE 49 CASE 50 r03 1 wa wr wr T49 1 50 1 Test_return Test_return Test_return Test_return Test_return END SELECT SUBEND Instrument BASIC Programming and Using the TESTS Subsystem Program Listing Explanation The following is line by line explanation of the commands shown in the previous program example Each explanation is in the format Linenumber Command Description 10 This first line must contain the name of the Library and the program This is checked by the TESTS subsystem when loading the program 130 Establish a common I_o string for the ENTER statements 150 Establish common Rx_f and Tx_f that can be used by the subprograms tests 180 The Integer Test_return is used by the subprograms to indicate the test ended with some error condition The meaning of Test_return could be expanded to include the status of the test i e PASS FAIL 200 Clears the IBASIC Screen 210 Prints and indication that the Demo program is running 240 Allows the User to stop the program using a softkey 270 Clear the Internal Bus of the Agilent 8922M S 310 Ch keeps track of which channel we are currently testing 320 Now Repeat for all Frequencies 330 Request all the channel values from the Agilent 8922M S 340 I_o gets the string return 370 The Rx frequency is pulled from the string 390 The Tx fr
109. ELE STATUS COHTROL CALL STATUS OPERATEHG WODE BASE STATIOH CONNECTED Brosdcast On Chanel TRAFFIC TZ Les IZ 13 da Fiaal studs Channel 30 RE Law 22 98 to Br dBA Tineslot 4 Re Qual 0 0 25 BER FERSUREMEHTS ROBILE PROME Fock Power EES 11 52 iea Tiaezlor Exeected newt TK Level 15 JBA Agilent 8922M S Operating Modes In addition to the three main operating modes there are three other modes available These are e ACTIVE CELL e TEST MODE e CW GENERATOR These modes have all the features of the other modes but include extra diagnostic information on the screen This information is designed to help advanced users in fault finding mobile phones 2 4 Making a Call From the Mobile Phone to the Agilent 8922M S Making Measurements ACTIVE CELL ACTIVE CELL This is the default mode after cycling the power or selecting PRESET A functional mobile phone will lock on camp on to a signal which is produced by the Agilent 8922M S The characteristic of this signal appears in the BASE STATION fields 1 see Figure 2 2 on page 2 6 These fields show the Channel number and the Amplitude of the signal Once the mobile phone has camped on to the signal it is possible to make a call between the mobile phone and the Agilent 8922M S e Cycle the power on the Agilent 8922M S or select e Insert a Test SIM card into the mobile phone The Test SIM Subscriber Identity Module holds the user s
110. Ext see Screens Digital Demod a TTL high on this pin will initiate data capture for Use Mem RP_BURST_T1 and RP_BURST_T2 must select the correct burst number see signal descriptions for RP_BURST_T1 RP_BURST_T2 Input High demodulated data is stored for later use Low data is not stored Requirements TTL High drive 100 uA Low 2 mA See Also Keys Use Mem Connectors System Bus RP_BURST_T1 RP_BURST_T2 6 26 Figure 6 2 Connectors Timing Diagrams Timing Diagrams Toth 1 2 ms hold time of valid burst type Trig Delay after demod trigger Tbti 568 us latency time from demod Trig Delay trigger until valid burst type width of high state of width of low state of hold time of DEMOD_DATA after setup time of DEMOD_DATA prior width of high state width of low state time between subsequent Tdtr i demod triggers Tdtv 3 8 ms 4 2 ms latency time from demod trigger Trig Delay Trig Delay until DEMOD_VALID active time from DEMOD_VALID active 7 time from rising edge of last Digital Demodulation Timing Specification Table 6 27 Connectors Timing Diagrams Conditions Deaod Ara Ara State Ara Trig Delay B us Deaod Sync Burst Sel Ext Trig Qual Normal Inputs RP_DMOD_TRIG RP_BURST_T1 13 Outputs DENOD_VALID Cor DEMODULATION OUT VALID DEMOD_CLK Cor DERODULATION OUT CLOCK DEMOD_DATA or DEMODULATION QUT DATA Figure 6 3 Tdtr nats rae
111. F Analyzer Amplitude field This is the amplitude to be assumed at the selected input port see RF Analyzer Functions Range RF IN OUT 27 9 to 41 0 dBm AUX RF IN 58 0 to 20 0 dBm See Also Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Analyzer This sets the frequency offset for the Output RF Spectrum measurement This field is used when not making reference measurements The offset used is 0 0 kHz when Mode is set to Ramp Ref or Mod Ref Range 2 0 MHz to 2 0 MHz This field displays any errors that occurred while trying to synchronize to the demodulated data See Also Making Measurements Solving Problems Messages 4 82 4 Mode 5 Output RF Spectrum 6 Single Cont 7 Trig Delay 8 View Screens Output RF Spectrum Main View Option 006 Only This field selects the Output RF Spectrum measurement Mode Choices Ramping measures the Output RF Spectrum power due to ramping The peak value is returned within the time interval 28 us before bit 0 to 28 us after bit 147 or bit 87 depending on the burst type Ramp Ref makes a reference measurement needed for the Output RF Spectrum measurement when making ramping measurements Modulatn modulation measures the Output RF Spectrum power due to modulation Mod Ref makes a reference measurement needed for the Output RF Spectrum measurement when making modulation measurements This field displays the measured Output RF Spectrum power at the specified Freq Offset se
112. F Gen Hom Control 7 Mor Node Hor Trig rn Disary AF Gen Frequency kHz Amplitude ny Coupling A RF Analyzer Hor Control Hor Hode Non Hor Hoe Hor Trig 10 AC DC To Screen PHASE FRU This field selects the input accuracy of the RF Amplitude setting to be assumed by the instrument for setting the Open Auto DAC Value when in Auto AGC mode 3 dB 1 dB Choices This field selects the AGC Mode Choices 4 112 Closed is closed loop AGC operation It is used for stable repeating RF signals and provides greater accuracy measurements Open is used for isolated pulses for example RACHs Auto is used to automatically set the Open Auto DAC Value based on the entered amplitude and accuracy 3 Amplitude 4 Control 5 Do Open Cal 6 Frequency 7 Hop Meas Freq 8 Hop Mode NOTE 9 Hop Offset Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Analyzer This field is the input amplitude to be assumed at the selected RF Analyzer input The amplitude shown is for the port selected in the RF Input field Range RF IN OUT 27 9 to 41 0 dBm AUX RF IN 58 0 to 20 0 dBm See Also Chapter 3 Specifications This field determines how the RF Analyzer amplitude is selected Choices MS TX Lev automatically selects the RF Analyzer amplitude based on the level set in TX Level on the Cell Control screen if the RF analyzer s RF input connector selection i
113. F SET AVG Units 4 12 11 19 Ratio Count 12 Auto 13 14 15 Loopback 16 Measurement 1 4 17 Normal Reference Screens Bit Error 2 These fields select how frame errors CRC errors will be displayed for both the Intermediate and Completed results Choices Error displays the frame errors CRC as a percentage per measurement Count calculates and displays the total number of bit errors counted to the total number of bits measured depends on measurement type Field 11 displays the final result of the measurement field 19 displays a running total of the bit errors This field sets the loop delay automatically whenever a bit error test is started These fields select the loopback mode for the mobile station When one of these fields is selected the Agilent 8922M S will attempt to put the mobile station in the described loopback mode The mobile station must be on a traffic channel to receive the loopback message Choices Off turns loopback mode off No FE sets loopback mode and turns off frame erasure FE selects loopback mode and turns on frame erasure See Also Screens Cell Control These fields display a summary of the measurement Type definitions for all measurements through 4 To change these fields use the Meas Num 6 and Type fields The Sync Status field displays any errors that occurred while trying to synchronize to the midamble of demodulated data e Bad Sync appears when the expected midamble bit
114. FCN is not selected 1 means the ARFCN is selected This field sets the base station color code portion of the BSIC base station identity code for the serving cell Range O through 7 This field is a 124 element Boolean array defining which ARFCNs are in the cell allocation table It is used to define the ARFCNs used in the TCH hop sequence Choices Done exits the choices menu Position moves the cursor to the desired position in the array 0 means the ARFCN is not selected 1 means the ARFCN is selected 4 18 8 Control Ch 9 LAC 10 MA1 Screens Cell Configuration GSM 900 This field selects the control channel organization Choices SD 4 selects a broadcast channel with a BCCH CCCH SDCCH 4 channel organization The broadcast channel will be on the physical channel defined under the Serv Cell ARFCN field timeslot 0 SD 8 selects a broadcast channel with a BCCH CCCH organization The SDCCH 8 control channel is defined by the following 2 fields SDCCH 8 ARFCN SDCCH 8 Timeslot FA fast associated sets the control channel to use stolen FACCH frames on the TCH selected on the Cell Control screen When this choice is made the BCH will have a BCCH CCCH channel organization All call signaling is done on FACCH channels on the TCH SD 4FA selects a BCCH CCCH 4 SDCCH 4 broadcast channel All call signaling is done on FACCH channels on the TCH This field is the location area code LAC portion of the locat
115. Frame 2446745 DL gt PH PH_DATA SDCCH UA F1 CRO SAPIO MO RR Paging Response Frame 2446745 PH gt DL PH_DATA SDCCH UI P0 CRO SAPIO MO Frame 2446769 RR gt DL DL_UNIT_DATA SACCH RR System Information Type 6 06 le 0001 00 f1 10 00 01 63 ff Frame 2446775 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND SDCCH Frame 2446796 DL gt PH PH_DATA SDCCH I Nr0 Ns0 PO CR1 SAPIO MO CC Setup Frame 2446796 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND SACCH Frame 2446816 DL gt PH PH_DATA SACCH UI PO CR1 SAPIO MO RR System Information Type 6 Frame 2446816 PH gt DL PH_DATA SDCCH RR Nr1 PFO CR1 SAPIO MO Frame 2446820 PH gt DL PH_DATA SACCH UI P0 CRO SAPIO MO RR Measurement Re port Frame 2446840 DL gt RR DL_UNIT_DATA SACCH RR Measurement Report 06 15 37 37 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Frame 2446840 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND SDCCH Frame 2446847 DL gt PH PH_DATA SDCCH UI PO CR1 SAPIO MO Frame 2446847 PH gt DL PH_DATA SDCCH I Nr1 Ns0 PO CRO SAPIO MO CC Call Con firmed Frame 2446871 DL gt RR DL_DATA SDCCH CC Call Confirmed 83 08 Frame 2446871 RR gt MM RR_DATA CC Call Confirmed 83 08 Frame 2446871 RR gt DL DL_UNIT_DATA SACCH RR System Information Type 5 06 1d 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 08 00 00 Frame 2446875 MM gt CC MM_DATA CC Call Confirmed 83 08 Frame 2446875 CC gt CC CC_SYNC Frame 2446875 CC gt MM MM_SYNC Frame 2446875 Agilent 8922M S Configures to TCH APPENDIX A Protocol Log of a Typical Call MM gt RR RR_SYNC Frame 2446875 RR gt DL DL
116. HOP when the RF generator s hop mode is set to Hop the hop trigger is set to Arm and the hop address source is set to Ext These signals can also be read on the positive going edge of RP_RX_HOP when the RF analyzer s hop mode is set to Hop the hop trigger is set to Arm and the hop address source is set to Ext Or these signals are read on the positive going edge on RP_SEQ_HOP when the address source is set to Seq the RF analyzer s hop trigger is set to Arm or RF generator s hop trigger is set to Arm Requirements Amplitude TTL levels High drive requirement 100 uA Low drive requirement 1 mA Format unassigned binary high 1 See Also Screens RFG RFA Hop Control Specifications Timing Diagrams 6 22 Connectors Signal Descriptions for SYSTEM BUS RP_HOP_INHIBIT Pin 30 Input RP_RST_SEQ_ HOP This is the rear panel internal hop inhibit input It connects to the hop controller It is used to inhibit internal hopping The internal hop sequence address register is still sequenced however This signal should normally be kept TTL high This line is active whenever the hop controller hop address source is set to Seq Requirements Amplitude TTL levels High drive requirements 100 pA Low drive requirements 2 mA Active level Low See Also Screens RFG RFA Hop Control Specifications Timing Diagrams Pin 11 Input This is the rear panel input to reset the internal hop sequence address register It connects to the
117. L DL_DATA FACCH_F CC Disconnect 03 25 02 e0 90 Frame 2449729 DL gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2449729 DL gt PH PH_DATA FACCH_FINr1 Ns0O PO CRI SAPIO MO CC Disconnect Frame 2449729 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2449734 RR gt DL DL_UNIT_DATA SACCH_TF RR System Information Type 5 06 1d 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 08 00 00 Frame 2449760 PH gt DL PH_DATA FACCH_F RR Nr1 PFO CR1 SAPIO MO Frame 2449761 DL gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2449761 PH gt DL PH_DATA SACCH UI P0 CRO SAPIO M0 RR Measurement Re port Frame 2449762 DL gt RR DL_UNIT_DATA SACCH RR Measurement Report 06 15 37 37 00 77 01 a0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Frame 2449762 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND SACCH Frame 2449782 DL gt PH PH_DATA SACCH_TF UI PO CR1 SAPIO MO RR System Information Type 5 Frame 2449782 PH gt DL PH_DATA FACCH _FINr1 Ns1 PO CRO SAPIO MO CC Release Frame 2449800 DL gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2449800 DL gt RR DL_DATA FACCH_F CC Release 83 6d Frame 2449800 DL gt PH PH_DATA FACCH_F RR Nr2 PFO CRO SAPIO MO Frame 2449800 RR gt MM RR_DATA CC Release 83 6d Frame 2449801 MM gt CC MM_DATA CC Release 83 6d Frame 2449801 CC gt MM MM_DATA CC Release Complete 03 2a Frame 2449801 MM gt RR RR_DATA CC Release Complete 03 2a Frame 2449801 A 22 APPENDIX A Protocol Log of a Typical Call RR gt DL DL_DATA FACCH_F CC Release Complete 03 2a Frame 2449801 CC gt MM MM_RELEASE Frame 2449801 MM gt RR RR_REL Frame 24498
118. M S during the next call made Choices Off results in no ciphering signal Enabled Special Option H05 only sends a ciphering mode message and enables ciphering If the Authentication Mode is Full 64 or Full 54 MSRES and BSRES must match for the call to proceed and enable ciphering Disabled sends a ciphering mode message and disables ciphering This field allows you to select whether or not the mobile automatically performs a location update after synchronizing to the BCH regardless of whether the cell attributes are the same as those stored by the mobile This allows the mobile phone to report its IMSI as part of the camping operation This field is only used if Special Option HOS is fitted It displays the Ciphering Key Kc generated by the Agilent 8922M S when the Authentication Mode is Full If the Authentication Mode is Partial or None you must enter Kc into this field The Agilent 8922M S will use all 64 bits from this field Entries into the Kc field must account for any truncation of bits that may be done by the mobile station Example If the mobile station truncates 10 bits resulting in a 54 bit Kc enter a hexadecimal number in the Agilent 8922M S Kc field that correctly positions the 54 bits that will be used inserting 0 s where necessary These fields display the mobile station s LAI Local Area Identification after the last location update This area allows you to adjust the serving cell location information
119. MSK 7 Hop Mode NOTE 8 Hop Trig NOTE Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Gen This field selects the status of DC AM When the instrument mode is Activated see Screens Cell Configuration the broadcast and traffic channels amplitude can be lowered using choices in this field Choices Ext turns on the front panel input for DC AM Off turns off DC AM TCH Lower reduces the TCH amplitude by a level determined by DAC Value BCCH Lower reduces the BCCH amplitude by a level determined by DAC Value Both Lower reduces the TCH and BCCH amplitude by a level determined by DAC Value See Also Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer Mod Source DAC Value Screens Cell Configuration This is the non hopped frequency entry field When the RF Gen Hop Control Hop Mode is set to Hop this field will show the frequency status as Hopped Range 10 0 to 1015 0 MHz This field turns on the input for external GMSK modulation When Activated see Screens Cell Configuration Ext is connected to internally generated signals Choices Ext Off This field selects between the Hop and Non Hop modes of the RF Generator Do not make measurements with Hop Mode set to Hop and Hop Trig set to Disarm This field selects whether the RF Generator is armed or disarmed to accept a hop trigger Do not make measurements with Hop Trig set to Disarm and Hop Mode set to Hop 4 116 9 Pulse 10 RF Output Screens RF Generator RF Analyze
120. Main View 4 83 output rf spectrum cell control 4 28 output RF spectrum measurement 2 20 OutRFSpec Output RF Spectrum Trace View 4 85 P Pages Cell Control 4 42 pages call counts 4 42 Paging Cell Control 4 42 Parallel Port connector 6 15 parameters enter into Test Executive 8 34 Parity 8 6 Configure 4 61 Pass Filter A 12 Logging A 12 Pause A 11 PCN interface connector 6 15 Peak Marker To Spectrum Analyzer Marker Controls 4 125 peak carrier power measurement 2 14 Peak Phase Error Phase Freq Main 4 87 Phase Freq Multi burst 4 89 peak power cell control 4 28 peak transmitted power 4 102 performance test software 3 5 performance tests 3 2 performance verification 3 2 Personality A 6 A 7 setting A 6 A 7 phase and frequency cell control 4 28 phase error 4 91 phase error measurement 2 15 Pk TX Pwr Pwr Ramp Summary 4 102 Pls Demod Audio 4 4 4 75 4 77 4 80 Polarity Phase Freq Data Bits 4 94 POnOffFall Pulse Fall 4 110 POnOffRise Pulse Rise 4 108 Pos Neg Oscilloscope Trigger Controls 4 78 Position Oscilloscope Marker Controls 4 81 Spectrum Analyzer Marker Controls 4 126 power continuous wave 4 55 power cord 1 4 power meter zeroing 4 29 4 55 4 103 power ramp measurement 2 16 power supply configure to GPIB 8 35 ppm 4 14 PRBS 4 42 PRBS Pattrn 4 42 Pre Trig Oscilloscope Trigger Controls 4 78 previous keys 5 6 print keys 5
121. Message Line displayed at the top of the screen Making Measurements If You Have Problems with a Measurement If You Have Problems with a Measurement This section tells you what to do if either of the following screen display events occurs e Message Line Messages on the top of the screen e Isa Message Line displayed at the top of the screen e Possible Solutions to Message Line Errors e Sync Status Messages e Is an Error Message Displayed in the Sync Status Field Refer to Chapter 7 Messages for more information At position 1 see Figure 2 16 on page 2 31 a message line appears if Attempt To Arm or Query an Inactive Measurement check that a measurement has been selected from the To Screen e Trigger too late decrease trigger delay See Trigger Timing B e Trigger too early increase trigger delay See Trigger Timing B e Measurement Armed awaiting trigger See Trigger Timing A 2 30 Making Measurements If You Have Problems with a Measurement p MEASUREMENT SYNC Burst Definition Midanble v y Burst Number 61 01001110101100000100111019 Burst Type Burst Length 14 Widamble Start Bit Position 61 Tris Qual Meas Cnt Meas Tris Meas Sync Meas Sync Trig Source Burst Sel Sync Status fess Denca Burst Def urst User FM ErrCount Trig Delay To Screen inion Burst Type OrTSCs T Iria Tinins 1IRACH ER Fr Bit 2 TSC5 SIRACH
122. PUT Addr PROG EXEC lt program line command gt with lt program command gt representing any command or program line you want to enter For example to enter or change line 20 of a program to 20 A 3 14 you would enter the following command on your computer OUTPUT Addr PROG EXEC 20 A 3 14 Quoted strings such as those used in PRINT commands must use double quotes Example OUTPUT Addr PROG EXEC 30 PRINT TEST A connected terminal or PC using a terminal emulator is used to enter characters directly into the Agilent 8922M S IBASIC Controller s command line Editing a program line requires you to re enter the full line with corrections Configuring your terminal PC for this operation is explained in this chapter Serial Port Configuration for Programming on page 8 6 Entering Commands When program lines or commands are entered you press the ENTER key on your terminal to execute the command For example to LIST a program in RAM you would type LIST This differs from using the Cursor Control knob to enter characters where you select Done to execute the command 8 19 Instrument BASIC Memory Cards Memory Cards This section contains information about memory cards and about programming the Agilent 8922M S You are also shown how to connect a radio to the Agilent 8922M S in order to run automated tests from the main radio test screen referred to as the T
123. Problems e The measuring receiver and the UUT should have their timebases locked to make accurate frequency measurements Test 06 Audio Frequency Analyzer Test 07 Oscilloscope Verifying Performance Understanding the Tests Equipment Required HP Agilent 8904A Option 001 002Multifunction Synthesizer HP Agilent 3456A Voltmeter Theory of the Test The HP Agilent 8904A is used to generate accurate test signals which are analyzed by the UUT The voltmeter is used to reduce measurement uncertainty by accurately characterizing the test signal level to predict the correct response of the UUT The voltmeter is used in the AC level DC level SINAD and distortion measurements Distortion test signals are generated by summing two sinewaves in the HP Agilent 8904A one as the desired signal the other as a distortion product Things To Check In Case Of Problems e For frequency accuracy measurements the HP Agilent 8904A timebase should be locked to the UUT e The voltmeter reading is used as a reference to normalize the reading from the UUT The output measured result is the actual reading from the UUT normalized by the actual reading from the voltmeter If the voltmeter makes a faulty reading it will normalize the actual UUT response and cause it to appear faulty also If the front panel reading from the UUT is significantly different from the printed measured response the normalization may be the cause Equipment Required HP
124. Protocol Interface Port on the rear panel of the Agilent 8922M A 4 Camp On Set up Logging Screen Set Service Latch APPENDIX A Setting Up the Agilent Technologies 8922M Setting Up the Agilent Technologies 8922M Firstly the Mobile Station should be camped on to the Agilent 8922M That is the MCC MNC LAC should all be correct and any adjustments to power level made as appropriate to the Mobile under test For more details on how to get camped on refer to Making a Call From the Agilent 8922M S to the Mobile Phone Chapter 2 Agilent 8922M S GSM Test Set User s Guide Set up the logging conditions to the Protocol Port using the logging screen The logging screen gives you control over the Protocol Interface port on the rear panel The screen is selected by highlighting More and selecting LOGGING Then from highlighting the field below Pass Filter one of the following logging conditions are available a NetwkOnly b DataLink c Service For a full explanation of these options refer to Additional Information page A 11 To enable protocol logging the correct service latch must be set To set the correct service latch from the Cell Control screen select CONFIG Then select SERVICE and then Latch From this field choose g_log_configuration and ensure the Value is set to 0 Return to the Logging Screen A 5 Check Software Set Personality NOTE APPENDIX A Setting Up the HP Agilent 37900D
125. Qual e RX Lev When Compatibility Switch mode is being used refer to Chapter 3 Using Compatibility Switch Chan TX Lev and Timeslot fields under Mobile are replaced with the To Screens List see item Field Types 5 at the start of this chapter This field sets which screen will be displayed once the Bit Error measurements has been selected from the Cell Control screen Choices STD means the screen will display the standard Bit Error Screen FAST means the screen will display the Fast Bit Error Screen as shown above 4 57 10 MS Loopback 11 Run Stop Control 12 Single Cont Control 13 BE Ratio Screens Fast Bit Error This field is used to enter or display the Round Trip Delay RTD of the mobile expressed in number of TDMA frames before bits are compared The correct number of TDMA frames can be determined automatically by making a Bit Error Test using Auto Mode when the bit error ratio is approximately lt 20 Then if faster measurements are desired or if the bit error ratio exceeds 20 change the mode to manual Choices Burst Delay range 0 through 26 Manual Auto When Compatibility Switch mode is used refer to Chapter 3 Using Compatibility Switch two additional fields appear under the new heading Loopback Bit Error measurements are not automatic when in Compatibility Switch mode The additional fields allow manual control of test loop commands to the mobile When selecting Off an open test
126. RF output is set to RF IN OUT or when the RF analyzer s RF input is set to RF IN OUT The measurement input for the oscilloscope connects to the Audio analyzer and to the oscilloscope when selected as an Audio analyzer input source This is the input for general purpose oscilloscope measurements but it can be used for other measurements as well for example audio analyzer measurements filtering an audio signal when used with the demodulation output monitor signal See Also Screens Oscilloscope 18 TRIGGER IN MEASURE 19 VALID DEMODULATION OUT Agilent 8922M Only Connectors Front Panel Connectors of the Agilent Technologies 8922M S The measurement trigger input is the trigger source for the oscilloscope spectrum analyzer option 006 Pwr Ramp Phase Freq and Data demodulation All triggered measurements when trigger is selected as external are triggered by this signal It is not possible to separately trigger an oscilloscope or spectrum analyzer measurement from a Pwr Ramp measurement TRIGGER IN is selected when the digital demodulator s Trig Source is set to Ext Meas or when the measurement synchronization Trig Source is set to Ext Meas See Also Screens Phase Freq Pwr Ramp Oscilloscope Spectrum Analyzer This connector is connected to the DSP analyzer s digital demodulation data valid output This signal is the digital demodulation data valid signal which is generated when digitally demodulati
127. Rec 11 10 If you need to make a measurement to this specification go to the Power Ramp Summary screen The field in the top right hand corner displays the Peak Carrier Power to GSM Rec 11 10 Refer to PWR RAMP SUMMARY screen item 5 for a description The algorithm for the Peak Carrier Power measurement is based on the use of a fast sampler taking continuous asynchronous measurements of the power detected at the RF IN OUT port The sampler accumulates 75uS sample bins containing the maximum power observed during the period and the minimum power observed during the period Sampling rate is 10 MHz The maximum and minimum values observed are based on 750 individual samples within the period A trigger is provided at the middle of bit 0 of the burst When using RF Rise triggering the actual trigger may occur several bits earlier due to the ramp up of the burst In response to this trigger the following 6 sample bins 0 5 from the sampler are saved and reported to the measurement processor Timeslot E E EEEE LELEL ous 577uS Mobile Burst Amplitude ees Trigger f Sample Bins A 6 7 8 9 375uS Window 75uS sample_bin 2 41 Making Synchronized External Making Measurements Advanced Features The beginning of the 0 sample bin will be between 0 and 75uS bit 0 20 after the trigger as the sampler runs asynchronously to the trigger The last sample bin will complete sampling between 450uS and 525uS bit 121
128. S and Chapter 2 Making Measurements for more extensive information on using the Agilent Technologies 8922M S e Fuse Envelope and Fuse e REF OUT REF IN cable Option 001 only e Power Cord To avoid potential injury ensure that two people are employed in lifting the Agilent 8922M S out of the box and for any other instrument moves If you have the Agilent 8922M S Option 010 Multi Band Test System refer to the appropriate Agilent 8922 Multi Band User s Guide for more information on connection and operating differences 1 2 CAUTION Line Voltage and Fuse Selection Figure 1 1 Other Fusing Installing Your Agilent 8922M S Fuses and Power Cords Fuses and Power Cords Before plugging this instrument into the Mains line voltage be sure the correct voltage on the line voltage selection card has been selected Verify that the line voltage selection card is matched to the power source see Figure 1 1 on page 1 3 Order fuse Agilent part 2110 0083 2 5 A 250 V normal blow for replacement To avoid the possibility of hazardous electrical shock do not operate this instrument at line voltages greater than 126 5 Vac with line fre quencies greater than 66 Hz leakage currents at these line settings may exceed 3 5 mA 1 Open cover door pull the FUSE PULL lever and rotate to left Remove the fuse 2 Remove the Line Voltage Selection Card Position the card so the line voltage appears at top left cove
129. SE nK ANG I E Ehan ik Lew 1 Tiaaslot f Hore 2 3 Figure 2 12 Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Use the MeasReset 2 to reset the trace and measurements in the Agilent 8922M S This is useful if you are using the Max Hold field 3 The resolution bandwidth of the spectrum analyzer is automatically coupled to the frequency span Reducing the span to less than 200 kHz can be useful when checking the mobile phone s transmitter 2 25 Scope Figure 2 13 Making Measurements Measurements The oscilloscope function of the Agilent 8922M S allows you to view the demodulated signal from the mobile phone This can be used for fault finding in the audio path Select SCOPE in the cell control screen to gain access to the oscilloscope function of the Agilent 8922M S Selecting 1 see Figure 2 13 on page 2 26 gives access to other functions of the oscilloscope These are e Main gives you the basic oscilloscope functions for viewing and measuring the trace e Trigger allows you to trigger the input signal from a variety of sources e Marker offers you the capability to measure the voltage at discrete points in time along the trace The result is shown in the top right hand corner of the screen You may find it helpful to use the SHIFT HOLD feature when using the marker DSR ILLQSC IPE i in TIFE Feeech Out Controls Hain Oscilloscope Measurements Use the MeasReset 2 to reset the trace and m
130. SSIGN e Press one of the Local keys 1 z3 The field you assigned should now have the local number next to it When you press the local key the chosen field will be accessed A toggled field will toggle or cause immediate action in certain types of fields Re assigning the local key clears the previous setting or pressing RELEASE and then a local key clears that key Some fields cannot be assigned to local keys To Use Pre Assigned Local Keys Fields that might be used frequently have local keys assigned to them by the factory Following this procedure will make the factory assigned local keys available 1 Press ASSIGN CENTER The numbers 1 and 2 will appear in front of the two pre assigned fields 2 Press the Local key L1 or L2 and notice how the cursor immediately moves to the corresponding field 3 To stop using the default Local keys press RELEASE A G1 G2 G3 NOTE NOTE Keys Global Keys Global Keys Keys G1 through G3 CSHIFT G1 G2 or G3 are global keys They can access fields that are not displayed o n the current screen To Assign a Global Key e Use the knob to position the cursor at the field of your choice The following screens do not allow global keys to be assigned or allow fields to be pulled in from other screens TEST HELP and MESSAGE e Press Press L1 ASSIGN e Press e Press one of the global keys G1 G2 or G3 The field you assigned can
131. Status tin ee E 1iResTrpelI JER Tk Lev q tten Hold Ai ResTypelb Tineslot On Ott 4 Loopback 2 STS MERA A X K Gi BELGE 12 23 22 18 1714 13 15 Each time the Bit Error Test is run four measurements are made see Meas Num Because of limited screen space only two measurements are displayed at one time The upper left side of the screen will display measurement 1 or 3 and the upper right side will display measurement 2 or 4 For further information read the field description for Meas Num The test results display area is separated into Intermediate results which are results obtained during a test and Completed results which are results from the last completed test This field selects automatic pulse modulation for the adjacent timeslots Choices 30 dB automatically pulses the adjacent timeslots 30 dB higher than the RF generator amplitude setting The entire preceding timeslot is 30 dB higher The first few bits for the following timeslot are 30 dB higher The remainder of the following timeslot is pulsed off Off makes all timeslots the same amplitude 4 11 NOTE 2 Amplitude 3 Atten Hold 4 5 BE Ratio BE Count 6 Meas Num 7 Bits Tested Intermediate 8 Bits Tested Completed 9 Bits To Test 10 CRC or FE Screens Bit Error 2 This field is not featured in the Agilent 8922S This field changes the RF generator amplitude It is a duplicate of the RF generator s Amplitude field on the RF Ge
132. TS Peak Power HBa Expected Input TK Level Burst Type dBm BASE STATION Broadcast On Channel Anplitude dEn Traffic Chan Channel Timeslot d D a To Screen CONFIG x o m c s a 3 4 5 This screens allows you to test the mobile phone without a call being set up This field selects the type of mobile that is to be tested Choices GSM 900 E GSM DCS 1800 PCS 1900 This field selects the test mode of the Agilent 8922M S The types are Active Cell this mode sets up a call between the mobile phone and the Agilent 8922M S e Test Mode this mode sets the Agilent 8922M S to work with a mobile phone running a test mode This mode allows you to transmit either BCCH only or BCCH and TCH and measures an independent GSM signal e CW Generator this mode sets the Agilent 8922M S as a signal generator 4 33 3 Channel 4 TX Lev 5 Burst Type 6 Base Station 7 Traffic Chan Screens Cell Control Test Mode This field displays the channel number the Agilent 8922M S is taking measurements from For a GSM900 mobile phone the channel number may vary from 1 through 124 For an E GSM mobile phone the channel number may vary from 0 through 124 and 975 through 1023 If you change the channel number the frequency field value also changes The converse of this is not the case You may enter anon GSM standard channel frequency on another screen between 10 MHz and 100
133. This is the rear panel trigger signal input for hopping the RF generator and or the RF analyzer if selected It is used when internally sequencing through the hop frequencies It is connected to the hop controller This signal can also be configured to control RF generator output pulsing automatic level pulsing when this trigger occurs It is used along with internal hop sequence reset input to control frequency hopping through user entered RF generator and RF analyzer hop frequency tables Hop frequencies are automatically selected through user entered RF generator and RF analyzer hop frequency tables Hop frequency table address input lines are used for resetting the internal sequence address register For the hop sequence to be active the hop controller s hop address source must be set to Seq To generate frequency hops the hop controller s hop address source must be set to internal the RF generator s or RF analyzer s hop mode must be set to hop and the RF generator s or RF analyzer s hop trigger must be set to arm Requirements Amplitude TTL levels High drive requirements 100 pA Low drive requirements 2 mA Triggered by rising edge See Also Screens RFG RFA Hop Control Specifications Timing Diagrams Screens RFG RFA Hop Control Specifications Timing Diagrams RP_RST_SEQ HOP 6 24 RP_TXD RP_RXD NOTE RP_TX_HOP SEQ_TRIG_OUT Connectors Signal Descriptions for SYSTEM BUS TXD Pin 37 RXD Pin 18 Output
134. Tineslot Control MS TH Ley dEn This field selects which adjacent cell SACCH measurement result to display The adjacent cells are prioritized by power level One is the largest signal Range 1to6 This field changes the RF generator amplitude It is a duplicate of the RF generator Amplitude field on the RF Generator RF Analyzer screen See Also Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Generator This field selects the ARFCN for TCH1 or TCH2 when the Mode field is set to Single Other Settings MAI or MA2 appears in this field when Mode is set to Hopped This field is a count of bad synchronization occurrences since the last reset 4 37 5 Caller 6 Call Status 7 Call Status TCH State 8 Ciph Screens Cell Control 2 This field indicates who initiated the current call e MS indicates mobile station initiation BS indicates base station initiation e indicates status call status is inactive This field indicates the state of the current call e Inactive e Setup Request e Alerting e Connected e Disconnect e Proceeding These fields give information about the current TCH If the Agilent 8922M S is not on a TCH yet these will be blank e Mode Hopped or Single e ARFCN this will be an integer if TCH Mode is single otherwise MA1 or MA2 e Timeslot This field displays the current Ciphering mode of the mobile station 4 38 9 Connect 10 Decode Errors 11 Demod Arm
135. Trigger in the GSM Frequency bands Phase Error lt 1 rms Peak Phase Error lt 4 peak Frequency Error 0 02 ppm 18 Hz reference accuracy for normal bursts Typically 0 03 ppm 27 Hz reference accuracy for RACHs Amplitude Flatness 0 25 dB peak Clock Input Agilent 8922M only Frequency 270 833 kHz 2 Hz relative to reference Level TTL Data Input Agilent 8922M only Format Non differentially encoded input Level TTL Supplemental Characteristics After three timeslots 1 73 ms from an isolated RF Generator Trigger in the GSM frequency bands Phase Error lt 0 5 rms Peak Phase Error lt 2 0 peak Frequency Error 0 01ppm 9 Hz reference accuracy for normal bursts 0 02ppm 18 Hz reference accuracy for RACH bursts Pulse Modulation Input Levels Agilent 8922M only TTL Rise Fall Time 10 to 90 lt 5 us Supplemental Characteristics On Off Ratio gt 80 dB 3 16 Verifying Performance Agilent Technologies 8922M S Specifications 30 dB Pulse Modulation Agilent 8922M only All timeslots 30 dB higher than desired active timeslot to test adjacent timeslot rejection Supplemental Characteristics Input Levels TTL Rise Fall Time 10 to 90 lt 5 us AM for Level Control Agilent 8922M Only For output levels lt 1 dBm at Aux RF Out or lt 19 dBm at RF In Out Supplemental Characteristics Input Range 1 0V to 0 6V Impedance 600 nominal DC
136. User s Guide Agilent Technologies 8922M S GSM Test Set egt Agilent Technologies gt a s a Agilent Part No 08922 90211 Printed in UK January 1998 Copyright 1998 Agilent Technologies All rights reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means including electronic storage and retrieval or translation into a foreign language without prior agree ment and written consent from Agilent Technologies Inc as governed by United States and international copyright laws Contents Declaration of Conformity ee ee eceeeeeeeseeesecneeeseceeaecnaeeseeneensees v Sales and Service Offices cscsecesseseserencesnsorencenesonsesenesensersnones Vili Agilent Technologies 8922M S Documentation Description x Typeface COnventlons isrener ocene aee eais xi 1 Installing Your Agilent 8922M S Using this Chapter s sii cssccesseseassseastoasscbeosedeastusrscdocstaacssenesenicseviennabiteae 1 2 Fuses and Power Cords 0 ccccessscesssessecesceceseecnseeencecseeeeneceneeeaeceeees 1 3 Installation OVerview secreties riS ee ars eian oi enia esi 1 5 General Information sceeecececeeeseceeneeeseceseeceeeeceaeesneeceeeesseseeeenaes 1 8 2 Making Measurements Using Piis Chaptetssss isccssacsssasscastsassgusssodanbesacocdetstuactessevess sessenabsteas 2 2 Agilent Technologies 8922M S Operating Modes eee 2 3 ACTHVE GEL Me ure E EE E AE E 2 5 TEST MODE cee ennea E a eE a EIE
137. _DATA SDCCH RR Assignment Command 06 2e Oc a0 1e Of 63 01 Frame 2446875 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND SDCCH Frame 2446898 DL gt PH PH_DATA SDCCH I Nr1 Ns1 PO CR1 SAPIO MO RR Assignment Command Frame 2446898 RR gt DL DL_RELEASE SDCCH Frame 2446906 DL gt RR DL_RELEASE SDCCH Frame 2446906 RR gt DL DL_RELEASE SACCH Frame 2446906 DL gt RR DL_RELEASE SACCH Frame 2446906 PH gt DL PH_CONNECT FACCH_F Frame 2446911 PH gt DL PH_CONNECT SACCH_TF Frame 2446911 PH gt DL PH_DATA FACCH_F SABM P1 CRO SAPIO MO Frame 2446923 DL gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2446923 DL gt RR DL_ESTABLISH FACCH_F Frame 2446923 DL gt PH PH_DATA FACCH_F UA F1 CRO SAPIO MO Frame 2446923 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2446926 PH gt DL PH_DATA FACCH_F I Nr0 Ns0 PO CRO SAPIO MO RR Assign ment Complete Frame 2446953 DL gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2446953 DL gt RR DL_DATA FACCH_F RR Assignment Complete 06 29 00 Frame 2446953 DL gt PH PH_DATA FACCH_F RR Nr1 PFO CRO SAPIO MO Frame 2446954 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2446960 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND SACCH Frame 2446974 DL gt PH PH_DATA SACCH UI PO CR1 SAPIO MO RR System Information Type 5 Frame 2446974 RR gt MM RR_ SYNC Frame 2446974 MM gt CC MM_SYNC Frame 2446975 A 16 APPENDIX A Protocol Log of a Typical Call PH gt DL PH_DATA FACCH_F I Nr0 Ns1 PO CRO SAPIO MO CC Alerting Frame 2446988 DL gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2446988 DL gt RR DL_DATA FACCH_F CC Alerting
138. aeseeenees A 3 Connecting the Agilent 8922M to the HP Agilent 37900D A 4 Setting Up the Agilent Technologies 8922M 0 ieeeeeeeeeeeeeees A 5 Setting Up the HP Agilent 37900D s sssesseseseeseseerrsrerrsrrrrsrrerrrrereens A 6 How to Obtain a Protocol Log wo eee ce eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeetaeeeeenees A 8 Additional Information 0 eee eceeeecceseeeeeeseeeeecaeecaecsaeeaeesaeeaeens A 11 Protocol Log of a Typical Call eeeesseseseseeeesreerrersreerssrerrsrererreee A 13 B Glossary EAA AEE a wenmed dei ATE B 2 Index 1 Contents 5 Contents Contents 6 Warranty Warranty This Agilent Technologies instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment During the warranty period Agilent Technologies will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Agilent Technologies Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Agilent Technologies and Agilent Technologies shall pay shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to Agilent Technologies from another country Agilent Technologies warrants that its software and firmware designated by Agilent Technologies for use with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument Agilent Technologies does not warrant t
139. alid output signal These signals are connected directly in parallel with their respective front panel connectors See Also Front Panel Connectors DATA DEMODULATION OUT CLOCK DEMODULATION OUT VALID DEMODULATION OUT DATA Pin 1 CLOCK Pin 20 Inputs These are the front panel DATA and CLOCK inputs These signals are connected directly in parallel with their respective front panel connectors The two inputs are directly coupled to each other Avoid putting signals on both inputs simultaneously See Also DATA MODULATION IN CLOCK MODULATION IN Pin 24 Output This output is a 1 bit wide trigger The timeslot and bit position in the timeslot are programmable on the Service screen Requirements Amplitude TTL Levels Low Drive 10 uA High Drive 2 mA See Also Screens Service Pin 21 Output This output signals when a DSP measurement is being made It is used as an auxiliary trigger output signal for use with an external spectrum analyzer PULSE_MOD_IN NOTE RP_BURST_T1 RP_BURST_T2 Table 2 2 Connectors Signal Descriptions for SYSTEM BUS Pin 6 Input This is the pulse modulation input This signal is connected directly in parallel with the PULSE MODULATION IN front panel connector The two inputs are directly coupled to each other Avoid putting signals on both inputs simultaneously See Also Screens RF Generator Front Panel Connectors PULSE MODULATION IN T1 Pin 26 T2 Pin 8 Select Control These
140. amble only The amplitude of the burst did not rise until after the first few bits were received The amplitude of the burst fell before the last few bits were received The DSP analyzer s RF level did not rise high enough to make a valid measurement No synchronization error occurred The measurement hardware overloaded during the measurement Increase RF Analyzer Amplitude setting to correct The amplitude envelope was shorter than the expected burst 7 4 Messages Protocol Error Messages Protocol Error Messages A protocol error may be generated by one of six sources e Expiry of a timer e Anerror detected by the physical hardware interface layer PH e An error detected by the Data Link layer DL e An error detected by the Radio Resource sublayer RR e An error detected by the Mobility Management sublayer MM e An error detected by the Call Control sublayer CC The error may be fatal or nonfatal Fatal errors will cause the call to be cleared and will display an error message containing the timer name or the abbreviation for the layer or sublayer PH DL RR MM CC and an error code Nonfatal errors may only be observed by inspecting the signaling log Errors are fatal for calls in progress or signalling being attempted Timer names are taken from GSM Rec 04 06 04 08 and 05 08 with the exception of T3299 which is Agilent unique The timer expiry appears at the top of the display and is of the form
141. amp VALS 1 I_os ENTER 800 I_o l IF THERE IS NO PARAMETER THEN PAUSE IF I_o 1 5 Error THEN PRINT TABXY 2 14 ERROR IN RECALLING THE PARAMETERS FOR 1 Test_return 1 END IF Parm_1 VAL I_o t GET CONFIGURATION 1 INFO FOR THIS TEST OUTPUT 800 TESTS CONF amp VAL 1 I_o ENTER 800 I_o 8 39 Instrument BASIC Programming and Using the TESTS Subsystem 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 TEST 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 31 0 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 2380 2390 2400 2410 2420 2430 8 40 Calling_name I_oS 4 21 Model I_o0 27 21 Iladdr VAL TRIMS I_o 50 Options I_o 54 GET SPECIFICATION 1 FOR THIS TEST OUTPUT 800 TESTS SPEC amp VALS 1 I_ogs ENTER 800 I_o IF I_o 1 5 Error THEN PRINT TABXY 2 14 ERROR IN RECALLING THE SPECIFICATIONS FOR 1 Test_return 1 END IF Lower_limit VAL TRIMS I_o 4 Upper_limit VAL TRIMS I_o 17 Test TRIMS I_o 30 SUBEND T02 SUB TO2 Test_return COM COM TE PRI SUBEND I_o I_o Freq Rx_f Tx_f ST ROUTINE NUMBER 2 NT TABXY 2 13 DOING TEST NUMBER 2 FOR FREQ Rx_f TO3 SUB TO3 Test_return COM COM TE PR T SUB I_o I_o Freq Rx_f Tx_f ST ROUTINE NUMBER 3 NT TABXY 2 14 DOING TEST NUMBER 3 FOR FREQ Rx_f SUBEND T N Test_return CALL THE PASS
142. an error occurs Input value out of range In that case increase the Aux RF Out setting or increase the Aux RF In power level so that they are closer to zero This field controls the beeper volume Choices Off Quiet Loud This toggle field allows you to simulate the operation of an Agilent 8922G from an Agilent 8922M or an Agilent 8922E from an Agilent 8922S The key can be used to set the correct Preset conditions after this field has been changed although a power cycle is recommended These fields set the date for the internal calendar The Date can be read by a controller using GPIB then printed on test results YY YY MM DD This field displays the firmware revision of the instrument This is the CRT intensity adjustment field Range 1 to 8 4 50 8 I O Config 9 Meas Reset Meas Cntl 10 Offset 11 OPT 001 REF OUT 12 Radio Type 13 Range Hold Screens Configure This field allows you to access the I O configuration screen This screen allows you to select your printer configuration GPIB and serial port communication settings Selecting Meas Reset will erase any accumulated measurements used for calculating a final result and re start the measurement process for the following functions e HILIMIT e LOLIMIT e AVG This field sets the reference frequency offset in parts per million ppm If installed this field turns the optional high stability timebase on or off This field selects the
143. and press the Cursor Control knob A list of characters is displayed that you select from to enter your commands A maximum of 100 characters may be entered into the command line After the command is entered on the command line select Done at the top of the list of characters to execute it Commands and program lines are entered just as you would enter them using a keyboard For example to set the default mass storage device to the memory card slot you would enter the command MSI INTERNAL and select Done To list the contents of the default mass storage device enter CAT and select Done Using HP IB NOTE Instrument BASIC Entering and Editing Programs The easiest way to enter and edit a program is to create it on your computer using your computer s editing features and then download it into the Agilent 8922M S The usual development sequence is 1 Write the program on your computer to control the Agilent 8922M S using the normal 7xx GPIB address 2 Run the program to verify that it controls the Agilent 8922M S correctly 3 Change the Agilent 8922M S s GPIB address in your program to 8xx 4 Download the program into the Agilent 8922M S See Downloading a Program Into the Agilent 8922M S 5 Run the program on the Agilent 8922M S to verify correct operation 6 Copy the program to a memory card for future use PROGram Interface Commands The Agilent 8922M S s IBASIC Controller has a spec
144. are the rear panel power ramp burst type select signals They are connected to the DSP analyzer These signals can be used during power ramp measurements to select the burst type in real time for each burst being operated on When digitally demodulating burst select must be set to Ext to use these signals When making triggered measurements the measurement synchronization burst selection must be set to Ext Each of the four burst type definitions can be selected Requirements Amplitude TTL levels High drive requirement 100 uA Low drive requirement 2 mA System Bus Connector Pin Numbers RP_BURST_T2 RP_BURST_T1 BURST NUMBER SELECTED TTL LOW TTL LOW 0 TTL LOW TTL HIGH 1 TTL HIGH TTL LOW 2 TTL HIGH TTL HIGH 3 See Also Screens Measurement Sync Specifications Timing Diagrams 6 20 RP_DMOD_TRIG RP_GSM_RST_IN RP_GSM_RST_ OUT Connectors Signal Descriptions for SYSTEM BUS Pin 7 Input This is the rear panel trigger signal input for digital demodulation It connects to the DSP analyzer It can also be used for other triggered measurements This signal is active when the digital demodulator s demodulation trigger source is set to Ext Demod or when the measurement synchronization trigger source is set to Ext Demod Requirements Amplitude TTL levels High drive requirements 100 pA Low drive requirements 2 mA Active edge rising edge See Also Screens Power Ramp Phase Freq Data Bits Specifications Ti
145. arity bits cyclic error correction coding and convolutional coding When the SACCH reports coming back to the BS indicate that another cell would offer the mobile a better signal quality a handover is necessary The SACCH doesn t have the bandwidth necessary to transfer all the information associated with the handover The TCH is replaced by a FACCH Fast Associated Control Channel for a short time using short consecutive bursts which have a higher data rate than the SACCH which B 3 Glossary Frame GMSK GSM900 Global Phase Error Guard Bits IMSI MSK PCS1900 PRBS Pulsed RF Power RACH only uses one burst in 26 When the FACCH steals control from the TCH small drop outs in the speech can often be heard A repetitive collection of time slots in a TDMA system Gaussian Filtered Minimum Shift Keying The type of digital modulation used for the GSM system Global System for Mobile Communication GSM900 is the original GSM system using frequencies in the 900 MHz band and is designed for wide area cellular operation An in channel test of modulation quality for GSM transmitters using a constant amplitude envelope when transmitting information Global phase measures the difference between the measured phase trajectory and the ideal phase trajectory These bits provide a buffer between adjacent data packets There are ramp up and ramp down guard bits International Mobile Subscriber Identification
146. armed the Cell Control fields that display information about the uplink will resume normal operation When Demod Arm is re armed measurement results DSP Analyzer Output RF Spectrum Pulse are lost 4 39 12 DRX 13 DTX 14 Echo Delay 15 Execute 16 Limit 17 Loopback 18 MA1 MA2 Screens Cell Control 2 This field turns the discontinuous reception DRX mode of the mobile station on or off This field turns the discontinuous transmission DTX mode of the mobile station on or off This field sets the echo delay when the Speech field is set to Echo mode This field executes the function selected in the TCH Control field This field selects what signaling state a call will be limited to Choices BCCH is the broadcast channel The instrument will not respond to RACHs DCCH is the dedicated control channel The instrument will not assign to a TCH TCH is the traffic channel This is the normal operating mode These fields select the loopback mode for the mobile station When one of these fields is selected the Agilent 8922M S will attempt to put the mobile station in the described loopback mode Choices Off turns loopback mode off No FE turns on loopback with no frame erasure FE turns on loopback with frame erasure This field selects which MA table on the Cell Config screen will be used by the TCH selected when the Mode field is set to Hopped Choices MA1 selects the MA1 table for frequency hopping
147. ase Station Generator OPERATING MODE BASE TATION GSM900 CW GENERATOR f CH GENERATOR CH Generator Channel Anplitude MEASUREMENTS Peak Power Expected Input To Screen HELP TX Level a Burst Type CONFIG Le MHz O dEn Hore This screens allows you to set the Agilent 8922M S up as a CW Signal Generator There are two Base Station fields The Amplitude field sets the amplitude of the Agilent 8922M S transmission The Channel field selects which channel the Agilent 8922M S transmits the Broadcast Control Channel BCCH information If this is changed during a call the call will be deactivated The frequency can also be set explicitly between 10 MHz and 1000 MHz This field defines the expected burst type of the mobile phone s transmitted bursts When the Traffic Channel TCH is selected the correct Colour Code should be chosen This field displays the channel number the Agilent 8922M S is taking measurements from For a GSM900 mobile phone the channel number may vary from 1 through 124 For an E GSM mobile phone the channel number may vary from 0 through 124 and 975 through 1023 If you change the channel number the frequency field value also changes The converse of this is not the case You may enter anon GSM standard channel frequency on another screen between 10 MHz and 1000 MHz 4 35 4 Active Cell TestMode CW Generator 5 TX Lev Screens Cell Control CW Gener
148. ate Results For 11400 Bits 13 CONTROL MS LOOPBACK Burst Delay Chan 16 TH Ley 8 Auto Tineslot WERSLRE MOBILE Bits 11 9 1 4 10 This field changes the RF generator amplitude It is a duplicate of the RF generator s Amplitude field on the RF Generator RF Analyzer screen See Also Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Generator This field selects how bit errors will be displayed Choices BE Count displays the total number of bit errors BE Ratio calculates and displays the ratio of bit errors counted to the total number of bits measured depends on measurement type This field displays the result of the bit error ratio after all the bits have been tested This field allows the user to select the data format for the BER measurements RAND SPEECH this uses random speech frames and enables the mobile to calculate Rx Quality correctly RAND BURSTS this generates random bursts but the mobile is unable to calculate Rx Quality Choices 4 56 5 Intermediate Results 6 Measure Bit Type 7 Mobile Reports 8 Mobile 9 Mode Screens Fast Bit Error This field displays the number of bits that have been tested during a measurement that is currently running This number includes only bits that are tested by the selected measurement type Displays the fixed type of bit error test result The mobile reports reflect the status of the signal the mobile is receiving These are e RX
149. ation Category II and Pollution Degree 2 per IEC 1010 and 644 respectively Before switching on this instrument make sure that the line voltage selector switch is set to the voltage of the power supply and the correct fuse is installed Assure the power supply voltage is in the specified range If this instrument is to be energized via an external auto transformer for voltage reduction make sure that it s common terminal is connected to a neutral earth pole of the power supply If this instrument is not used as specified the protection provided by the equipment could be impaired This instrument must be used in a normal condition in which all means of protection are intact only To avoid potential injury ensure that two people are employed in lifting the instrument from it s packaging and at all other times Before attempting to lift or carry the instrument consider the following basic lifting techniques to help avoid personal injury Using both arms to lift instrument e Reach for the instrument bend your knees and waist and keep your back straight e GRASP the instrument firmly e LIFT with your legs e KEEP your shoulders level 3 29 Verifying Performance Agilent Technologies 8922M S Specifications Reference The accuracy needs for testing GSM radios require the unit to be operated with the Specifications High Stability Reference Option 001 or an external high stability reference Accuracy after warm up
150. ator This field selects the test mode of the Agilent 8922M S The types are Active Cell this mode sets up a call between the mobile phone and the Agilent 8922M S e Test Mode this mode sets the Agilent 8922M S to work with a mobile phone running a test mode This mode allows you to transmit either BCCH only or BCCH and TCH and measures an independent GSM signal e CW Generator this mode sets the Agilent 8922M S as a signal generator This field displays the expected amplitude transmitted by the mobile phone The fields display this information as a power level and as a dBm value The range for the power class is from 0 through 19 If you alter the dBm field the power level shown will not correspond to the channel in amplitude 4 36 1 Adj Cell 2 Amplitude 3 ARFCN 4 Bad Syncs Screens Cell Control 2 Cell Control 2 6 8 aA CELY CONTROL 2 5 Call Status CH Generator Coll Counts BB 4 ff Collert RRiNone Ciphi Pages i Decode Errs RACHs 0 bad gence MMi Inactive SACCH Neos MBD Full Partial Adi Celli BSIC TH Lev R amp Lev Rx Lev RK Ley 2 s 1 Tim Ady RX Qual RX Qual ARFCM 20 BCC 5 Demod Arm TCH Farms Relative MS Audio Crtl MS Chel Timing Err Loopback Mode Saree l DAI ARFCN __ NS Paras Nor iT est Tineslot Type Timing Ady Speech 5 Echo T Echo Delay Coll Status TCH State TX Level S Mode 15 RF Gen ARFCH RF Anl Amel Aprlitude
151. auses only if the operator is required to interact with the UUT or Agilent 8922M S interaction such as changing UUT channels setting squelch changing audio level and so forth cause testing to pause Run Mode Single Step The program stops running at the completion of each test The test system operator is prompted to select Continue to proceed with testing 8 30 Instrument BASIC Programming and Using the TESTS Subsystem To Select Printing Conditions Refer to item 3 in Figure 8 12 on page 8 30 Output Results All All test results are shown on the output device CRT and or printer Printouts include a banner listing the test conditions measured values lower and upper limits and whether the test passed or failed The Comment field is shown at the top along with any identifying information from the Output Heading field Date and time is also output Output Results Failures Test results are shown only when a UUT failure or software error occurs Printouts include a banner listing the test conditions measured values and lower and upper limits of the failed test The Comment field and any identifying information from the Output Heading field is also output To Have Test Results Appear on a CRT or Printer Refer to item 4 in Figure 8 12 on page 8 30 Output Destination Crt Test results are output to the Agilent 8922M S CRT screen only Output Destination Print
152. back the received speech signal to the mobile station The echo delay is the additional delay the Agilent 8922M S inserts before sending back speech to a mobile station PRBS generates a pseudo random bit sequence which is used for making bit error tests When selected a field called PRBS Pattern is displayed refer to PRBS Pattern field description PRBS is selected automatically when Run is selected on the Bit Error Test screen None Uncond and Cond are not featured in the Agilent 8922S 4 7 1 Amplitude Base Station 2 BE Ratio 3 BE Ratio Count 4 Intermediate Results Screens Bit Error Bit Error 3 15 7 15 JIT ERRA BE Betaa J ME kitip E 9 33 0 00 4 eatin SESSNT RSS fee tannin an eee 15 A trela Baul For 15 Th 8 AGELLE Caan ITa Lee ibs AGREE BASE ETATIQH SF LOOP mack Looe Delay Seeech Fras Sac lotucde 5 10 1 11 6 This field changes the RF generator amplitude It is a duplicate of the RF generator s Amplitude field on the RF Generator RF Analyzer screen See Also Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Generator This field selects how bit errors will be displayed Choices BE Count displays the total number of bit errors BE Ratio calculates and displays the ratio of bit errors counted to the total number of bits measured depends on measurement type This field displays the result of the bit error ratio after all the bits have
153. be set to Arm until Hop Mode is set to Hop Do not make measurements with Hop Trig set to Disarm and Hop Mode set to Hop This field is the AGC level DAC value when in Open or Auto AGC mode This value can be entered automatically by choosing Auto AGC Mode It can also be entered by performing a Do Open Cal operation while in Open AGC mode or manually while in Open or Closed AGC Mode During Auto operation the DAC value is based on the RF Analyzer Amplitude setting and will be updated each time RF Analyzer Amplitude is changed See Also Screens RF Analyzer Do Open Cal AGC Mode Range 0 to 255 This field selects the RF input port for the RF Analyzer Choices RF IN OUT AUX RF IN Range RF IN OUT 27 9 to 41 0 dBm AUX RF IN 58 0 to 20 0 dBm 4 114 Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Gen RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Gen 2 1 4 6 3 7 5 8 10 9 Ham Dr fae EA Ms o tacana EN Pren uta TANELI FEA DAC Yolut EIN PE ae 1 Amplitude This is the amplitude entry field The amplitude shown is for the port selected in the RF Output field Range RF IN OUT 127 0 to 7 0 dBm AUX RF OUT 127 0 to 10 0 dBm See Also Chapter 3 Specifications 2 Atten Hold This field prevents attenuator switching when On is selected 3 DAC Value This field allows the DC AM modulation level to be set through the modulation source DAC Range 0 through 255 4 115 4 DC AM 5 Frequency 6 G
154. been set too high This field displays the phase and frequency measurements screen 4 28 13 Pwr Ramp 14 Pwr Zero 15 Reset 16 Scope 17 Spec Anl Option 006 only 18 Mobile Reports 19 TX Level Manual 20 Channel Mobile Screens Cell Control Active Cell This field displays the power mask and option 006 only pulse measurements screens This field zeros the power meter RF power must be disconnected from the RF IN OUT port when executing this function This field resets all the Agilent 8922M S s measurements This field displays the oscilloscope measurements screen This field displays the spectrum analyzer measurements screen The mobile reports reflect the status of the signal being received by the mobile phones receiver This field sets the expected input level of the RF Analyzer on the RF IN OUT port This level must be within 3 dB of the actual level in order that fully calibrated measurements may be made This field displays the amplitude the Agilent 8922M S is expecting from the mobile phone and adjusts its RF analyzer setting to match this input When this field is changed the mobile phone TX Level and the Agilent 8922M S RF Analyzer are no longer coupled together This means that you have independent control of the amplitude of the transmitted mobile phone signal and the sensitivity of the Agilent 8922M S analyzer circuit When the fields are coupled the Expected Input shows the pow
155. been tested This field displays the number of bits that have been tested during a measurement that is currently running This number includes only bits that are tested by the selected measurement type 4 8 5 Bits Measure 6 CRC or FE 7 CRC FE Ratio 8 Count or Ratio 9 Mobile Reports 10 Mode 11 MS Loopback Screens Bit Error This field selects the number of bits which will be tested This number includes only bits that are tested by the selected measurement type These fields determine what data will be displayed Choices CRC displays cyclic redundancy check CRC errors FE displays frame erasures This field displays the result of the CRC or FE ratio after all the bits have been tested This field determines how the frame erasures or cyclic redundancy check CRC errors will be displayed Choices Count displays the number of frame erasures or cyclic redundancy check CRC errors Ratio displays the ratio of frame erasures or cyclic redundancy check CRC errors to total frames The mobile reports reflect the status of the signal the mobile is receiving These are e RX Qual e RX Lev This field selects the mode of Bit Error measurement Choices STD this leaves the display as standard shown above FAST from the cell control screen this sends the display to the Fast Bit Error screen when selecting Bit Error In normal BER mode the loop delay is the total Round Trip Delay RTD of the Agil
156. ccording to the manufacturer s instructions 8 25 TESTS Subsystem File Descriptions Instrument BASIC Programming and Using the TESTS Subsystem Programming and Using the TESTS Subsystem This section describes the concepts and tasks associated with the TESTS subsystem It is intended to help the experienced programmer develop programs or modify existing programs Three types of files are used in the TESTS subsystem to store different types of information Code Files The first aspect of an automated definition is the code itself This is just a standard IBASIC Code file that can reside either on the Memory card on an external disk drive connected to the GPIB port of the Agilent 8922M S or in an internal RAM disk The name of this file is preceded by a lower case c This tells the TESTS subsystem that this particular file contains program code Library Files A Library indicates all of the available test subroutines in the code the set of all parameters that might be entered using the user interface screens and all specifications that might be used by the subroutines in the code to decide if a test point passes or fails Only one Library is defined for each Code file The name of this file is preceded by a lower case I telling the TESTS system that this is a Library file Also both the Library and Code file should have the same base name to indicate the relationship between them A Library is required if you
157. ce 2 Press SHIFT REF SET The current reference value with the word Reference below it is displayed If you want the current measurement result to be the reference press ENTER and skip the next two steps 3 Enter the value you want the Reference to be 4 Press a units key to set the Reference Or press or the knob to default to the units currently displayed When a measurement is displayed REF or R will be displayed below it To Turn a Reference Off or On When a reference is turned off its value is stored but not applied to the measurement A Reference can be turned off or turned back on using the ON OFF key Press CHED CERTO REF SET Press OWOFF The REF or R annunciator will be dimly displayed when the Reference is on When you turn the Reference off the absolute measurement value will be displayed with no annunciator This key is used to clear a global G1 G2 G3 or local L1 L2 key See Also Global Keys Local Keys 28 RFG RFA NOTE 29 SAVE 30 TESTS 31 USE MEM 32 YES Keys Function Keys This key is used to access the RF Generator RF Analyzer screen and gain direct control over the internal source and receiver The changes to settings on this screen may affect the operation of the Cell Control screen Pressing PRESET will ensure that the instrument returns to a known state See Also Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer This key is used to save instrument se
158. cept for changing TCH2 to use MA2 Only OSI Control Stack traffic is shown Management stack traffic configuring the Agilent 8922M S is not shown Note that a mobile may piggyback an acknowledgment on a following I frame rather than use the explicit RR frame Some service primitives used are proprietary to the Agilent 8922M S Layer 3 messages are accompanied by the full L3 message in HEX format Messages Monitoring For Protocol Failure And Recovery During Test Monitoring For Protocol Failure And Recovery During Test The Agilent 8922M S provides error reporting for protocol errors These errors may be due to mobile failure base station failure or a faulty user configuration It is wise to query the error messages periodically Particularly errors should be queried prior to call setup after call termination and after a handover When the error Call disconnected PH Error 0x009d or 0x009f is encountered a fatal protocol error has been detected by the Agilent 8922M S and it has reconfigured back to the BCCH Testing may resume from a point at which the mobile is camped When the error Call disconnected PH Error 0x009e or 0x00a0 is encountered a fatal protocol error has been detected which requires cycling power on the Agilent 8922M S 7 12 Instrument BASIC 8 1 IBASIC In This Chapter The TESTS Subsystem and IBASIC Instrument BASIC Agilent Technologies 8922M S Instrument BASIC Overview
159. cinsioni 4 33 Cell Control CW Generator oo eee eceeeecceseeeeeeeeesecneeeneesaeeaes 4 35 Cell Control 2 os ssccesasesses leatedes desaesvessseusesasetensndanssasvecdanetanceden otuaces 4 37 COMM SURE 2 ienee ipere arana En E E EEA EEEE pe oe 4 49 CW Measurement eesigi euina aa reee eii 4 54 Fast Bit ETOT ssshssi ccsabessestenteeas svasseadsseusCsvsseveasecanhSesnscanscbadensonsesuaces 4 56 VO Contis uration s6s act cata anean a REE RSE 4 59 LOZ OIDE neono o E E EOR RSS 4 63 Measurement SYNC 00 eeseseeeseeeconecoesscesecnees serene ssesseessesssesseees 4 64 IMGSSA BC cis cased sss ibaa resis Hndances Eense EEEE R 4 69 MS Information Signaling eee eee eeeeceseeeeeeseeeseceeeaeenneeaes 4 70 Oscilloscope Main Controls 0 0 ce eeeesceseeseseeeeceseeeeesaeeeeeeeesaes 4 75 Oscilloscope Trigger Controls 2 0 0 0 eeeeeeesceeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeseeeaeesaes 4 77 Oscilloscope Marker Controls ceseesceeseceeseceeeeceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeee 4 80 Output RF Spectrum Main View Option 006 Only 0 0 4 82 Output RF Spectrum Trace View Option 006 Only 4 84 Phase and Frequency Error Multiburst OFF eee 4 86 Phase and Frequency Error Multi burst ON eee 4 88 Phase Freq Phase Bir iss chcc5sisesiacceitiesisdes tes seatceaneasbcesebesteievscnsstiloes 4 91 Phase Freq Data Bits cceecesccceseecsseeenceceeeeeneceseeeaeceaeeceeeenaeeees 4 93 Pwr Ramp Rise Edge oo eee eeeceeeseessceseeseceeseeneeeereesene
160. cted Input area of the screen 5 see Figure 2 2 on page 2 6 automatically adjusts to the nominal value defined by the TX Level field This allows the RF analyzer in the Agilent 8922M S to align itself with the mobile phone s expected output amplitude If the signal is not within 3 dB of the expected amplitude it is necessary to modify the Amplitude field so that it is within 3 dB Directly entering a value in the Amplitude field does not change the transmitted level code transmitted to the mobile phone 2 7 NOTE Making Measurements ACTIVE CELL There may be many reasons for the measured level not being close to the expected level The two most likely are that either the mobile phone is not operating correctly or there is some power loss between the Agilent 8922M S RF IN OUT connector and the mobile phone If you suspect it is the second case you can compensate the Agilent 8922M S generator settings and measurement results for external losses or gains The compensation is carried out in the CONFIGURE screen which is accessed using the CONFIG field on the bottom right hand side of the screen 6 see Figure 2 2 on page 2 6 Refer to Chapter 4 Screens for further information Timeslot To change the timeslot highlight the field and enter a new timeslot value from the keypad The timeslots can vary from 2 to 6 Timeslots 0 1 and 7 are reserved for maintaining communication between the Agilent 8922M S and the mobile phone While
161. cted the printout automatically starts at the beginning of a new page The default setting is No This field allows you to select whether or not to have a form feed at the end of the printout The default setting is Yes 4 59 5 Form Feed 6 HP IB Adrs 7 IBASIC Echo 8 Inst Echo 9 Line Feed 10 Lines Page 11 Mode 12 Model Screens 1 0 Configuration This field allows you to select a form feed This field is independent of FF at Start and FF at End This is the GPIB address entry field It represents the address of the instrument Range 0 to 30 This field turns IBASIC echo on or off When IBASIC Echo is on non graphic characters printed to the Agilent 8922M S display during a Print to Screen operation will also be printed to a PC terminal This field turns instrument echo on or off When Inst Echo is set to on IBASIC commands entered into the Agilent 8922M S through a computer or ASCII RS 232 terminal will appear on both the Agilent 8922M S screen and the terminal This field allows you to select individual line feeds This field allows you to select the number of lines to be printed on each page The default setting is 60 Range 20 through 120 This field selects the remote GPIB operation mode Choices Talk amp Lstn sets the instrument to normal GPIB operation Control turns the instrument into the GPIB controller This field allows you to select which printer is connected The default set
162. ction from wrongful use 4 Routine operator maintenance and cleaning as specified in the Agilent Technologies Operating and Service Manuals 5 Consumables such as paper disks magnetic tapes ribbons inks pens gases solvents lamps filters fuses seals etc Certification Agilent Technologies certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Agilent Technologies further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Bureau of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by the Bureau s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Agilent Technologies products For any assistance contact your local Agilent Sales and Service Office For a list of contact information see Sales and Service Offices on page ix Notices Notices The material contained in this document is subject to change without notice AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Agilent Technologies inc shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or
163. cy measurement section can be revealed if you select 3 2 15 Making Measurements Measurements These are e PHASE ERR this displays the phase error graphically The phase error trace is displayed using an autoscaling phase error axis versus data bits numbered 0 through 147 e DATA BITS this screen allows you display a screen which details the values of the 148 bits in the timeslot including midamble If a known test signal is being used the reception of these bits can be verified Power Ramp Mask To avoid unwanted interference and to ensure successful reception at the Base Measurements Station the mobile phone s transmitted signal must conform to GSM standards The purpose of the power ramp is to display the pulsed signal and verify that it conforms to these standards Method Selecting PWR RAMP on the cell control screen gives you access to the power ramp measurement screens The marker 1 see Figure 2 8 on page 2 16 can be used to make a measurement at a discrete point in time along the signal trace The amplitude at this point is displayed in the top left hand corner of the screen AMPLITUDE RISING EDGE Harter Figure 2 8 Power Ramp Measurements 2 16 Measurement Summary Making Measurements Measurements The power ramp measurements are divided into three screens where you can view different parts of the signal and one screen which displays a series of amplitude values at various ti
164. d Preparing the Agilent 8922M S to Receive Programs 1 Configure the GPIB port as described in this chapter GPIB Configuration For Programming on page 8 5 2 Access the IBASIC Controller screen Downloading A Program Into the Agilent 8922M S This procedure assumes your Agilent 8922M S s GPIB address is 14 If it is not change the address in the following procedure to match your instrument s address 1 Load the IBASIC program to be downloaded into your controller 2 Enter these commands to transfer the program to the Agilent 8922M S 10 DIM LINE 200 FILE_NAMES 120 20 Addr 714 30 INPUT NAME OF ASCII IBASIC FILE TO DOWN LOAD FILE_NAME 40 ASSIGN FILE TO FILE_NAMES FORMAT ON 50 ON END FILE GOTO DONE 60 OUTPUT Addr PROG DEL 70 OUTPUT Addr PROG DEF 0 80 WHILE 1 90 ENTER FILE LINES 100 OUTPUT Addr LINES 110 END WHILE 120 DONE 130 OUTPUT Addr END 140 PRINT Done with down load E 150 ND Download Program for Computers using GPIB To verify that your code was downloaded type in the command OUTPUT 714 PROG EXEC LIST Your program should be listed on the Agilent 8922M S s IBASIC Controller screen Using a Terminal Instrument BASIC Entering and Editing Programs Line by line Entry and Editing Program lines in the Agilent 8922M S s RAM can be entered and edited one line at a time from your computer using the PROG command OUT
165. d If you are using the RF Generator outside the normal GSM or DCS bands make sure you set a valid GSM or DCS frequency in the CW frequency before entering a hopping mode This includes the ACTIVE CELL ACTIVATED state on the CELL CONFIG 2 screen on the Agilent 8922M S When using RF Rise triggering it is recommended to set MS_Parms Timing Advance to MANUAL with the Timing Advance set to zero If AUTO timing advance is used with RF Rise triggering the Agilent 8922M S operating as a base station will progressively command the mobile to advance timing until it is at the maximum value of 64 It is difficult to recover from this state without ending the call with the mobile Changing back to EXT_DEMOD triggering will cause the call to drop This is because the Agilent 8922M S is listening for the mobile 64 bits later than the RF Rise triggering left it When making measurements over the GPIB it is often necessary to place time out constraints in software to account for mobile failure When a time out is encountered while a measurement is armed but not complete it is necessary to perform a CLEAR operation on the GPIB A RESET operation is insufficient Example ASSIGN gpib TO 714 OUTPUT gpib TRIGger ASTate ARM ON TIMEOUT 7 5 GOTO Flagi OUTPUT gpib MEASure DSP PHASe FREQuency ENTER gpib The_answer PRINT FREQUENCY The_answer OFF TIMEOUT 7 GOTO Flag2 Flagl1 OFF TIMEOUT 7 CLEAR gpib PRINT T
166. d In and Speech In are not featured in the Agilent 8922S 4 77 2 Auto Norm 3 Controls 4 Cont Single 5 Level div 6 Marker 7 Meas Reset 8 Pre Trig 9 Pos Neg Screens Oscilloscope Trigger Controls Auto automatically triggers a sweep if a triggering signal is not detected within 50 ms of the end of the previous sweep in Cont triggering mode Norm requires a specific triggering signal before triggering can occur This field selects the set of oscilloscope controls Choices Main Trigger Marker This field specifies how measurements are armed to accept a trigger If Cont is selected the oscilloscope is continuously armed to accept a sweep trigger If Single is selected the oscilloscope is armed each time Reset is selected This field sets the trigger level when the Scope Lv1 is the trigger source The trigger level is indicated by small pointers that appear on each side of the graticule The units are vertical divisions This field displays the signal level at the current marker position The units of measure for this field are determined by the AF Anl In selection See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG Units Selecting Meas Reset will erase any accumulated measurements used for calculating a final result and re start the measurement process for the following functions e HILIMIT e LOLIMIT e AVG See Also Keys HI LIMIT LO LIMIT AVG This field specifies the number of ho
167. d the digital demodulation of the signal or the delay between the trigger event and the beginning of a measurement B 5 Glossary Index A ABORTS A 8 from the Agilent 8922M A 8 sending to HP Agilent 37900D A 8 absolute radio frequency channel number 4 17 4 18 4 23 4 24 4 37 4 64 ac coupling AF generator 4 111 AC Level Audio 4 4 Activated Cell Configuration 4 16 4 22 active cell single hop 4 32 address external disk 4 59 Adj Cell Cell Control 4 37 adjacent cell 4 37 AF analyzer input 4 4 4 75 4 77 4 80 AF Anl In Audio 4 4 AF Freq Audio 4 4 AF Frequency measurement selection 4 4 AF generator 4 111 AGC RF analyzer 4 112 AGC Mode RF Analyzer 4 112 AIFS 4 10 4 14 AM Mod Audio 4 4 4 75 4 77 4 80 Ampl1 12 Pwr Ramp Summary 4 101 Amplitude AF Generator 4 111 bit error ratio 4 5 Bit Error Test 4 8 4 12 4 17 4 23 4 37 CW Meas 4 54 Output RF Spectrum Main View 4 82 Output RF Spectrum Trace View 4 84 Phase Freq Main 4 86 Phase Freq Multi burst 4 88 Pulse 4 104 Pulse Fall 4 109 Pulse Rise 4 107 Pwr Ramp Fall Edge 4 99 Pwr Ramp Rise Edge 4 95 Pwr Ramp Summary 4 101 Pwr Ramp Top 2 dB 4 97 RF Analyzer 4 113 RF Generator 4 115 Spectrum Analyzer RF Gen Controls 4 124 amplitude negative peak 4 102 positive peak 4 102 RF generator 4 12 4 17 4 23 4 37 analog meter 5 6 AnqAck 8 6 ANSI Terminal Configuring 8 6 ARFCN 4 18 4 24
168. e 2449020 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2449023 RR gt DL DL_UNIT_DATA FACCH_F RR Physical Information 06 2d 00 Frame 2449030 DL gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2449031 DL gt PH PH_DATA FACCH_F UI PO CR1 SAPIO MO RR Physical Information Frame 2449031 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2449032 PH gt DL PH_DATA FACCH_F SABM P1 CRO SAPIO MO Frame 2449038 DL gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2449038 DL gt RR DL_ESTABLISH FACCH_F Frame 2449038 DL gt PH PH_DATA FACCH_F UA F1 CRO SAPIO MO Frame 2449038 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2449040 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND SACCH Frame 2449054 DL gt PH PH_DATA SACCH UI PO CR1 SAPIO MO Frame 2449054 RR gt DL DL_UNIT_DATA SACCH_TF RR System Information Type 5 06 1d 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 08 00 00 Frame 2449058 PH gt DL PH_DATA FACCH_FINr0 Ns0 PO CRO SAPIO MO RR Handover Complete Frame 2449068 DL gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2449068 DL gt RR DL_DATA FACCH_F RR Handover Complete 06 2c 00 Frame 2449068 DL gt PH PH_DATA FACCH_F RR Nr1 PFO CRO SAPIO MO Frame 2449068 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2449075 RR gt MM RR_SYNC Frame 2449089 MM gt CC MM_SYNC Frame 2449089 A 21 Call termination APPENDIX A Protocol Log of a Typical Call Inter cell handover complete HST gt CC CC_DISC Frame 2449729 CC gt MM MM_DATA CC Disconnect 03 25 02 e0 90 Frame 2449729 MM gt RR RR_DATA CC Disconnect 03 25 02 e0 90 Frame 2449729 RR gt D
169. e Agilent 8922 Instructions on how to use this are detailed in the Agilent 8922M S GSM Test Set User s Guide Agilent 8922M S GSM Test Set Programming Reference Guide This guide describes in detail each of the GPIB command sets for the Agilent 8922M S Agilent 8922 Multi Band Test System User s Guide This is a supplementary user s guide that describes the additional features found with the Multi Band test system The test system is used for testing and making measurements of dual band mobiles 1 The user s guide is only available with the HP 8922M S Option 010 xi Typeface Conventions Typeface Conventions Italics Display Soft keys Soft keys xii Italic type is used for emphasis Display text is used to show examples fields and prompts that are displayed on the Agilent 8922M S screen Keycaps on the Agilent 8922M S keyboard are enclosed in boxes Display text is used to show examples fields and prompts that are displayed on the Agilent 8922M S screen All software listings in this manual can be identified with this font Installing Your Agilent 8922M S Equipment Supplied CAUTION NOTE Installing Your Agilent 8922M S Using this Chapter Using this Chapter Use the following procedure to get the Agilent Technologies 8922M S powered up correctly After completing this procedure refer to the Quick Start Guide for an introduction to operating the Agilent Technologies 8922M
170. e I_o string 1000 Enter the value 1020 1050 If there is no defined parameter this string will catch the error and return it to the main program 1080 Get the information for the first instrument stored on the configure screen 1090 Initialize the I_o string 1100 Enter the string 1110 Calling_name now holds the string associated with the Calling Name field on the configure screen 1120 Model now holds the string associated with the Model field on the configure screen 1130 Iladdr equals the value in the Addr field on the configure screen 1140 Options now holds the string associated with the Options field on the configure screen 1160 Get the information for the first Specification listed on the Specification system 1170 Initialize the I_o string to null 1180 ENTER the I_o string 1190 1220 If there is no specification defined for this specification number then an Error will appear in the I_o string If this occurs stop the test and return the error to the main program 8 43 Instrument BASIC Programming and Using the TESTS Subsystem 1230 Set the lower limit from the value in the string 1240 Set the upper limit from the value in the string 1250 Set Test to whether Upper Lower Both or None of the specs are to be tested 1260 End of this subroutine 1270 1380 These are the second and third subroutines They are labeled T02 and T03 to correspond with the seco
171. e Speech field in the Cell Control screen will automatically be set to PRBS Digital Demod will automatically be armed if it was disarmed Stop discontinues the bit error test in progress Single allows one test to be performed Cont allows testing to automatically repeat 4 14 24 MS Loopback 23 Bits Tested Completed Screens Bit Error 2 This field is used to enter or display amount of delay expressed in number of speech frames before bits are compared The Agilent 8922 uses this value to synchronize to the correct received PRBS speech frame The correct number of speech frames can be determined automatically by making a Bit Error Test using Auto Mode when the bit error ratio is approximately lt 20 Then if faster measurements are desired or if the bit error ratio exceeds 20 change the mode to manual See Also Screens Bit Error Test Manual Auto This field displays the number of bits that were tested during the last fully completed test Bit error tests may extend beyond the number entered in the Bits To Test field so that the last speech frame may be completed 4 15 Screens Cell Configuration GSM 900 Cell Configuration GSM 900 Activated When Activated is displayed the Agilent 8922M S is operating as a base station simulator and calls can be attempted Most settings affecting cell configuration are not settable cannot be changed while Activated Choices Activated means that most of
172. e desired position in the array 0 does not select an ARFCN from the CA table 1 selects an ARFCN from the CA table This field is a 16 element Boolean array that defines which cell allocation absolute radio frequency channel numbers CA ARFCNSs will be in mobile allocation number 2 MA2 Choices Done exits the choices menu Position moves the cursor to the desired position in the array 0 does not select an ARFCN from the CA table 1 selects an ARFCN from the CA table 4 25 12 MAIOL 13 MAIO2 14 MCC 15 MNC 16 NCC 17 Settable Screens Cell Configuration E GSM DCS 1800 PCS 1900 This field is the integer mobile allocation index offset 1 MAIO1 It offsets the cyclic hop sequence by the specified number of TDMA frames Range 0 through 15 This field is the integer mobile allocation index offset 2 MAIO2 It offsets the cyclic hop sequence by the specified number of TDMA frames Range O through 15 This field is the mobile country code MCC portion of the location area identity LAD Range 0 through 999 This field is the mobile network code MNC portion of the location area identity LAD Range 0 through 99 This field sets the NCC PLMN Color Code portion of the base station identity code BSIC for the serving cell Range O through 7 This field when Settable is displayed indicates that all Cell Configuration settings can be set or modified When the Agilent 8922M S Cell Configuration
173. e screen See Also Screens Configure Specifications REF IN 7 Parallel Port 8 PCN Interface Connectors Rear Panel Connectors of the Agilent Technologies 8922M S This port is used with printers requiring a parallel interface when printing Use address 15 when sending data to this port from IBASIC Programs Pin assignments are as follows 25 14 nStrobe Data 1 Least Significant Bit Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 Data Most Significant Bit nAck Busy PError Select nAutoFd nFault nInit nSelectIn Signal Ground nStrobe Signal Ground Data and Data 2 Signal Ground Data 3 and Data 4 Signal Ground Data 5 and Data 6 Signal Ground Data 7 and Data 8 Signa Ground Busy and nFault Signal Ground PError Select and nAck Signal Ground nAutoFd nSelectIn and nInit CANA NKR WN NNNNNN KP ERP eee ee ee ONRWNrRSw AAA UN KWNHE S This connector is used in conjunction with the HP Agilent 83220A and HP Agilent 83220E DCS PCS Test Sets Refer to either the HP Agilent 83220A or HP Agilent 83220E User s Guides for further information 9 Protocol Interface 10 REF IN 11 SCOPE Connectors Rear Panel Connectors of the Agilent Technologies 8922M S This port is only available if Option 003 is fitted It allows protocol messages to be sent to an external protocol logger Refer to Appendix A for more information The timebase reference input is a BNC connector It is connec
174. eased so the trace position does not appear to change Enter a negative value to indicate a loss such as cable loss The Spectrum Analyzer Marker Level Lv1 measurements are automatically increased The Spectrum Analyzer Ref Level is automatically increased so the trace position does not appear to change See Also RF Level Offset 4 49 2 Aux RF Out NOTE 3 Beeper 4 Compatible 5 Date 6 Firmware 7 Intensity Screens Configure This field is only used when the RF Level Offset field is set to On This field is used to indicate losses or gains between the AUX RF OUT port and the device under test e Enter a positive value to indicate a gain such as an amplifier gain The RF Generator level is automatically set to that amount below that which is indicated in the RF Generator s Amplitude field Example if this value is 10 dB and the Amplitude field shows 0 dBm the actual level out this port is 10 dBm The value at the output of the external amplifier should then be at the level indicated in the Amplitude field e Enter a negative value to indicate a loss such as cable loss The RF Generator level is automatically set above to that amount which is indicated in the RF Generator s Amplitude field to compensate The value at the opposite end of the cable loss should then be at the level indicated in the Amplitude field unless the resulting RF Generator setting exceeds the maximum output level then
175. easurements in the Agilent 8922M S This is useful for single triggered measurements Set AF Anl In 3 to change the source of the signal being directed to the Audio Analyzer Input Refer to Screens Chapter 4 for further information 2 26 Audio Figure 2 14 Making Measurements Measurements The audio function measures the audio frequency and voltage of the demodulated signal from the mobile phone or from a number of other sources selectable using AF Anl In 5 see Figure 2 14 on page 2 27 Select AUDIO in the cell control screen to gain access to the audio function of the Agilent 8922M S The measurements of the audio voltage and frequency commence within a short time of the screen being accessed The ac voltage 1 and the audio frequency 2 are the two main measurements made in this screen Additional measurements such as DC Level can be made by selecting the AF Freq field 2 The audio frequency generator 3 is used to generate an audio signal from dc up to 25 kHz The AF analyzer fields sets the conditions for measuring the audio signal 4 AUDIO VOLTRETERS AL Level pe 0 02106 GERERATORS Audija Til Frequency kHz Awplitude P AY Chunling Audio Measurements 2 27 CW Measurement Figure 2 15 Making Measurements Measurements The CW Measurement screen displays the carrier frequency and power of a continuous non pulsed signal The CW Power measurement offers a greater dynamic range tha
176. ebases locked together to assure that the frequency offsets for the spurious measurements are accurate Equipment Required excluding Agilent 8922M S HP Agilent 8116APulse Generator Theory of the Test The HP Agilent 8116A pulse generator drives the pulse input of the UUT and causes it to generate pulsed RF signals These signals are detected with the negative diode detector and analyzed with the oscilloscope The UUT is set to generate two different on off ratios 30 dB and 80 to 90 dB Rise time and fall time for each of these is measured When the Agilent 8922S is the UUT the RF Generator is set to generate a pulsed GMSK signal This signal is then analyzed with the UUT detector and oscilloscope Things To Check In Case Of Problems e The oscilloscope is used to automatically measure rise and fall times If the RF signal has high video feedthrough it may cause the oscilloscope to make a faulty reading by triggering on the video feedthrough instead of the actual pulse e A diode detector with a greatly different sensitivity may cause the demodulated waveform to overrange on the oscilloscope or have reduced accuracy because of the resolution of the oscilloscope Test 04 Signal Generator 0 3 GMSK Modulation Test 05 Audio Frequency Generator Verifying Performance Understanding the Tests Equipment Required excluding Agilent 8922S HP Agilent 8904A Option 001 002 Multifunction Synthesizer Theory of the Test The HP Agile
177. ech Gain 34 d Limit Coll Status Paging TCH State Node Single RF Gen 35 icH Control ARFCN 30 Anplitude T n Timeslot 4 dbn GE 39 40 41 This field sets the amplification of the Cond speech mode This field is not featured in the Agilent 8922S This field selects traffic channel control type Choices TCH1 HO selects an intercell handover based on the TCH1 parameter selections TCH2 HO selects an intercell handover based on the TCH2 parameter selections TCH1 Asgn selects a traffic channel assignment based on the TCH1 parameter selections TCH2 Asgn selects a traffic channel assignment based on the TCH2 parameter selections This field selects which traffic channel parameter settings to display Choices TCH 1 displays traffic channel 1 settings TCH 2 displays traffic channel 2 settings This field tells the mobile station to select the Test of acoustic devices and A D and D A mode This is done over the digital audio interface DAI 4 47 38 Timeslot 39 Timing Advance mode 40 Timing Advance number 41 TX Level 42 Type Screens Cell Control 2 This field selects the timeslot for the traffic channel selected in the TCH Parms field Range 2 through 6 This field selects the timing advance mode Choices Manual allows manual setting of the MS timing advance When Manual is selected the mobile station s timing advance can be changed by enter
178. ect Switch The SRAM memory card s write protect switch lets you secure its contents from being accidentally overwritten or erased The switch has two positions as illustrated in Figure 8 8 on page 8 23 e Read write The memory card contents can be changed or erased and new files may written on the card e Read only The memory card contents can be read by the Agilent 8922M S but cannot be changed or erased Read write setting Read only setting Setting the SRAM Write Protect Switch Backing Up the Memory Card Programs SRAM memory cards contain a battery to preserve its contents when the Agilent 8922M S is turned off or when the card is removed Memory card contents may be backed up using the following procedure Procedure for Backing Up a Memory Card The program COPY_PL on Agilent 8922M S ROM backs up Test Procedure and Test Library files onto a SRAM memory card The program COPY_PL also lets you to initialize the SRAM memory card Code files should reside on OTP memory cards an external device programmer is required to download code files into an OTP memory card 8 23 NOTE Instrument BASIC Memory Cards Test Procedure files are identified in the IBASIC screen when a catalog CAT is 6699 done A lowercase p is prefixed to a Test Procedure filename Test Library filenames are prefixed with a lowercase 1 1 2 Press the front panel key Select the program COPY_PL from ROM
179. ector provides a higher sensitivity and lower maximum power connection from the DUT It is not normally used for transceiver testing but is a useful input to the Spectrum Analyzer option 006 AUX RE IN has its own input level setting RF analyzer amplitude separate from RF IN OUT It is reverse power protected This connector is selected when the RF analyzer s RF input is set to AUX RF IN See Also Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Analyzer The auxiliary RF output connects to the output section from the RF generator s step attenuators if selected This connector provides higher output levels to a device under test DUT It is not normally used for transceiver testing This connector has its own output amplitude setting RF generator amplitude separate from RF IN OUT It is reverse power protected This connector is selected when the RF generator s RF output is set to AUX RF OUT See Also Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Gen 6 2 3 CLOCK DEMODULATION OUT Agilent 8922M Only 4 CLOCK MODULATION Agilent 8922M Only NOTE Connectors Front Panel Connectors of the Agilent Technologies 8922M S The clock connector is connected to the power ramp s digital demodulation clock output This signal is the digital demodulation CLOCK signal which is generated when digitally demodulating one out of eight timeslots of GSM 0 3 GMSK modulation CLOCK DEMODULATION OUT is only active when the digital dem
180. ed in the performance test print out Because of the specialized nature of the Agilent 8922M S and the equipment required to support it it is recommended that calibration and repair be performed only by specially equipped Agilent Technologies service centers A list of specifications is found at the end of this chapter Getting the Right Test Equipment Installing and Operating the Software Verifying Performance Setting up the Tests Setting up the Tests This chapter contains the following information Required Test Equipment lists the test equipment needed for the performance tests This is the only equipment supported by the Agilent 8922 Performance Test Software and is required to verify instrument operation Equipment substitutions or manual performance tests are not recommended or supported by Agilent Technologies Performance Test Software describes how to install and operate the Agilent 8922 Performance Tests software Verifying Performance Getting the Right Equipment Getting the Right Equipment The following equipment is required to do all of the performance tests The test descriptions have an equipment list that specifies the equipment used for each particular test Equipment HP Agilent Model Number Measuring Receiver Sensor Module Audio Analyzer Voltmeter Signal Generator Multifunction Synthesizer Pulse Generator Spectrum Analyzer Technical Computer with Rocky Mountain BASIC and DS
181. ed to the ac power mains through a grounded power cable with the ground wire firmly connected to an electrical ground safety ground at the power outlet Any interruption of the protective grounding conductor or disconnection of the protective earth terminal will cause a potential shock hazard that could result in personal injury FUSES Only fuses with the required rated current voltage and specified type normal blow time delay etc should be used Do not use repaired fuses or short circuited fuse holders To do so could cause a shock or fire hazard vi Safety Information DO NOT OPERATE IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gases or fumes DO NOT REMOVE THE INSTRUMENT COVER Operating personnel must not remove instrument covers Component replacement and internal adjustments must be made only by qualified service personnel Instruments that appear damaged or defective should be made inoperative and secured against unintended operation until they can be repaired by qualified service personnel WARNING The WARNING sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in personal injury Do not proceed beyond a WARNING sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Caution The CAUTION sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to an operating procedure or the like which
182. ell Control screen the first screen that appears after power up or after selecting Rotate the cursor control knob refer to a see Figure 1 3 on page 1 6 until you are on the CONFIG field e Selecting the CONFIG field by pushing the cursor control knob diagram b see Figure 1 3 on page 1 6 CONFIGURE Radio Tyre Reference Intensity RF Level 10 HHz ME oii E Onf Compatible EH RF In Out Offset 5 0 PPn Aux RFOut 0 0 RFGen Volts SO ahnen Aux RF In er E Ranae Hold HH MM i Statet uto a Mens tne REF OUT Firmware o 20000 MeasReset 04712795 ol M000 L ooooll o oooog l E O Figure 1 3 Access CONFIG Screen 1 6 Installing Your Agilent 8922M S Installation Overview 4 To guarantee the correct operation of the Agilent 8922M S with all mobile phones you should use a high stability timebase This step details how to configure the Agilent 8922M S for use with either the option 001 high stability timebase or an external reference signal A Ifyou have option 001 installed and wish to use this as your reference ensure that the OPT 001 REF OUT field in the Configure screen is set to On Access the Reference field in the Configure screen and select 10 MHz B If you wish to use an external reference signal set the Reference field to 1 2 5 10 or 1
183. en Amplitude field on the RF Generator RF Analyzer screen See Also Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Generator This field sets the absolute RF channel number for the serving cell Broadcast Channel 4 23 4 Aux BCCH NOTE NOTE 6 BCC Screens Cell Configuration E GSM DCS 1800 PCS 1900 This field allows selection of data and clock outputs This is not featured in the Agilent 8922S Choices Off causes the front panel MODULATION IN OUT DATA and CLOCK connectors to be inputs Adjacent causes data and clock signals to be output on the front panel MODULATION IN OUT DATA and CLOCK connectors These signals can be connected to a 0 3 GMSK generator HP Agilent 8657A B Option 022 A mobile station should be able to camp on to the Aux BCCH The BCC Base Station Colour Code is displayed in this field and has a number plus modulo 4 relationship with Serv Cell BCC The data output includes a midamble which will result in discrete sidebands If random data is desired use an HP Agilent 8904A Option 001 or 002 to generate random data and clock signals to the 0 3 GMSK generator See Also Connectors and Timing Diagrams CLOCK MODULATION Connectors and Timing Diagrams IN OUT DATA MODULATION This field is list defining which ARFCNs are in the base station allocation The serving cell ARFCN does not have to be included in this list This field sets the base station color code portion of the BSIC base station
184. ence 8 32 Test Library files backing up 8 23 Test Parameters 8 34 Test Procedure files backing up 8 23 Index 10 Test Sequence running a 8 15 Test Sequence menu 8 32 Test Specifications 8 33 testing the radio 8 15 testing time how to reduce 8 33 tests for radios 8 32 tests screen keys 5 9 TESTS Subsystem 8 2 Time Configure 4 53 Phase Freq Phase Err 4 91 time stamps A 8 HP Agilent 37900D A 8 Time div Oscilloscope Main Controls 4 76 Timel 12 Pwr Ramp Summary 4 102 Timeslot Cell Control 4 48 Timing Advance Cell Control 4 48 timing error mobile station 4 43 traffic channel control 4 47 transmit pacing setting 4 62 transmitter power 4 48 Trg Timing Phase Freq Data Bits 4 94 Trig Delay Measurement Sync 4 68 Output RF Spectrum Main View 4 83 Output RF Spectrum Trace View 4 85 Phase Freq Data Bits 4 94 Phase Freq Main 4 87 Phase Freq Multi burst 4 90 Phase Freq Phase Err 4 92 Pulse 4 106 Pulse Fall 4 110 Pulse Rise 4 108 Pwr Ramp Fall Edge 4 100 Pwr Ramp Rise Edge 4 96 Pwr Ramp Summary 4 102 Pwr Ramp Top 2 dB 4 98 Trig Qual Measurement Sync 4 68 Trig Source Measurement Sync 4 68 trigger delay DSP Analyzer 4 100 4 102 measurement synchronization 4 68 output RF spectrum 4 85 Phase Freq Data Bits 4 94 pulse fall 4 110 pulse on off ratio 4 106 pulse rise 4 108 Pwr Ramp 4 96 4 98 trigger qualifier measurement synchronization 4 68
185. ens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Analyzer Chapter 3 Specifications These fields display the time and level at the current marker position This field sets the marker position The marker position is settable in units of division div only 4 95 4 Mask NOTE 5 Pk TX Pwr 6 SyncStatus 7 Trig Delay 8 View Screens Pwr Ramp Rise Edge This field turns the amplitude mask on or off In PCS 1900 mode only requires HP Agilent 83220A E this field has three choices Off Narrow or Relax Narrow refers to the old ETSI phase 1 power vs time mask Relax refers to the new ETSI phase 11 power vs time mask where the specifications are relaxed at lower power levels This field displays the average power over the useful bits in the measured burst It is measured from the center of the first useful bit to the center of the last useful bit See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG Units This field displays any errors that occurred while trying to synchronize to the demodulated data During multi burst measurement this field indicates the measurement progress When the measurement is complete the SyncStatus is displayed See Also Making Measurements Solving Problems Messages This field sets the time delay between a valid trigger event and the beginning of a measurement Range 0 to 5000 00 us This field selects alternate views of the measurement Choices Rise Edge Top 2 dB Fall Edge Summary If
186. ent 8922M S and mobile phone expressed in speech frames The correct number of TDMA frames can be determined automatically by making a Bit Error Test using Auto Mode when the bit error ratio is approximately lt 20 Then if faster measurements are desired or if the bit error ratio exceeds 20 change the mode to manual Choices Burst Delay range 0 through 15 Manual Auto See Also Screens Bit Error Test Manual Auto 4 9 12 Res Type Measure 13 Run Stop Control 14 Single Cont Control 15 BE Ratio and CRC FE Ratio Screens Bit Error Residual Type field selects the type of bit error test results to display Res means residual Choices Typela ResTypela TypeIB ResTypeIB Typell ResTypell Typel ResTypel AIFS ResAlIFS Off Run starts a bit error test Stop discontinues the bit error test in progress Single allows one test to be performed Cont allows testing to automatically repeat This field allows you to select between a display showing the percentage of errors select MHz and ppm select W which gives you the errors in parts per million See Also 4 10 Keys ON OFF LO LIMIT HI LIMIT REF SET AVG Units 1 AdjTS Screens Bit Error 2 Bit Error 2 6 9 7 20 19 10 21 Type Intermediate Bits Tested 2640 E 0 00 0 00 Completed eT Completed een 16 8 BE Ratio QM FE Rotio E 82 kotio QB cre 0 00 0 03 4 MS Loopback MOBILE 24 11 Ho i ioe
187. equency is pulled from the string 410 T_it gets either a Y or an N depending on whether this frequency is to be tested 430 If a Prime channel has been specified then Prime gets a value of Y 490 If this frequency is to be tested 500 520 Print out some information on the test about to be performed 530 Run_ts holds the value of the test currently being run 550 Repeat for all Specified Tests 560 Done_t is initialized to not completed 580 Get the Test specifier for the current Test 8 41 Instrument BASIC Programming and Using the TESTS Subsystem 590 Initialize I_o to a null string 600 I_o holds the value of the return string 610 Tst now hold the value of the current test This value is equal to the index of the Test Name in the Test selection list shown on the Test Seqn screen 630 This tests whether this test is to be run for all channels If not the value is still kept around but is made negative This will be used in later tests 650 If the number of the test is indeed negative but the channel is prime then the test is done 670 This calls a subroutine that maps the number of the test with the subroutine that defines this test 680 If there is an error then the program stops and the error is reported 690 Done_t is set to completed 700 End this IF statement 720 If Tst is suppose to be done and has not yet been done then now do it 740 Again This calls a subroutine
188. equired HP Agilent 8657A B Signal Generator HP Agilent 8116A Pulse Generator Theory of the Test The Pulse generator drives the signal generator to generate Pulsed RF signals at various frequencies The UUT demodulates these signals and the internal oscilloscope measures the rise and fall time of the demodulated waveform This test verifies the demodulator rise and fall time specifications Things To Check In Case Of Problems e The oscilloscope measurement functions are used to measure the 10 to 90 rise and fall time If the demodulated waveform has significant video feedthrough or the oscilloscope cannot trigger the measurements properly an incorrect measurement may result Equipment Required HP Agilent 8657A B Signal Generator Theory of the Test The signal generator is used to stimulate the UUT spectrum analyzer at various frequencies At each frequency the spectrum analyzer is tuned to measure its own image and spurious responses The level of the signal generator is set to various levels to determine the spectrum analyzer s log linearity Things To Check In Case Of Problems e The absolute accuracy of the signal generator causes a significant measurement uncertainty in the log linearity measurements A more accurate measurement is to reduce the signal level using a precision attenuator This is an acceptable secondary manual test if the UUT fails the automated test Verifying Performance Understanding Test Failures U
189. er Test results are output to the CRT and printer A printer must be correctly configured in order to get a printout e To configure an RS 232 printer refer to chapter 4 for I O CONFIGURE screen descriptions e To configure a GPIB printer refer to the instructions in the following section titled Configuring External Instruments for GPIB Control To Enter Comments in the Output Heading Field Refer to item 5 in Figure 8 12 on page 8 30 1 Select the Output Heading field An alpha numeric list of characters appears in the lower right corner of the screen 2 Select characters one at a time using the knob in order to compose the comment you want to make Two lines of comments 50 characters in length may be entered 3 Select Done when you are finished 8 31 Figure 8 13 Instrument BASIC Programming and Using the TESTS Subsystem Using Autostart Ensure the Autostart field toggle is set to On see Figure 8 13 on page 8 32 1 this allows the Agilent 8922M S to go straight to the Procedure Menu each time the Agilent 8922M S is switched on providing a Memory Card is inserted in the front panel of the Agilent 8922M S If the Procedure Menu screen does not appear on the Agilent 8922M S display select and load the procedure TESTS Library Program Autostart GSM Off On ure performs full parametric testing Test Execution Conditions On UUT Failur Run Mode Contin S Con nuous Continue St or Output Results
190. er a measurement screen Output RF Spectrum Phase Frequency or Pulse is accessed When Demod Arm is disarmed the Agilent 8922M S cannot display information about the uplink When Demod Arm is re armed the Cell Control fields that display information about the uplink will resume normal operation When Demod Arm is re armed measurement results DSP Analyzer Output RF Spectrum Pulse are lost This field displays the position in time of the of the burst s first useful bit relative to the delayed measurement trigger See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG Units This field displays the number of bit differences detected when comparing the demodulated data bits to the selected synchronization pattern when Sync Mode is set to Midamble This field will display 0 if Sync Mode is set to Amplitude See Also Screens MEAS SYNC This field is used to determine the Agilent 8922M S s method for selecting which ARFCN to measure during a hopping TCH The frequency of the ARFCN selected in this field is displayed in the HopMeasFreq field on the RF Generator RF Analyzer screen Choices Auto causes the Agilent 8922M S to make a measurement on the lowest ARFCN in the hop sequence and display it in the ARFCN field Specific requires that you enter an ARFCN in the field that appears when Specific is chosen Make sure this ARFCN is in an MA table and the CA table see Screens Cell Configuration If the specified ARFCN is not in t
191. er level of the setting When they are independent the Expected Level displays Manual Range GSM900 and E GSM 27 9 to 41 0 dBm The fields in the Mobile Phone area display information about the call See Also Chapter 3 Specifications The channel field allows you to change the channel number of the call either before or during the call If this field is changed when a call is in progress a handover is performed 4 29 21 TX Level Mobile 22 Timeslot Mobile Screens Cell Control Active Cell The TX Level shows the amplitude of the signal to be used by the mobile phone This can be changed either before or during a call Changing the value in this field re couples the mobile phone s output level to the Agilent 8922M S s Expected Input If 0 zero is selected then an error message may appear which recommends using an external attenuator The timeslot field allows you to change the timeslot used for a call within a GSM frame If this field is changed when a call is in progress a handover is performed Range 2 through 6 0 1 and 7 are used for call maintenance 4 30 1 Bad Syncs 2 Burst Type 3 Channel 4 Decode Errs Screens Cell Control Active Cell Cell Control Active Cell 4 cae ae wise madi a ie pci CONNECTE ene ii Le fic i gia This screen displays all the properties of the Active Cell screen plus five extra fields of information This field is a count of bad
192. er to Entering and Editing Programs on page 8 16 to start programming or editing Serial Port Configuration for Programming NOTE Figure 8 1 Instrument BASIC Configuration and Instrument Control Connecting the Serial Port 1 Connect an RJ 11 RS 232 adapter Agilent P N 98642 66508 to the 25 pin RS 232 connector of your terminal or personal computer PC If your PC has a 9 pin RS 232 port use the appropriate adapter and use the table below to verify connections 2 Connect a 4 conductor RJ 11 cable Agilent P N 98642 66505 from the adapter to the Serial Port of the Agilent 8922M S RJ 11 Connectors RJ 11 cables and adapters can be wired differently If you buy a cable or adapter from a supplier other than Agilent verify the connections for the pins indicated in the following table before connecting cables to the instruments Agilent 8922M S Terminal PC Terminal PC RJ 11 Serial Port 25 Pin RS 232 9 Pin RS 232 Pin 2 RX to pin 2 TX or pin3 TX Pin 5 TX to pin3 RX or pin 2 RX Pin 4 GND to pin 7 GND or pin5 GND Reserved oe Transmit m Ground Ree No Connect e Receive Reserved Serial Port Connections Configuring the Agilent 8922M S Configuring Your Terminal or PC j Wn 6 7 8 9 Instrument BASIC Configuration and Instrument Control Access the Agilent 8922M S s I O CONFIGURE screen Set Serial In field to Inst to allow the Ag
193. es Disconnects 7 10 0x0051 0x0058 Ox005f 0x0060 0x0061 0x0062 0x0063 0x0064 0x0065 0x0066 Ox006f 0x007f Ca Ca Ca Invalid call reference valu Incompatible destination Invalid message unspecified Mandatory information element error Message type non existent or not implemented Message not compatible with call state or message type non existent or not implemented Information element non existent or not implemented Invalid information element contents Message not compatible with call state Recovery on timer expiry Protocol error unspecified Interworking unspecified disconnected Host I O Error disconnected Operating System Error disconnected 0x00 Messages Protocol Log Examples Of Typical Calls Protocol Log Examples Of Typical Calls We often have requests for What is a good call supposed to look like In appendix A you will find the complete Common Air Interface protocol log of a typical call It includes Call Setup Intra cell Handover Inter cell Handover Single TCH Hopped TCH and Call Termination The log shown was obtained using a PC Protocol Logger attached to the Protocol Interface Appendix A details how to set up Protocol Logging The sample protocol log of the Common Air Interface was obtained using the LOGGING Pass_Filter set to Service The system parameters used were the Agilent 8922M S power on defaults ex
194. est Executive This section covers e Using the Memory Card Inserting and removing memory cards setting write protection backing up programs and changing memory card batteries e Programming the Agilent 8922M S Using HP Instrument BASIC entering programs downloading programs over GPIB editing programs line by line over the serial port e Automated Radio Testing Connecting radios to the Agilent 8922M S and using the Agilent 8922M S Test Executive to test radios Using Memory Figure 8 7 on page 8 21 illustrates how to insert a memory card into the Agilent Cards 8922M S front panel To remove a memory card simply pull it out Pay attention to memory card orientation as it s inserted otherwise the card will not be seated correctly in the slot The memory card label is marked with an arrow that must be inserted on the same side as the arrow shown on the front panel slot Memory cards may be inserted and removed with the Agilent 8922M S powered on or off 8 20 Instrument BASIC Memory Cards Figure 8 7 Inserting a Memory Card Types of Memory Cards Two types of memory cards may be purchased from Agilent Technologies as shown in Table 1 on page 8 21 e SRAM Static Random Access Memory or e OTP One Time Programmable Table 1 Memory Card Part Numbers Memory Type Part Number 32 kilobytes SRAM Agilent 85700A 128 kilobytes OTP Agilent 85701A 128 kilobytes SRAM Agilent 85702A 256
195. expected enter the value directly into the Amplitude field this overrides the TX Level field above Enter the expected Colour Code of the input signal The Colour Code is a function of the central midamble of the transmitted burst and is needed so that measurements are correctly synchronized to the received burst If the Colour 2 10 NOTE Mobile Phone Receiver Testing Using Test Mode Making Measurements TEST MODE Code is not known it can be determined and corrected from measurements described later Refer to the Advanced Features section mentioned later in this chapter In the Active Cell mode the Colour Code is automatically set Once these have been selected the Agilent 8922M S is ready to measure incoming signals of the type specified The mobile phone should be set up to generate a corresponding test signal to the one expected This will require access to the mobile phone manufacturer s servicing or test modes It is possible to analyze the mobile phone s response to the Agilent 8922M S Broadcast Channel BCH by varying the BCH number and amplitude 4 see Figure 2 3 on page 2 10 TEST MODE provides the Agilent 8922M S with a forced traffic channel TCH generator which can be turned on and off without the need for any signaling or the presence of a mobile phone A forced TCH can be generated on any channel in the GSM Base Station range and is enabled by the On Off toggle field 1 below the Tra
196. f the mobile phone s receiver where a CW signal is needed CELL STATUE COHTRL Bose Station Generator OPERATCHG AIDE BASE STATION Sh CWU GENERATOR memmmem c cerato Cho rra l Ei 1 Far latude RERSUREWEHTS Peck Power EES Exteeted Inbut Channel Teh Level Burgi Tyee Bee onani eT TEH Colour D HEZ aon CW Generator 2 12 Making Measurements Measurements Measurements The measurements available on the Agilent 8922M S can all be accessed from the cell control screen by selecting a measurement field under MEASUREMENTS see Figure 2 5 on page 2 13 and pushing the knob GSM Specific The measurements available are Measurements Peak Carrier Power e Phase and Frequency Error e Power Ramp Mask e Bit Error Rate e Output RF Spectrum modulation or ramping Option 006 only Ancillary You can also use the toolkit capabilities of the Agilent 8922M S These additional Measurements measurements are e Spectrum Analyzer Option 006 only e Scope e Audio Measurements e CW Measurements TELE CALL STATUS OFERATEWG WODE BASE STATIOH CONNECTED Ret Ive TELL Brondeasi in Cha nm l TRAFFIC TE L s IZ 13 dba Final dtude Channel 30 RE Law 23 amp 98 to Br dea Tineslot 4 Re Qual 0 0 25 BER STATUS CONTROL RERSUREMEHTS Pack Power EES FOEILE PRHOHE Channel TH Level Tilaes on Exeected newt TK Level 15 JBR GSM Specific Measurements Ancillary Measurements F
197. ffic Chan or the and keys The presence of both the BCH and forced TCH signals from the Agilent 8922M S allows the mobile phone s receiver to be stimulated with signals identical to those used on a real call These signals can be used in conjunction with the mobile phone manufacturer s service and test modes to help measure and troubleshoot the mobile phone With these features it is possible to make bit error rate measurements and test the mobile phone s receiver sensitivity when there is no call set up Figure 2 4 Making Measurements CW GENERATOR CW GENERATOR To enter this mode select CW GENERATOR as described in the section titled Agilent 8922M S Operating Modes The CW Generator mode has the same measurement capabilities as the Test Mode but replaces the GSM BCH and forced TCH signals with a single unmodulated RF carrier The frequency and amplitude of the Continuous Wave CW signal is controlled by the Channel Amplitude and the Frequency fields 1 When a GSM channel number is entered in the Channel field this automatically updates the generator Frequency field below it If it is necessary to generate a non GSM channel frequency enter a value directly into the frequency field This range varies from 10 MHz through 1000 MHz A direct frequency entry over rides the Channel field above The unmodulated RF signal can be used for any general purpose application and can be particularly useful for checking some aspects o
198. gnal from the serving cell using the Full measurement method Partial RX Lev is the mobile station s level of power from the serving cell using the Partial measurement method Partial RX Qual is the mobile station s received quality of signal from the serving cell using the Partial measurement method Adj Cell RX Lev is the reported level of power of the adjacent cell selected in the Adj Cell field Adj Cell ARFCN is the absolute radio frequency channel number of the adjacent cell selected in the Adj Cell field BSIC NCC reads the NCC PLMN Colour Code portion of the base station identity code BSIC of the adjacent cell selected in the Adj Cell field BSIC BCC reads the BCC Base Station Colour Code portion of the base station identity code BSIC of the adjacent cell selected in the Adj Cell field 4 45 32 Signaling 33 Speech NOTE NOTE Screens Cell Control 2 Choices Normal will cause the call to follow the normal GSM recommended signaling sequences Limited will eliminate normal call signaling and force an immediate transition to the final channel configuration permitted by the Limit field This field selects the speech mode Choices None Uncond unconditioned activates the MODULATION IN AM SPEECH connector on the front panel but the speech signal is not conditioned by filters and no gain control is provided Cond conditioned activates the MODULATION IN AM SPEECH connector on the front panel and conditions s
199. hat the operation of the instrument or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free Limitation of Warranty The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Limitation of Remedies and Liability THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY Responsibilities of the Customer Responsibilities of the Customer The customer shall provide 1 Access to the products during the specified periods of coverage to perform mainte nance 2 Adequate working space around the products for servicing by Agilent Technologies personnel 3 Access to and use of all information and facilities determined necessary by Agilent Technologies to service and or maintain the products In so far as these items may contain proprietary or classified information the customer shall assume full responsibility for safeguarding and prote
200. he MA table no measurement triggers will be generated and the Agilent 8922M S will wait until the measurement is disarmed This field displays the midamble bit pattern of the Burst Type selected for bursts other than user defined bursts 4 66 13 Midamble Start Bit Position Sync Pattern Start Position 14 Single Cont Meas Trig NOTE NOTE 15 Status Use Mem 16 Sync Mode Screens Measurement Sync If Midamble Start Bit Position is displayed the number displayed represents the expected position within the Burst Type you have selected of the first bit of the burst s midamble Example If you have selected Burst Type TSCO the Midamble Start Bit Position will be 61 and you will see this number displayed in this field and in the Midamble field to the right If Sync Pattern Start Position is displayed the number displayed represents the expected position within a User Defined burst of the first bit in a user defined pattern that the DSP Analyzer will try to synchronize to The field labeled Burst Type must be set to User Def for Sync Pattern Start Position to be displayed Single performs one GSM measurement DSP Analyzer Pulse On Off and Output RF Spectrum after Meas Arm is selected and a valid trigger event occurs Cont performs GSM measurements continuously Each time a GSM measurement is performed the measurement screen will be updated with new information Screens that display traces update more slowly
201. he mobile country code MCC portion of the location area identity LAD Range 0 through 999 This field is the mobile network code MNC portion of the location area identity LAD Range 0 through 99 This field sets the NCC PLMN Color Code portion of the base station identity code BSIC for the serving cell Range O through 7 4 20 17 Settable Screens Cell Configuration GSM 900 This field when Settable is displayed indicates that all Cell Configuration settings can be set or modified When the Agilent 8922M S Cell Configuration is changed from Activated to Settable some fields are automatically changed or overwritten Use the following table to locate the fields that might affect your setup Field State Demod Arm State Disarm RF Gen Hop Trig Disarm RF Anl Hop Trig Disarm RF Gen Hop Mode Non Hop RF Analyzer Hop Mode Non Hop 4 21 1 Activated Screens Cell Configuration E GSM DCS 1800 PCS 1900 Cell Configuration E GSM DCS 1800 PCS 1900 7 10 1116 6 8 10H ru Gell cdntrol Ch 7 nee E GSH CELL core ARFCH a 3 Aux BCCH m ul 14 ee MCC MH fa F Gen LAC Lan 15 nelitude 9 dEn To Screen PHA f When Activated is displayed the Agilent 8922M S is operating as a base station simulator and calls can be attempted Most settings affecting cell configuration are not settable cannot be changed while Activated Choices
202. hich appears is the GPIB status of each piece of test equipment that is supported It is only necessary to have the instruments responding that will be used in each particular test Make certain that each instrument you will be using is responding at the proper address Duplicate addresses may make an instrument appear to be responding but this is not allowed Press T for Ignore to continue past this screen The second screen prompts you for the instrument model If you have disk 08922 10006 select HP 8922G for Agilent 8922M performance testing or HP 8922E for Agilent 8922S performance testing The third screen which will appear is the main Performance Tests selection menu Three options are available on this screen e Select the performance test to run remember the test instruments and UUT must be responding over GPIB e Turn the printer function ON or OFF If the printer function is turned on it must be responding over GPIB or the program will lock up e Exit from the program Press the key corresponding to the option that you would like to perform The other screens that appear are connection instructions error messages and output results 3 6 Test 01 Signal Generator Level Verifying Performance Understanding the Tests Understanding the Tests This section describes the theory of each performance test lists the equipment needed for the test and provides some problem solving information Equipment Required
203. hnologies 8922M S 6 2 Rear Panel Connectors of the Agilent Technologies 8922M S 6 10 Signal Descriptions for SYSTEM BUS 00 eee eeeeeeereeeee 6 18 Timing Diagram Sesosok ongia aione Eno Ei 6 27 7 Messages Communication Failures ce eee eceeseeceeseeeeeeeeceecseecaecsaeeaecsaeeaeens 7 2 Piri ware ETOT cce csccecsctvetes Feocusis cance cists cadvassitsosececsotbeaedee sT eai 7 3 YMC SLALUS cs ces tees cetins a EEEE E AEN T EY 7 4 Protocol Error Messages ccecceceseeeeseeeeeceeesseceeesaeceeeeeseeeeseeeeees 7 5 TIMES aasien e a aE chats R Ea EEE E E 7 6 MDISCOMD ECS nei EEEE EAE ETE EEE EEEE 7 8 Protocol Log Examples Of Typical Calls esssseseseeeeeesereerereereees 7 11 Monitoring For Protocol Failure And Recovery During Test 7 12 8 Instrument BASIC Contents 4 Agilent Technologies 8922M S Instrument BASIC Overview 8 2 Configuration and Instrument Control 0 eee eee cee cee eeeeeneeeeees 8 4 Loading Storing and Running 2 0 0 eee cece eeeceseeeeeteeeteeeaeenaes 8 10 Entering and Editing Programs cece eeeecseeeeeeceseeeeeteeeeeeeaeenaes 8 16 Mem ry Cards sds ctscdeccasscsussvovasagsscarssudodused ceseecsstersencdseesnavstosessorenese 8 20 Programming and Using the TESTS Subsystem 0 ee 8 26 Contents A APPENDIX A PODOS erste crs cect ste csescvs eeniveste testa ohsseettechoncetatn A AE A 2 Equipment Required 0 0 cee ceeeececeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesseeaees
204. hting More and selecting LOGGING LOGGEaE No protocol logging messages appear on the Agilent 8922M Logging screen 1 Clear Log 2 Flush Log 3 Log Pause Clear erases the contents of the logging buffers Flush Log transfers messages from partially full buffers to an external Protocol Logger through the Protocol Interface connector rear panel When buffers are full they are automatically flushed Messages continue to be logged in during Flush Log Log will activate accumulation or logging of protocol messages into dual circular logging buffers in the Agilent 8922M Although the messages are delayed the original sequence is maintained Pause will suspend logging APPENDIX A Additional Information 4 Pass Filter The Pass Filter allows you to select only the category of protocol messages you want logged into the Agilent 8922M internal logging buffers Choices e NetwkOnly will pass these messages e peer to peer messages between the network layers signaling layer 3 Network peer to peer messages are only passed out through the interface That is only DL_UNIT_DATA and DL_DATA messages are passed out as they carry the L3 Network peer to peer messages This includes all PTP messages between CC CC MM MM and RR RR e Datalink will pass these messages e peer to peer messages between the network layers e peer to peer messages between the data link layers This includes NetwrkOnly plus Datalink peer
205. ial Program Interface it uses to communicate with other computers over GPIB When sending a command to the Agilent 8922M S from another computer you must use a PROG command to tell the Agilent 8922M S you need it to perform an operation In the following list Addr is the address of the Agilent 8922M S and lt filename gt represents the name of the file you are saving or retrieving For more information on memory cards see the Memory Cards section To initialize a memory card use this command UTPUT Addr PROG EXEC INITIALIZE INTERNAL o change the default Mass Storage device use this command PUT Addr PROG EXEC MSI INTERNAL C save a file to the default Mass Storage device use this command PUT Addr PROG EXEC SAVE lt filename gt C o retrieve a file from the default Mass Storage device use this command o Fe ge geg UTPUT Addr PROG EXEC GET lt filename gt Figure 8 6 Instrument BASIC Entering and Editing Programs Other PROG Commands Two additional PROG Commands are used to prepare the Agilent 8922M S s IBASIC Controller RAM for receiving programs OUTPUT Addr PROG DEL deletes any programs currently residing in RAM OUTPUT Addr PROG DEF 0 defines the address in RAM where a downloaded program will be store
206. identity code for the serving cell Range O through 7 This field is a list defining which ARFCNs are in the cell allocation table It is used to define the ARFCNs used in the TCH hop sequence 4 24 8 Control Ch 9 LAC 10 MA1 11 MA2 Screens Cell Configuration E GSM DCS 1800 PCS 1900 This field selects the control channel organization Choices SD 4 selects a broadcast channel with a BCCH CCCH SDCCH 4 channel organization The broadcast channel will be on the physical channel defined under the Serv Cell ARFCN field timeslot 0 SD 8 selects a broadcast channel with a BCCH CCCH organization The SDCCH 8 control channel is defined by the following 2 fields SDCCH 8 ARFCN SDCCH 8 Timeslot FA fast associated sets the control channel to use stolen FACCH frames on the TCH selected on the Cell Control screen When this choice is made the BCH will have a BCCH CCCH channel organization All call signaling is done on FACCH channels on the TCH SD 4FA selects a BCCH CCCH 4 SDCCH 4 broadcast channel All call signaling is done on FACCH channels on the TCH This field is the location area code LAC portion of the location area identity LAD Range 0 through 65535 This field is a 16 element Boolean array that defines which cell allocation absolute radio frequency channel numbers CA ARFCNs will be in mobile allocation number 1 MA1 Choices Done exits the choices menu Position moves the cursor to th
207. ield in the To Screen list is only present on the Configure screen It allows access to the Service screen This field sets the internal instrument clock 4 53 1 Amplitude Expected Input 2 CW Freq CWFregErr Screens CW Measurement CW Measurement CH MEASUREMENT 2 CW Frea HHz CH Pouer dEn 3 mood 133 2 Nate CH Measurements not valid for pulsed signals Meas Crtl 8 RF Input RE tnt Gate ae IN OUT a Expected Input Chan TR Ley Amplitude Burst This field is the input amplitude to be assumed at the selected RF analyzer input The amplitude shown is for the port selected in the RF Input field Range RF IN OUT 27 9 to 41 0 dBm AUX RF IN 58 0 to 20 0 dBm See Also Screens RF Analyzer RF Generator RF Generator Chapter 3 Specifications This field selects the type of measurement to be made on the signal at the RF input This measurement is valid only for non pulsed signals The input frequency needs to be within 500 kHz of the value set as the Expected Input 4 Choices CW Freq displays the measured frequency CWFregErr displays the measured frequency error relative to the continuous wave frequency set in the RF Analyzer s Frequency field See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG METER Units 4 54 3 CW Power 4 Frequency Expected Input 5 Meas Reset Meas Cntl 6 Pwr Zero Meas Cntl 7 RF Cnt Gate 8 RF Input Sc
208. if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met vii Safety Symbols Safety Symbols The following symbols on the instrument and in the manual indicate precautions which must be taken to maintain safe operation of the instrument Safety Symbols The Instruction Documentation Symbol The product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instructions in the supplied documentation Indicates the field wiring terminal that must be connected to earth ground before operat ing the equipment protects against electrical shock in case of fault Frame or chassis ground terminal typically connects to the equipment s metal frame Alternating current AC Direct current DC Warning risk of electric shock Terminal for Neutral conductor on permanently installed equipment Terminal for Line conductor on permanently installed equipment The CE mark shows that the product complies with all relevant European Legal Direc tives This is a symbol of an Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1 Class A product The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association and indicates compliance to the standards defined by them th PLIE MH Indicates that a laser is fitted The user must refer to
209. ifferent measurements available on the Agilent 8922M S e Advanced Features advanced information for experienced users To help you understand this chapter you may wish to consult the following sources of information e Quick Start Guide This briefly explains the basic operating principles of the Agilent 8922M S including making a call and simple measurements e Typeface Conventions Found at the front matter of this manual This explains how to interpret the different typefaces used in this manual e Field Types Refer to Chapter 4 Screens Explains in detail the different kinds of fields or areas which are displayed on the screens Fields are mainly used for measurement results data entry and access to other screens e Screens Chapter 4 provides more detailed information on each of the fields contained within all of the screens available on the Agilent 8922M S If you have the Agilent 8922M S Option 010 Multi Band Test System refer to the appropriate Agilent 8922 Multi Band User s Guide for more information on making dual band measurements 2 2 Active Cell Test Mode CW Generator Making Measurements Agilent Technologies 8922M S Operating Modes Agilent Technologies 8922M S Operating Modes This section details the procedures necessary to control the Agilent 8922M S and GSM mobile phone in each of the main operating modes It is recommended that you read this section before attempting the Measurements
210. igure 2 10 Making Measurements Measurements The Bit Error Rate measurement allows you to test the sensitivity of the mobile phone s receiver By reducing the signal transmitted by the Agilent 8922M S you can test the ability of the receiver to accurately decode its incoming signal Data bits that are decoded are sent back to the Agilent 8922M S The Agilent 8922M S compares them to original signal that was sent out and the differences are derived from this The audio echo function that works in the Cell Control screen is turned off when making a BER measurement Method To run a bit error rate test select the BIT ERROR field in the cell control screen This reveals the bit error measurement screen This test will run automatically if you set the Single Cont field to CONT To run a test set the Run Stop field to RUN This toggle field start stops the BER test 1 ratio see Figure 2 10 on page 2 19 There are two sets of results displayed e Intermediate Results this is a running total of the bit errors as the bits are being tested 2 this is useful where a large number of bits are being tested e Final Results this shows the completed BER 3 This is displayed after all the bits have been tested EIT ERROR s 0 00 i AH Buol r Le k fo 3 2 BER HOR EE MERIR TE Fa Ley Lt 110 t 109 d amp a nigravdiote Reaulis For abe0 flit 2 TE EIE E J UD BASE STATION AG LOOPERCKE MORILE Rabi btude
211. igure 2 5 Agilent 8922M S Measurements 2 13 Peak Carrier Power Measurement NOTE Figure 2 6 Making Measurements Measurements After making one type of measurement another can be made by simply pressing CELL CNTL and using the knob selecting the next measurement of your choice The peak transmitter carrier power averages the transmitter carrier power for a single burst This average is calculated over the time that the data information bits are transmitted Select the Pwr Zero field disconnect external source and lower BCH power 3 see Figure 2 6 on page 2 14 to zero the power meter before any signal is applied Method The peak transmitter carrier power value is displayed on the cell control screen After you have set up a call Active Cel11 or manually aligned the Agilent 8922M S to the mobile phone Test Mode CW Generator the Peak Power reading is displayed in the center of the screen 1 Below the CALL STATUS area of the cell control screen are reports from the mobile phone These appear only when using Active Cell They indicate the TX Level which the phone is transmitting and the RX Level and RX Quality of the received signal 2 see Figure 2 6 on page 2 14 FELL STATUS _ COWTROL 2 CALL STATUS OPERATING WODE BASE STATIOH gSA ONNECTED ETIVE TE Broedcast On Chanel Ea Tx Las IS 13 da Aaa ituds 1 Channel 30 RE Law 22 09 to ri dea Tineslot 4 Re Qua
212. ijmorat bon cLling Hose Hodel EL pera iL POWER SUPPLY Tesi Penctioan Instrument Configuration Screen Program Structure for TESTS Subsystem Programs Writing programs that take advantage of the TESTS subsystem capabilities requires the programmer to understand how to structure the program to access the TESTS subsystem user interface screens General Organization Here are the steps to a basic algorithm that can be used to execute a number of test subroutines at a number of different frequencies BEGIN SET UP Set up the COM area to hold the global variables REPEAT for all Defined Tests DO SUBROUTINE defined Test UNTIL All Defined Tests Done END SUBROUTINE Defined Test 1 SUBROUTINE2 Defined Test 2 SUBROUTINE3 Defined Test 3 8 37 Instrument BASIC Programming and Using the TESTS Subsystem Program Example The following example IBASIC program uses the basic algorithm shown above and the TESTS subsystem to execute a number of test subroutines at a number of defined test frequencies Also included are examples of how to interact with the user interface to allow a user to access parameters specifications and configuration fields to define a specific set of test requirements An explanation of the program example is given at the end of the listing Program Listing 10 DEMO_1 20 30 THE FIRST LINE MUST CONTAIN THE NAME OF THE LIBRARY 40 50 60 70 THIS PROGRAM IS A DEMO PROGRAM TO
213. ilent 8922M S s IBASIC controller to accept characters from a PC or ASCII terminal Set IBASIC Echo to On Set Inst Echo to On Set the Serial Baud to 4800 Baud can be altered as required by your terminal Set Parity field to None Set Data Length to 8 bits Set Stop Length to bit Set Rev Pace to None 10 Set Xmt Pace to Xon Xoff Configuring an ANSI Terminal 1 2 3 4 5 6 Select ANSI operating mode Set Baud Rate to 4800 if this rate is not available on your terminal set it to a rate that can be selected on the Agilent 8922M S s I O CONFIGURE screen Set Parity to none Set Data Bits to 8 Set AnqAck to no or none Set Receive Transmit Pacing to match the Agilent 8922M S s settings Your terminal may have additional fields available for different configurations but should be able to communicate with the Agilent 8922M S if these settings are made Configuring an IBM Compatible PC With HP AdvanceLink HP AdvanceLink is a popular PC terminal emulator used to emulate a variety of terminals If you are using a different terminal emulator program on a PC configure it using the above settings Instrument BASIC Configuration and Instrument Control j 8 8 Load and run HP AdvanceLink on your PC Set the Global Configuration settings i ana a n ae S Keyboard USASCII Personality HP Language ENGLISH Terminal Mode Alphanumeric Remote To Enter your PC s serial port number Prin
214. imeout Occurred OUTPUT gpib TRIGger ASTate DISARM Flag2 END 2 45 Making Measurements Advanced Features 12 13 Some measurement results may be displayed as due for example to mobile failure The measurement has been armed but has not completed In these circumstances a GPIB query of the measurement will not return a result This event should be catered for by adding a time out to the query and a CLEAR operation as described in paragraph 11 above When changing between screens the DSP results may briefly show a very large number This is expected behavior When controlling the instrument via GPIB some phase and frequency results may consistently return a very large number This is most likely caused by attempting to read result from another DSP screen when measurement triggering is set to Continuous The alternative solutions are either to change to the appropriate DSP screen before reading the result or to use single shot measurement triggering 2 46 Making Measurements Advanced Features 2 47 Verifying Performance Verifying Performance About This Chapter About This Chapter The tests in this chapter verify the electrical performance of the Agilent 8922M S GSM Test Set using the Agilent 8922 Performance Test Software provided with the product If the instrument passes this verification its operation and specifications are assured within the measurement uncertainties provid
215. ine program 8 HELLO WORLD should be displayed on the Agilent 8922M S and the terminal PC s screen NN Ww A After the cable and adapter have been connected and the Agilent 8922M S and terminal or PC have been configured you should be able to type on your terminal s keyboard and talk to the Agilent 8922M S As you type each command the letters appear on the Agilent 8922M S s command lines and the terminal PC screen The letters appear on the terminal PC screen because the Inst Echo field in the I O CONFIGURE screen is set to On When the program is run HELLO WORLD appears on the Agilent 8922M S s display area and on the terminal PC s screen because the IBASIC Echo field in the CONFIGURE screen is On Any non graphic character that is printed to the Agilent 8922M S s display area during a print to screen operation CAT LIST PRINT is also printed to the terminal PC Refer to Entering and Editing Programs on page 8 16 to start programming or editing Loading An IBASIC Program From A Memory Card Loading an IBASIC Program From A GPIB Disk Drive Downloading An IBASIC Program Into the Agilent 8922M S Instrument BASIC Loading Storing and Running Loading Storing and Running This section describes loading storing and running both IBASIC programs and test procedures using the TESTS subsystem 1 Insert the memory card Access the IBASIC Controller screen from the Test Functio
216. ing a number in the Timing Advance number field The mobile station s current timing advance displayed in the SACCH Meas Tim Adv field should match the Timing Advance number Auto automatically calculates and sets MS timing advance This field sets the MS s timing advance Range 0 through 63 This field selects the transmit power level for the mobile station to use If 0 zero is selected then an error message may appear which recommends using an external attenuator Range O through 19 This field selects the traffic channel type for the TCH selected in TCH Parms Choices FS Full rate speech 4 48 1 Aux RF In NOTE 5 16 13 Screens Configure Configure 14 7 3 CONFIGURE Radio Type Reference Intensity RF Level 10 MHz Ed Offset dB 17 Hormal Compatible Calibrate Beeper ager 224 RF In Out Offset aa a aad Eo Date ppn EE ER Aux RFOut YYY MM DD a RFGen Volts o pee Tine Aux RF In Range Hold StatetAuta OPT 001 Screen Meas Crtl REF OUT Freeze Firmware B 07 00 9 11 18 20 6 1 This field is used to indicate losses or gains between the AUX RF IN port and the device under test This field is only used when the RF Level Offset field is set to On Enter a positive value to indicate a gain such as an amplifier The Spectrum Analyzer Marker Level Lv1 measurements are automatically reduced The Spectrum Analyzer Ref Level is automatically decr
217. ing the front panel key Notice that the first line shows the currently selected Procedure The associated Library is listed as well as the location of the code The comment area is simply available to give the user a more complete explanation of this particular Procedure To view all the Procedures available on the selected media simply select the Procedure field A menu will appear in the lower right corner of the screen displaying all the Procedures are available This is not a listing of the full contents of the disk it is only a list of the Procedures that have been stored 8 27 Figure 8 11 TESTS Subsystem User Interface Screens Instrument BASIC Programming and Using the TESTS Subsystem TESTS AA Procedure Location Library Program Autostart 1 GIR ee Des On 2 TE Comment Test Execution Conditions Run Mode On UUT Foilure 5t OF Continuous Sinale Step Continues Qutrut Results Output Destination All Foilures E Crt Printer Quteut Heading Test Function Edit Sean The Main TESTS Subsystem Screen The TESTS subsystem allows the user to easily modify the test subroutines parameters specifications and configuration to correspond to the requirements of a specific Radio There are several user interface screens that allow the user to do this To access any of these screens select the Test Function field at the bottom of the main TESTS screen to display the sc
218. ion area identity LAD Range 0 through 65535 This field is a 64 element Boolean array that defines which cell allocation absolute radio frequency channel numbers CA ARFCNs will be in mobile allocation number 1 MA1 MA1 defines which of the first 64 entries of 1s in the CA will be part of the sequential hop sequence for MA1 Choices Done exits the choices menu Position moves the cursor to the desired position in the array 0 does not select an ARFCN from the CA table 1 selects an ARFCN from the CA table 4 19 11 MA2 12 MAIO1 13 MAIO2 14 MCC 15 MNC 16 NCC Screens Cell Configuration GSM 900 This field is a 64 element Boolean array that defines which cell allocation absolute radio frequency channel numbers CA ARFCNs will be in mobile allocation number 2 MA2 MA2 defines which of the first 64 entries of 1s in the CA will be part of the sequential hop sequence for MA2 Choices Done exits the choices menu Position moves the cursor to the desired position in the array 0 does not select an ARFCN from the CA table 1 selects an ARFCN from the CA table This field is the integer mobile allocation index offset 1 MAIO1 It offsets the cyclic hop sequence by the specified number of TDMA frames Range O through 63 This field is the integer mobile allocation index offset 2 MAIO2 It offsets the cyclic hop sequence by the specified number of TDMA frames Range 0 through 63 This field is t
219. ires HP Agilent 83220A E this field has three choices Off Narrow or Relax Narrow refers to the old ETSI phase power vs time mask Relax refers to the new ETSI phase 11 power vs time mask where the specifications are relaxed at lower power levels This field displays the average power over the useful bits in the measured burst It is measured from the center of the first useful bit to the center of the last useful bit This measurement is only available when using the RF IN OUT port See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG Units This field displays any errors that occurred while trying to synchronize to the demodulated data During multi burst measurement this field indicates the measurement progress When the measurement is complete the SyncStatus is displayed See Also Making Measurements Solving Problems Messages This field sets the time delay between a valid trigger event and the beginning of a measurement Range 0 to 5000 00 us This field selects alternate views of the measurement Choices Rise Edge Top 2 dB Fall Edge Summary If you have option 006 spectrum analyzer installed you will also be offered the following measurement screens e Pulse e Puls Rise e Puls Fall 4 100 NOTE 1 Ampl1 12 2 Amplitude Screens Pwr Ramp Summary Pwr Ramp Summary ge ITUDE Summary Time Amel Pk TX Pur 331 230760 0 00 me i 10 68 Flatness rt Em 3 us i Anp19 0 00 0
220. is changed from Activated to Settable some fields are automatically changed or overwritten Use the following table to locate the fields that might affect your setup Field State Demod Arm State Disarm RF Gen Hop Trig Disarm RF Anl Hop Trig Disarm RF Gen Hop Mode Non Hop RF Analyzer Hop Mode Non Hop 4 26 1 Active Cell TestMode CW Generator 2 Amplitude Base Station 3 Audio Screens Cell Control Active Cell Cell Control Active Cell 3 p STATUS CONTROL CALL STATUS OPERATING MODE BASE STATION CONNECTED Broodcost On _ Channel 1 8 TRAFFIC 2 TH Lev 15 13 dBa Anplitude Channel 30 RR Lev 23 87 to 86 dBn x BER Timeslot 4 R8 Quol O i lt 0 2 B MEASUREMENTS Peak Power 8 14 Channel 20 TH Level Timeslot Expected Input TH Level 15 d n 14 11 19 8 15 7 3 16 This screens allows you to set up a call with the mobile to be tested and gives you access to the measurement screens This field selects the operating mode of the Agilent 8922M S The modes are e Active Cell this mode allows a call between the mobile phone and the Agilent 8922M S e Test Mode this mode sets the Agilent 8922M S to work with a mobile phone running a test mode This mode allows you to transmit either BCCH only or BCCH and TCH and measures an independent GSM signal e CW Generator this mode sets the Agilent 8922M S as a signal generator This field selects what amplitude
221. ish Danish Portuguese Finnish Norwegian Greek Turkish Default GSM This field can be toggled between Enabled and Disabled The default state is Disabled when in the Enabled state the system information 4 element on the BCCH indicates that an SD 4 configured CBCH is present The CBCH is being sent using the messages indicated in the Messages To Send field If Enabled is selected and the protocol reports any errors for example the BCH is not configured as SD 4 an error is produced and the status returns to disabled In this example the message BCH must be activated as SD 4 CBCH has been disabled appears Whilst this field is set to Enabled and the Broadcast Status field is displaying Sending you cannot change any of the message attribute fields If you attempt to change a field the message Cannot change message parameters while broadcasting message appears Choices Enabled Disabled 4 120 6 Message Fields 7 Messages To Send 8 Update Number Screens SMS Cell Broadcast This field can be toggled between Basic and All In the default state Basic the only message attribute which is editable is Identifier All other attributes remain at their previously selected values and disappear from the screen When All is selected all of the message attributes are editable Choices Basic All This field allows you to select which messages are to be sent The default No Message indicates the CBCH is sending invalid
222. kilobytes OTP Agilent 85703A 256 kilobytes SRAM Agilent 85704A 512 kilobytes SRAM Agilent 85705A 512 kilobytes OTP Agilent 85706A SRAM memory cards require a battery to maintain stored information OTP memory cards do not require a battery and will maintain stored information indefinitely 8 21 Instrument BASIC Memory Cards Initializing an SRAM Memory Card An SRAM memory card must be initialized before it can be used Initialize the SRAM memory card by using the COPY_PL program which at the same time you can copy Test Procedure and Test Library files to the memory card Otherwise initialize the SRAM card using the IBASIC computer as follows 1 Press the front panel key and then select the Test Function field lower left corner of screen 2 Choose IBASIC from the Choices menu 3 Select the IBASIC field then use the knob to type INITIALIZE INTERNAL Then select Done The initialization process takes only a second to complete 4 Ensure that the SRAM memory card is initialized Select the IBASIC field then use the knob to type CAT Then select Done Information for the initialized memory card should appear on the screen If the error message ERROR 85 Medium uninitialized appears on the screen check the SRAM battery to ensure that it s charged and that its polarity is correctly oriented in the battery holder 8 22 Figure 8 8 Instrument BASIC Memory Cards Setting the Write Prot
223. l Characteristics Accuracy Minimum Resolution 5 to 41 dBm 10 kHz 3 dB 0 6 dB noise effects 4 to 41 dBm 0 2 mW 0 6 dB noise effects 5 to 4 dBm 0 2 mW 0 2 dB Power Measurement Accuracy Accuracy 0 5 dB 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Power dBm Pulse ON OFF Ratio Measurement Requires Option 006 ON power is averaged over the useful part of the burst OFF is averaged over a one bit interval centered at a user specified time Non hopped mode only Input Frequency Setting Error Input Level Setting Error Timing Accuracy 10 kHz 3 dB 1 7 us 1 1 us typical 3 19 Verifying Performance Agilent Technologies 8922M S Specifications Accuracy ON OFF 40 dB RF In Out only OFF Power dBm ON OFF Ratio Accuracy 30 to 1 2 4 dB 1 1 typically 37 to 30 2 9 dB 1 3 typically 42 to 37 3 7 dB 1 7 typically 47 to 42 4 2 dB 2 1 typically Amplitude Envelope Measurement After one timeslot 577s from an isolated Receiver Hop Trigger in the GSM Frequency bands Measurement Range RF In Out 6 to 41 dBm Aux RF In 36 to 20 dBm Input Frequency Setting Error 10 kHz Inaccuracy due to Noise for overshoots lt 1 dB Relative Input Level Setting Error Level 1 dB 3 dB 3 dB w 5 averages 0 dB lt 0 15 dB pk lt t0 2 dB pk lt 0 2 dB pk 6 dB lt t0 2 dB lt
224. l O 0 25 BER dba EASHRENEHTS ROBILE PROME Channel TH Level Timeslor Expected newt TK Level 15 dBA Peak Power Measurements 2 14 Phase and Frequency Error Measurement NOTE Figure 2 7 Making Measurements Measurements Phase error and frequency error are measures of the modulation and noise performance of the radio s transmitter path Method Select the PHASE FRQ field on the cell control screen to access the phase and frequency measurements The test is run automatically when the screen is selected The measurement fields in this screen are RMS Phase Error Peak Phase Error and Frequency Error 1 see Figure 2 7 on page 2 15 The Agilent 8922M S input sensitivity 2 can be varied if necessary to ensure that the input signal level matches the Agilent 8922M S RF Analyzer Valid measurements are only made when the signal is within 3 dB of the RF Analyzer setting The Agilent 8922M has the option of using multi burst measurements 4 This gives the ability to make several phase and frequency measurements using more than one burst For more information refer to Chapter 4 Screens Phase and Frequency Error screen PHASE AHO FREGUERKCY ERROR RAS Phoge Error dea Frequency Error GRR 2 39 24 60 Pagk Phaoge Error des 6 94 Hoas Tria BF Rmelyzer Amplitude Phase and Frequency Error Measurements Two additional screens in the phase and frequen
225. ld Types 1 2 3 4 Se j _ Soue P number naned 100 free memory RF GENERATOR RF AKALYZER RF Gen RF Gen Hod Source RF Gen J AF Gen Hop Control Fr Anplitude ensk j Freauency E Hor Node HER d n DC Hon Hor Hor kHz RF Output Atten Hold RE IN OUT Hop Trig Anplitude ArasDisarn my Courling BC DC RF Analyzer RF Analyzer AGC RF Analyzer Hor Control Freauency Anplitude AGC Mode Hor Mode MHz RF Input Open Auto Hop Trig DAC Value P This field is where you enter names or titles To enter position the cursor next to a character or edit function then push the knob to select it A list of character and function choices appears in the bottom right corner of the screen This field is where you enter numeric values To enter a numeric value position the cursor next to the field and change the value in one of two ways e Key in the value using the DATA keys e Push the knob and turn to increment or decrement the value Push the knob again to set the displayed value This field type allows selection from a list of choices To make a selection position the cursor next to the field and push the knob A list of choices will appear in the bottom right corner of the screen Position the cursor and then push the knob to choose 4 2 Screens Field Types 4 Underlined Entry This type of field allows selection between the two labe
226. led Agilent 8922M S Multiple Controllers Only one system controller can be connected to the bus at any time If the Agilent 8922M S is used in a test system that has its own controller the Agilent 8922M S can not be used as a controller unless the system controller is turned off or disconnected from the bus If an Agilent 8922M S is used as a controller in a system with another Agilent 8922M S the GPIB Mode of the non controller Agilent 8922M S must be set to Talk amp Listen Hardware Connections and Agilent 8922M S Configuration GPIB Configuration For Programming Instrument BASIC Configuration and Instrument Control Agilent 8922M S provides an RS 232 Serial port and an GPIB port for a variety of uses Controlling the Agilent 8922M S using a connected controller Controlling connected instruments using the Agilent 8922M S IBASIC computer Printing screen images and test results Entering and editing IBASIC programs The Agilent 8922M S s O CONFIGURE screen is used to configure these ports for the desired use aR U N 5 Access the Agilent 8922M S s I O CONFIGURE screen Set the HP IB Adrs to the desired address Set the Mode field to Talk amp Lstn Enter the Print Adrs if a GPIB printer is connected 1 Setthe Printer Port field to HPIB Connect GPIB cables to other instrument s This configuration prepares the Agilent 8922M S to be controlled by a system controller allowing program transfers over the bus Ref
227. lent 8922M S RAM memory in order to correctly re load the program at a later time To clear Agilent 8922M S RAM select and run the ROM program COPY_PL from the Procedure field in the TESTS menu Running COPY_PL deletes all SAVE RECALL registers So instead you may want to load another program run it and then re load the original program that was aborted Accessing the Agilent 8922M S s IBASIC Controller Using the Knob Instrument BASIC Entering and Editing Programs Entering and Editing Programs The IBASIC Controller screen is the computer for the TESTS subsystem You enter and edit programs just like any other IBASIC computer with the exceptions that the Agilent 8922M S does not have a computer keyboard connected directly to it and full screen editing does not yet exist Programs can be entered into the IBASIC computer s RAM using a variety of methods e Using the IBASIC Controller screen and the Cursor Control knob e Using an external IBASIC controller connected to the Agilent 8922M S by GPIB e Using an external ASCII terminal or Personal Computer PC connected to the Agilent 8922M S by RS 232 1 Access the TESTS screen by pressing TESTS Select the Test Function field at the bottom of the screen to display a list of choices 3 Select IBASIC to display the IBASIC Controller screen After accessing the IBASIC Controller screen position the cursor in front of the command line at the top of the screen
228. litude 2 Marker Screens Pwr Ramp Fall Edge Pwr Ramp Fall Edge r AMPLITUDE FALLING ee ae i H i Harker Tine i me a ee Lvl EE 0 45 Pk TX Pur te 5 SyneStatus H No Error VETE AE E a N beveecseebeseeeeedeceeeeeede cence ee heeeeceeeeeeeeeee aeon oe es Chan 6 8 a e ge e View Marker Pos Tris Delay Amplitude Hask div T dN 4 3 T 1 When multiburst is turned on display update rate for power versus time and phase traces will be slowed down while multiple bursts are collected This view displays the falling portion of the amplitude envelope with the amplitude mask superimposed The vertical range is 40 to 5 dBm The horizontal range is 144 to 156 or 84 to 96 bit periods depending on the burst type This is a copy of the RF analyzer Amplitude field This is the amplitude to be assumed at the selected input port Range RF IN OUT 27 9 to 41 0 dBm AUX RF IN 58 0 to 20 0 dBm See Also Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Analyzer Chapter 3 Specifications These fields display the time and level at the current marker position 4 99 3 Marker Pos 4 Mask NOTE 5 Pk TX Pwr 6 SyncStatus 7 Trig Delay 8 View Screens Pwr Ramp Fall Edge This field sets the marker position The marker position is settable in units of division div only This field turns the amplitude mask on or off In PCS 1900 mode only requ
229. loop command is sent to the mobile and selecting FAST sends a close test loop command See Also Screens Bit Error Test Manual Auto Run starts a bit error test Stop discontinues the bit error test in progress Single allows one test to be performed Cont allows testing to automatically repeat This field allows you to select between a display showing the percentage of errors select MHz and ppm select W which gives you the errors in parts per million See Also Keys ON OFF LO LIMIT HI LIMIT REF SET AVG Units 4 58 1 Data Length 2 External Disk Specification 3 FF at Start 4 FF at End Screens 1 0 Configuration T O Configuration 6 11 lial FIGURATION Je Port Settings aa Lenath 241 Mode Parity Rew Pace om 48 ed Talkilstn Hone Dota Length amp bits ao f E LoserJet L 22 External Disk Specification 1 Printer Port EERE 170 CO Print Control HP 18 Adrs Serial Baud Serial In BASIC Echo Inst Echo Inst IBASI CR On of On Off FF at End FF at Start Lines Page 60 Print Title 20107 3 84 This field sets the Serial Port word length Choices 7 bits 8 bits This field sets the external disk address used by the Tests screen s Location field when it is set to Disk See Also Keys Tests This field allows you to select whether or not to have a form feed at the start of the printout If Yes is sele
230. ls in the field separated by a 5 To Screen List slash To toggle between the choices position the cursor next to the field and push the knob The underlined choice is activated This field allows selection of alternate screens To change to another screen position the cursor next to the required screen and push the knob 4 3 1 AC Level 2 AF Freq 3 AF Anl In Screens Audio Audio i a 2 Level EE 13 0 00027 1 42182 3 GENERATORS ANALYZER AF Anl In 9 d speech Cntl memm eee Frequency Speech 1 0000 Audio In Lo Ext Load F MOBILE tno EO S O D Chan Ta Lev Speaker Vol Speaker ALC Timeslot kHz Anplitude Echo Delar E 4 ny Courling dl ee 6 This field displays the measured ac level of the AF analyzer input AF Anl In when Audio Out Pls Demod Audio In Speech In Speech Out or Scope In is selected as the input See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG METER Units This field selects the type of measurement to be made on the input signal The input signal to be measured is selected in the AF Anl In field Choices AF Freq measures the audio frequency DC Level measures the dc level Distn measures the distortion SINAD measures SINAD See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG METER Units This field selects the AF analyzer input 4 4 NOTE 4 Amplitude 5 Audio I
231. ments of the ideal signals using a 3 pole filter and a 5 pole filter are shown in Table 1 and Table 2 These values are added to the GSM specifications to obtain equivalent limits for Output RF Spectrum measurements using 3 pole synchronously tuned measurement filter The adjusted Output RF Spectrum limits are based on a 3 pole filter are shown in Table 3 and Table 4 3 Pole Specification Difference Output RF Spectrum due to Modulation Offset from Carrier kHZ 600 to 1800 Difference dB 0 2 5 1 0 9 0 0 400 600 1200 1800 Difference dB 6 4 2 0 It is important to note that these values are estimates based on simulation and measurements They are intended to allow the user to estimate their transmitters conformance to GSM Output RF Spectrum requirements 2 22 Table 3 Table 4 Making Measurements Measurements Adjusted Limits Based on 3 Pole Filter Output RF Spectrum Due to Modulation Power Offset from Carrier KHZ Control Level 0 39 dBm 0 43 dBm 0dB 0 5 dB 27 5 dB 32 dB 51 dB 0 37 dBm gt 5 lt 33 dBm Adjusted Limits Based on 3 Pole Filter Output RF Spectrum Due to Switching Power Level dBm Offset from Carrier kHZ 400 600 1200 1800 43 3 dB 17dB 19dB 24 dB 41 5 17 19 24 39 7 17 24 37 9 35 11 33 13 31 15 29 17 27 17 25 17 23 17 lt 21 17 2 23 Spectrum
232. mes during the burst These screens can be revealed by highlighting and selecting from the View field 2 e Rise Edge displays the top 30 dB of the rising section of the waveform e Top 2 dB displays the signal during the middle part of the burst allowing analysis of the ripple of the signal e Fall Edge displays the signal during the falling edge of the burst allowing analysis of the fall time of the signal e Summary details the amplitude measurements made at the times selected in the 12 time fields You can choose your own time positions or use the default settings The sensitivity of the Agilent 8922M S receiver can be varied 3 allowing you to verify whether the input signal level matches the Agilent 8922M S RF Analyzer Valid measurements are only made when the signal is within 3 dB of the RF Analyzer setting The Measurement Summary field on the DSP Analyzer Ampl Main screen displays whether HI LO limits set for the measurement display fields Ampl1 12 pk flatness or pk flatness were exceeded in the last measurement The possible Measurement Summary displays are Failed One or more measurement limit was exceeded Passed No measurement limits were exceeded No measurement limits are set or all of the Ampl and Pk measurement displays are turned off A blank field The blank field is displayed when the measurement is armed It will remain blank until the measurement is complete Refer to Pulse Measureme
233. messages Message 1 sends the contents of Message 1 every 30 seconds Message 2 sends the contents of Message 2 every 60 seconds andMessages 1 amp 2 alternatively sends the contents of Message and Message 2 with a 60 second interval between successive messages To send a message immediately simply select any choice other than No Message Choices No Message Message 1 Message 2 Messages 1 amp 2 This field allows you to select the revision of the message to be sent The default for Message 1 is 0 and the default for Message 2 is 15 Range Oto 15 4 121 IMPORTANT 1 Controls Screens Spectrum Analyzer Main Controls Option 006 Only Spectrum Analyzer Main Controls Option 006 Only SPECTRUM ANALYZER RBW 30kHz Harker daa enka kes hae ae sabe awe een uaa aaa panii ae Prreereey Frea MIE 3 914 600000 Lvl 38 21 Ref Level 6 E MOBILE i Chan TK Ley 1 En GEE ee u Tineslot 2 7 This screen displays the Spectrum Analyzer power spectral density versus frequency trace When Reference is set to Tunable see Configure screen and Offset is 40 ppm the frequency calibration of the Spectrum Analyzer will be inaccurate This also affects RF Analyzer outputs such as FM DEMOD OUT DSP Analyzer frequency measurement results Phase and Output RF Spectrum This field selects the alternate Controls of the Spectrum Analyzer measurement Choices Main RF Ge
234. ming Diagrams Pin 3 Input This connector is an active low input that halts and resets the Agilent 8922 GSM counters frame timeslot and bits It is used when two or more Agilent 8922M S are connected together daisy chained to simulate a GSM system Requirements Amplitude TTL Levels Low Drive 100 WA High Drive 2 mA Active Level Low Pin 5 Output This connector indicates whether the Agilent 8922M S GSM counters have been halted by RP GSM RST IN It is always active TTL Low when the Agilent 8922M S is in the Settable Mode Requirements Amplitude TTL Levels Low Drive 100 WA High Drive 2 mA Active Level Low 6 21 RP_HOP_ADRSO through RP_HOP_ADRSS9 RP_HOP_ADRS10 Connectors Signal Descriptions for SYSTEM BUS ADRS0 Pin 12 ADRS1 Pin 31 ADRS2 Pin 13 ADRS3 Pin 32 ADRS4 Pin 14 ADRSS5 Pin 33 ADRS6 Pin 15 ADRS7 Pin 34 ADRS8 Pin 16 ADRS9 Pin 35 ADRS10 Pin 17 Inputs These are the rear panel hop frequency table address input lines They connect to the to hop controller These lines select entries from user entered RF generator and RF analyzer hop frequency tables These lines have multiple uses depending on the selected modes 1 Used in combination with RP_TX_HOP to frequency hop the RF generator 2 Used in combination with RP_RX_HOP to frequency hop the RF analyzer 3 Used in combination with RP_RST_SEQ_HOP to reset the internal hop address register These signals are read on the positive going edge of RP_TX_
235. mode radio type as well as other miscellaneous pieces of information are contained on this screen To access this screen highlight More and select CONF IG TO Configuration the I O configuration screen allows you to set up the general interface of the instrument such as printer options This screen can be accessed by highlighting the More field in any main screen and selecting I O CONFIG 2 39 Using RF Rise Triggering Effect of the RF Generator on RF Analyzer Measurements Making Measurements Advanced Features e SMS Cell Broadcast the SMS CB screen allows you to test whether the mobile phone is capable of correctly receiving and displaying a message sent from a base station using the Short Message Service SMS Cell Broadcast protocol This screen can be accessed by highlighting the More field in any main screen and selecting SMS CB When using RF Rise triggering of measurements the Trigger Delay should be adjusted so that the wanted data is captured during the sampling process The actual measurement is made at the Trigger Delay time after the RF Rise When changing from RF Rise triggering to another trigger mode the Trigger Delay should be adjusted to the appropriate value as the default Trigger Delay is not automatically restored Example In the Agilent 8922M S when using the RF Rise a Trig ger Delay of 0 is recommended When changing from RF Rise to Ext Demod trigger mode the default value of 473 4T should be re en
236. n Marker Auxiliary 4 122 2 Center Freq 3 Marker 4 Max Hold 5 Meas Reset 6 Ref Level 7 Span Screens Spectrum Analyzer Main Controls Option 006 Only This field sets the center frequency when the RF Analyzer s Hop Mode is set to Non Hop Range 10 0 to 1015 0 MHz The two fields display the frequency and the level at the current marker position See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG Units Selecting Meas Reset will erase any accumulated measurements used for calculating a final result and re start the measurement process for the following functions e HI LIMIT e LOLIMIT e AVG See Also Keys HI LIMIT LO LIMIT AVG This field is the reference level entry field for the selected RF input port Range RF IN OUT 18 9 dBm to 44 0 dBm AUX RF IN 55 0 dBm to 23 0 dBm This field sets the frequency span Range 5 kHz to 4 MHz overrange to 10 MHz 4 123 1 Amplitude 2 Controls 3 Frequency 4 Marker Screens Spectrum Analyzer RF Gen Controls Option 006 Only Spectrum Analyzer RF Gen Controls Option 006 Only r SPECTRUN ANALYZER RBN 30kHz i i Marker Frea MIEN 914 600000 Lvl 37 28 Ref Level 36 0 dBa Hold off On MOBILE Chan i Ta Ley RF Output Timeslot This field sets the RF generator s amplitude The amplitude shown is for the port selected in the RF Output field Range RF IN OUT 127 0 to
237. n The mobile station must be in loopback mode see Loopback field description to return the bit sequence for bit error testing This field is displayed only when PRBS is selected in the Speech field Choices CCITT 15 2 gt 1 bit pseudo random pattern see CCITT Rec 0 151 CCITT 23 27 1 bit pseudo random pattern see CCITT Rec 0 151 0 all zeros 1 all ones 01 alternating 0 1 10 alternating 1 0 4 42 25 RACHs 26 Relative MS Timing Err 27 Reset Call Counts 28 Reset SACCH Meas Screens Cell Control 2 CELL bontat 2 Coll Status Inactive all Counts Caller lt RRIBCCH Ciphtott Pases 0 MMi Inache RACHS Bad Syacsi SACCH Neas BED Full Fartial Adi tell ESIC TH Leui RE Leui RE Levi Re Leui NCC Tin Adv Re Quali Ra Qual ARFCH BCC Denod Arn TCH Paras Relative M8 Audio Cntl MS Cnil faroDisors fg Ilining Err Loopback _ tot oT 26 Coll Ctl ARFCH DAL D Sisnalins Tineslot Ns Parns m Test Type Timing Fdy Speech Connect A To Screen T Echo Delay Linit Coll Status Pos T Posing TCH State TX Level P Node BI TCH trol ARFCH RF Anl Ampl TE an Timeslot Control This field indicates the number of RACHs received during the current call or since the last Reset This field displays the length of time between when the Agilent 8922M S expected the uplink burst to arrive and the time it actually arrived Timing error
238. n Lo 6 Coupling 7 Echo Delay 8 Ext Load R 9 Frequency Screens Audio Choices Scope In selects the SCOPE IN MEASURE front panel connector Speech Out selects the signal going to the MON SPEECH DEMODULATION OUT front panel connector AM Mod In selects the INAM SPEECH MODULATION front panel connector Speech In selects the IN AM SPEECH MODULATION front panel connector FM Demod selects the FM demodulation discriminator Pls Demod selects the pulse demodulation detector Audio In selects the AUDIO IN HI front panel connector Audio Out selects the signal going to the AUDIO OUT front panel connector The AM Mod In and the Speech In are not featured in the Agilent 8922S This field is the AF Generator Audio Out amplitude setting Range 0 0mV rms to 8 84 V rms This field sets the reference for the Audio In Lo BNC connector The choices are Float or Gnd This field selects ac or de coupling of the AF Generator Audio Out signal This field sets the echo delay when the Speech field is set to Echo mode This field sets the AF analyzer external load resistance for displaying AF analyzer measurement results in Watts Range 0 1 Q to 1 MQ This field is the AF Generator Audio Out Frequency setting Range dc to 30 kHz 4 5 10 Meas Reset Meas Cntl 11 Speaker ALC NOTE 12 Speaker Vol NOTE Screens Audio Selecting Meas Reset will erase any accumulated measurements used for calculating a final
239. n field on the TESTS screen 3 Using the knob select the field and enter the following command to load your program GET lt filename gt INTERNAL 1 Insert the disk into the drive Access the IBASIC controller screen from the Test Function field on the TESTS screen 3 Using the knob select the field and enter the following command to load your program LOAD lt filename gt 7xx x This procedure downloads an IBASIC program from your connected IBASIC computer to the Agilent 8922M S s IBASIC Controller This procedure assumes your Agilent 8922M S s GPIB address is set to 14 Access the Agilent 8922M S s IBASIC Controller screen 2 Load your IBASIC program into your connected IBASIC computer 3 Enter the following commands on your IBASIC computer to copy the program into the Agilent 8922M S s IBASIC Controller OUTPUT 714 PROG DEL lt enter gt OUTPUT 714 PROG DEF 0 lt enter gt LIST 714 lt enter gt OUTPUT 714 END lt enter gt Storing IBASIC Programs On Memory Cards Storing an IBASIC Program On A GPIB 2 Disk Drive Running Your Program Loading a Test Procedure Instrument BASIC Loading Storing and Running Use the previous procedure to download your program into the Agilent 8922M S s RAM Press LOCAL SHIFT on the Agilent 8922M S to perform an IBASIC reset If your memory card has not been initialized insert yo
240. n is available when making pulsed measurements CW Power is a broadband measurement The CW Frequency measurement is obtained using a tuned selective input The RF analyzer should be set to within 500 kHz of the expected signal frequency In the GSM band the value that is entered should be set to the nearest 100 kHz Select CW MEAS in the cell control screen to gain access to the power measurements of the Agilent 8922M S The CW measurements are made automatically when you access the screen The CW Frequency field 1 see Figure 2 15 on page 2 28 displays the carrier frequency of the signal and CW Power 2 shows the power of the carrier signal It is also possible to display the difference between the measured frequency and the value selected by choosing CWFregErr from field 1 1 2 Ch AEASURENEWT ELE CW Power 31 101299 Hove CH Keasureanents not valid for pulsed stamels FF Jarg FF Iwo Expected Tneut ARB Lg tude Fraduener 3T 2000 dBA CW Measurements These measurements can be reset using MeasReset Select Pwr Zero before power is applied to zero the power meter in the Agilent 8922M S 2 28 NOTE Making Measurements Measurements Although CW Measurements is a broadband measurement it uses calibration data that relies on the expected input frequency being set correctly The Power Detector is connected so that it will only make measurements on signals present at the RF In Out port 2 29 Is a
241. n upper case letters For example PRINTER POWER SUPPLY DATA COLLECTION and so forth Refer to item 1 in Figure 8 17 on page 8 37 3 Select the Model field and enter the instrument s model number There is no specific syntax for entering model numbers into this field Refer to item 2 in Figure 8 17 on page 8 37 4 Select the Addr address field and turn the knob to enter the last two digits of the instrument s GPIB address Refer to item 3 in Figure 8 17 on page 8 37 The RS 232 address must be 9 and the Data Collection address must be 1 5 Select the Options field refer to item 4 in Figure 8 17 on page 8 37 and enter the instrument s option number s if any This field may be left blank or otherwise may include other calling name options for example Printer options LN START END Where is the number of lines on each page Where START causes a form feed at the start of each printout Where END causes a form feed at the end of each printout Data collection option NN Where NN is the number of records file size for the mass storage location where data will be collected on disk or mem ory card The default record size is 80 6 Press the Insrt Ins field or Delet Ins field as needed or turn the knob to insert or delete as many instruments as needed Refer to item 5 in Figure 8 17 on page 8 37 8 36 Figure 8 17 Instrument BASIC Programming and Using the TESTS Subsystem TESTE CEgat Gand
242. nal which is generated when digitally demodulating one out of eight timeslots of GSM 0 3 GMSK modulation DATA DEMODULATION OUT is only active when the demodulation is armed This is a fast burst of data not continuous data This output is undefined when the demodulation output data valid signal is TTL HIGH Differential data decoding is done internally DATA DEMODULATION OUT is active only when the digital demodulator s State field is set to Arm This connector is connected directly in parallel with DEMOD_DATA on the SYSTEM BUS connector Requirements High drive 1 mA Low drive 1 mA See Also Screens Cell Control 2 Specifications Signal Descriptions for the System Bus Timing Diagrams The FM connector is connected to the receiver circuitry This connector provides an output of the FM discriminated signal This signal is muted whenever the pulsed RF input signal is OFF This output is always active See Also Specifications This connector can be used for transmitting speech to a mobile phone To select speech choose Cond or Uncond from the Cell Control 2 screen Speech field This connector is also used as the DC AM input of the Agilent 8922M S To select DC AM choose Ext from the RF Generator RF Analyzer screen DC AM field The RF carrier will now be AM modulated with fixed sensitivity through this connector See Also Screens Cell Control 2 Speech Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Gen DC AM Screens Audio
243. ncy values are compared e Select Ramping or Modulation 3 e Set yourFreq Offset value 4 QUTFUT RF SFECTEUA Duteut AF Spectrun ak fleas Gene 0 00 Sync Status i Ho Error Meas rig BF Emgiyzer Anplitude 5 i dha MOBILE Tria Delay Chain T TX Lew Timeslat hore Figure 2 11 Output RF Spectrum Measurements e The trace of the output RF spectrum can be viewed if you highlight View and select Trace 5 Output RFSpectrum GSM Recommendation 11 10 and 11 20 set the requirements for the out of channel Measurements Using performance of base station and mobile station transmitters with the Output RF a 3 Pole Spectrum specification The specification calls for the measurement of transmitted Synchronously energy at several offsets from the carrier frequency Two types of measurements are Tuned Measurement quired quired Filter e Check the interference due to modulation e Check the interference due to ramping of the signal amplitude switching transients Limits are specified for each type of measurement at specified frequency offsets The GSM specified limits are based on a 5 pole synchronously tuned measurement filter 2 21 Table 1 Table 2 NOTE Making Measurements Measurements In the Agilent 8922 Output RF Spectrum measurements are made using a 3 pole synchronously tuned measurement filter The measurement results will differ from measurements using a 5 pole filter The difference between measure
244. nd and third test routines defined on the Test Seqn screen 1390 2430 SUB T maps the calls from the main program to the correct subroutine The mapping is quite simple with the main program specifying which test to run and this subroutine calling the correct subroutine based on the SELECT statement Creating A Library And Default Procedure File Once the Code file has been created an associated Library and default Procedure file for the Code file can also be created Creating A Procedure File With No Library If you do not want your program to use the different user interface screens of the TESTS subsystem you can create a Procedure from your Code file that does not have a Library associated with it When the test information is defined NO LIB is selected for the Library Name When creating a procedure to run without a Library the first line of your Code file must be an exclamation point followed by the Code file name For example if your procedure is called FM_TESTS the first line of your Code file must be 1 FM_TESTS 8 44 APPENDIX A A 1 APPENDIX A Purpose Purpose NOTE This feature is not available on the Agilent 8922S Protocol Logging captures protocol messages to and from the mobile station in buffers in the Agilent 8922M Messages can then be sent to an external Protocol Logger such as the HP Agilent 37900D through the Protocol Interface connector on the rear panel WARNING Before proceeding
245. nderstanding Test Failures This section is intended to be used in conjunction with the Agilent 8922 Series Assembly Level Repair Guide for assembly level repair and troubleshooting If a performance test fails and hardware is suspected the following table is a guideline to help identify the hardware assemblies most likely to cause each failure Before replacing an assembly the memory card diagnostics supplied with the Assembly Level Repair Guide should also be run to help verify which assembly is defective ASSEMBLIES TESTED P Primary S Secondary Performance Test A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 Al A12 A13 A14 1 Sig Gen Level S S P Sig Gen Spectral Purity S S Sig Gen Pulse Mod S P Sig Gen 3 GMSK S AF Generator AF Analyzer P P Oscilloscope S RF Analyzer Power RF Analyzer GMSK Mod RF Analyzer Pulse Demod Spectrum Analyzer NOTE Verifying Performance Agilent Technologies 8922M S Specifications Agilent Technologies 8922M S Specifications If you have the Agilent 8922M S Option 010 Multi Band Test System refer to the appropriate Agilent 8922 Multi Band User s Guide for more information on specifications relevant to dual band testing GSM900 and E GSM900 Funct ionality Bit Frame Error Rate Measurements MS Power Output Level Control Broadcast Channel Capability Control Channels SDCCH FACCH SACCH Call Control Capabilities Traffic Cha
246. nect Call Present timer MS failed to respond to SI or REL_COMP Disconnect Indication Tone Release Request timer MS failed REL S failed to respond to DISC with REL to respond to REL with Messages Timers ETUP with CALL_CONF Disconnect Indication timer S failed to respond to DISC with REL or DISC timer or DISC REL_COMP or Incoming call proceeding timer MS failed to ALERT CONN or DISC on incoming cali Connect Indication timer MS failed to respond to CON with CON_ACK Modify Request timer MS failed MOD_REJ The timer values have been set as follows Timer Values to respond to MOD with MOD_COMP or a varies with channel type see Rec 04 06 Table 9 Timer Value ms T3113 8000 TTO01 2000 T3250 5000 T3260 5000 T3270 5000 T313 10000 T3299 5000 T323 10000 T301 20000 7 7 Physical Layer Disconnects Data Link Layer Disconnects Messages Disconnects Disconnects Physical Hardware interface layer error codes are proprietary to the Agilent 8922M S The defined error codes are as follows Call disconnected PH Error 0x00 Causes 0x0096 0x009c Channel or Speech coder failure 0x009d Channel coder auto recovery to BCCH Non fatal 0x009e Channel coder failed cycle power to recover Fatal 0x009f Channel coder BCH hang
247. nerator RF Analyzer screen See Also Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Generator This field turns the attenuator hold on or off These fields select how bit errors will be displayed for both the Intermediate and Completed results Choices Bit Error displays the bit errors count per measurement Bit Count calculates and displays the ratio of bit errors counted to the total number of bits measured depends on measurement type Field 4 displays the final result of the measurement field 5 displays a running total of the bit errors Use this field to define and display measurements 1 or 3 The right side of the screen allows access to measurements 2 or 4 Refer to 16 for further information This field displays the number of bits that have been tested during a measurement that is currently running This number includes only bits that are tested by the selected measurement type This field displays the number of bits that were tested during the last fully completed test Bit error tests may extend beyond the number entered in the Bits To Test field so that the last speech frame may be completed This field selects the number of bits which will be tested This number includes only bits that are tested by the selected measurement type These fields determine what data will be displayed Choices CRC displays cyclic redundancy check CRC errors FE displays frame erasures See Also Keys ON OFF LO LIMIT HI LIMIT RE
248. ng one out of eight timeslots of GSM 0 3 GMSK modulation It can be used to load the digitally demodulated data This signal is used for gate timing when the demodulation output data signal and the demodulation output clock signal are valid This output is only active while outputting not while demodulating and it is only active when the digital demodulation mode is selected and armed This connector is connected directly in parallel with DEMOD_VALID on the SYSTEM BUS connector Specifications High drive 1 mA Low drive 1 mA Active level LOW Active for leading tailbits first half of data midamble second half of data and trailing tailbits Inactive for guard bits Duration depends on type of burst being demodulated See Also Screens Cell Control 2 Specifications Signal Descriptions for the System Bus 1 10 MHz OUT 2 13 MHz OUT Connectors Rear Panel Connectors of the Agilent Technologies 8922M S Rear Panel Connectors of the Agilent Technologies 8922M S 1 2 6 10 5 11 3 8 7 9 12 4 14 13 The 10 MHz output connector is connected to the 10 MHz oscillator in the reference circuitry This signal is a general purpose 10 MHz reference output sine wave This connector can be either free running or locked to an external reference of 1 2 5 10 or 13 MHz reference Typically it is locked to the high stability timebase reference option 001 if it is installed connected and enabled 10 MH
249. nnels HSCSD Timing Hopping Speech Encoding Decoding Speech Echo Mode Measurement Coordination SACCH MEAS Result SMS Cell Broadcast Class la 1b and Class II bits in both raw and residual form Also Burst by Burst Bit Error Measurement 0 to 19 with RF analyzer auto adjust BCCH CCCH or BCCH CCCH SDCCH 4 BCCH CCCH BCCH CCCH SDCCH 4 SDCCH 8 non hopped SACCH FACCH BS originated call FS EFS MS originated call FS EFS MS camp on BS call disconnect MS call disconnect TCH FS EFS 2x1 and 2x2 9 6 kbs and 14 4 kbs Auto manual uplink downlink offset measurement Two independent user definable MA tables with offsets Full rate speech User selectable delay 0 to 5 sec on Agilent 8922M fixed delay on Agilent 8922S Flexible control of burst type ARFCN and timeslot RXLEV RXQUAL and timing advance Two predefined messages with user definable attributes code update number language and identifier RF Generator Frequency Specifications Range 10 MHz to GHz Resolution 1 Hz Accuracy Reference accuracy 0 5 Hz Stability Same as reference 3 14 Verifying Performance Agilent Technologies 8922M S Specifications Supplemental Characteristics Frequency Overrange To 1015 MHz with uncalibrated output and modulation Switching Speed 577 us over the GSM frequency bands in hop mode refer to 0 3 GMSK modulation specs Output RF In Out Connector Level Range 14
250. no library as shown by item 7 see Figure 8 5 on page 8 15 8 Select where the program for the Test Procedure is to be found Refer to item 8 see Figure 8 5 on page 8 15 9 Select the Make Procedure field or the Delete Procedure field as shown in item 9 Use the Pass Number field in the lower right corner of the Procedure Manager menu to unsecure a Test Procedure file The ROM program SECURE_IT is used to secure Test Procedure files Figure 8 5 Running a Test Sequence NOTE 9 OOCL Instrument BASIC Loading Storing and Running TESTS Procedure Manager ocation to Make or Delete Procedure Conment for new procedure Library for new procedure Current N0 LIB Program location for new procedure fiction re Make Procedure Test Function Poss Number Making a Test Procedure File 1 Select the Run Test field 2 Follow directions and prompts on the Agilent 8922M S screen according to the test sequence being run 3 When testing is complete the Agilent 8922M S will respond to front panel or remote input If at any time you need to stop testing press the front panel CANCEL key A program takes up to 3 minutes to load into the Agilent 8922M S and is loaded when the Run Test field is first pressed Press the front panel keys to abort from an error condition or to abort from the program When you abort from loading the program you ll need to clear Agi
251. now be accessed from any allowable screen You can also make changes to the assigned field Some fields cannot be assigned to global keys Keys Units Keys Units Keys Units in some field types can be changed by pressing an applicable units key e Pressing a units key while the cursor is positioned next to a measurement field converts the measurement to the new units for example dBm W V e Pressing a units key before a measurement is displayed changes the units displayed and will display any new measurement in the new units e Pressing a units key while the measurement display is turned off will turn on the measurement display showing the new units Connectors NOTE If you have the Agilent 8922M S Option 010 Multi Band Test System refer to the appropriate Agilent 8922 Multi Band User s Guide for more information on connection and operating differences 1 AUX RF IN 2 AUX RF OUT Connectors Front Panel Connectors of the Agilent Technologies 8922M S Front Panel Connectors of the Agilent Technologies 8922M S 18 1715 7 10 OoooooOo0oON Seo OGI RD 0000 OOO COLIC G 4 O lo ooo V G 6 C Pedler s Pad sae O 6 2 1 8 9 13 12 14 The auxiliary RF input connects to the input section and to the RF analyzer if selected This conn
252. ns the same If a TMSI received from the mobile station is not valid the Agilent 8922M S will calculate a new TMSI and reallocate it to the mobile station as part of the call setup The following situations can cause a TMSI to not be valid when the mobile station identifies itself with an IMEI number emergency call or when a new IMSI is used When Off is selected the mobile station will continue to use the old TMSI until the next location update occurs When the next location update occurs the mobile station will be instructed to delete its last TMSI and the Agilent 8922M S will perform the identification procedure to determine the IMSI When this field is selected the MS IMSI number reported by the mobile station is copied to the Paging IMSI field to be used for Agilent 8922M S BS base station originated calls Mobile Terminated Calls When this field is selected a random TMSI number is generated for allocation to a mobile station The random TMSI number is displayed in the TMSI Number field This field displays the current Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity TMSI number assigned to the mobile station If a TMSI received from the mobile station is not valid the Agilent 8922M S will calculate anew TMSI and automatically reallocate it to the mobile station Any time a signaling link is established TMSI reallocation can be performed manually See Reallocation This field is used to enter the mobile station s Authentication
253. nt 8904A is used to generate a 270 833 kHz clock and random data This drives the UUT RF generator to generate the 0 3 GMSK modulated signals with random data This signal is then analyzed by the UUT to assure that the frequency and phase errors are correct If the UUT is an Agilent 8922S clock and data signals are generated internally and the HP Agilent 8904A is not used Things To Check In Case Of Problems e This test should only be performed if the UUT analyzer is known to be accurate Run test 9 first if there is any question about the accuracy of the UUT analyzer e Even when the accuracy of the UUT analyzer is known its specification is such that this test still has a high degree of measurement uncertainty e A possibility to verify an instrument that fails this test may be to use a second Agilent 8922M S to analyze the signal or use the HP Agilent 11836A 0 3 GMSK measurement software This software and its associated hardware has a lower measurement uncertainty but is not currently supported with the Agilent 8922 Performance Tests software Equipment Required HP Agilent 3456A Voltmeter HP Agilent 8903BAudio Analyzer HP Agilent 8902AMeasuring Receiver Theory of the Test The UUT is set to generate audio signals at various levels and frequencies The voltmeter measures AC and DC level accuracy the audio analyzer measures residual distortion and the measuring receiver measures frequency accuracy Things To Check In Case Of
254. nts within this section for a description of Pulse Measurements These measurements are available with option 006 only 2 17 Making Measurements Measurements Pulse Measurements If you have option 006 spectrum analyzer installed you can make measurements Available if Option on the lower portion of the pulse These measurements can be accessed from the 006 Spectrum Power Ramp screens Analyzer is Fitted e The main measurements Pulse On Off Rise and Pulse On Off Fall are displayed at the top of the screen 1 see Figure 2 9 on page 2 18 e The sensitivity of the Agilent 8922M S receiver can be varied 2 allowing you to verify whether the signal still falls within the boundaries of the GSM power mask PULSE OH OFF RATIO Pulse On 0tl Fise Pulse On Off Fall 83 85 Eii Bena Syne Agog Frequency Sync Stotus Ho Error Fi lee Vipu FEL Tria Melar 3 2 Figure 2 9 Pulse Measurements The Agilent 8922M S provides three pulse measurements which can be selected using View 3 These are e Pulse pulse on off ratio measures the ratio of the average transmitter power pulse on to a specified time position when power is reduced pulse off The default settings are 28us before bit 0 and 28usS after bit 147 e Puls Rise this screen displays the signal during the initial rise of the pulse e Puls Fall this screen displays the signal during the final fall of the pulse 2 18 Bit Error Rate Measurement NOTE F
255. obile Equipment DAI input 24 Data Clock is terminated in 10 KQ Figure 6 1 5 GPIB Connectors Rear Panel Connectors of the Agilent Technologies 8922M S Electrical Characteristics of the DAI EMMI The state of a signal pin is defined by the voltage V between the pin and its associated ground Logical State Voltage V Current 0 or LOW or ON OV lt V lt 40 8V 2 4mA 1 or HIGH or OFF 43 5 V lt V lt 5V 400 uA Undefined H0 8V lt V lt 3 5V Forbidden V lt OVorV gt 5V 25 14 EMMI Connector Pin Numbers See Also Screens Cell Control DAI Test Norm The General Purpose Interface Bus is an IEEE 488 1 connector It is connected to the main microprocessor This connector is used for IEEE 488 1 operation and control of other instruments using IBASIC if available The instrument can be talker and listener or a controller depending on selection made in the Mode field on the Configure screen GPIB is always active See Also Screens Configure Specifications GPIB GPIB Connections Connectors Rear Panel Connectors of the Agilent Technologies 8922M S SHIELD CONNECT TO ATN EARTH SRQ GROUND IFC NDAC NRFD DAV EOI DIO 4 DIO 3 DIO 2 DIO 1 SIGNAL GROUND P O TWISTED PAIR WITH 11 P O TWISTED PAIR WITH 10 SHOULD BE GROUNDED P O TWISTED PAIR WITH 9 NEAR TERMINATION P O TWISTED PAIR WITH 8 OF OTHER WIRE OF P O TWISTED PAIR WITH 7 TWISTED PAIR P O TWISTED PAIR WITH
256. odulation mode is selected and armed This is a fast burst of clocks not a continuous clock This connector is undefined when the demodulation output data valid signal is TTL high This connector is connected directly in parallel with DEMOD_CLK on the SYSTEM BUS connector Requirements High drive 1 mA Low drive 1 mA Duty cycle 50 Repetition Rate 1 MHz See Also Screens Pwr Ramp Specifications Signal Descriptions for the System Bus Timing Diagrams CLOCK Input The clock connector is connected to the Premod NSM circuitry This connector is used in combination with DATA MODULATION IN CLOCK MODULATION IN is selected when the RF generator s modulation source GMSK field is set to Ext This connector is directly in parallel with FP_CLOCK on the SYSTEM BUS connector This must be a continuous signal Also significant phase changes or loss of this signal will result in an out of lock condition in the data synchronizer The two inputs are directly coupled to each other Avoid putting signals on both inputs simultaneously Clock Input Requirements High drive requirement 100 uA Low drive requirement 1 2 mA Active edge rising edge 5 DATA DEMODULATION OUT Agilent 8922M Only 6 FM DEMODULATION OUT Agilent 8922M Only 7 IN AM SPEECH MODULATION Agilent 8922M Only NOTE Connectors Front Panel Connectors of the Agilent Technologies 8922M S This connector is the digital demodulation DATA sig
257. of a Typical Call DL gt PH PH_DATA FACCH_FINr3 NsO PO CRI SAPIO MO CC Connect Ac knowledge Frame 2447099 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2447108 PH gt DL PH_DATA FACCH_F RR Nr1 PFO CR1 SAPIO MO Frame 2447135 DL gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2447135 Call setup is complete HST gt CC CC_SYNC Frame 2447667 CC gt MM MM_SYNC Frame 2447667 MM gt RR RR_SYNC Frame 2447667 RR gt DL DL_DATA FACCH_F RR Assignment Command 06 2e Oe b0 00 Of 63 01 72 08 00 00 00 20 00 08 00 01 Frame 2447667 DL gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2447667 DL gt PH PH_DATA FACCH_FINr3 Ns1 PO CR1 SAPIO MO RR Assignment Command Frame 2447667 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2447671 RR gt DL DL_UNIT_DATA SACCH_TF RR System Information Type 6 06 le 00 01 00 f1 10 00 01 63 ff Frame 2447680 PH gt DL PH_DATA SACCH UI P0 CRO SAPIO MO RR Measurement Re port Frame 2447682 DL gt RR DL_UNIT_DATA SACCH RR Measurement Report 06 15 38 38 00 78 01 a0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Frame 2447682 RR gt DL DL_RELEASE FACCH_F Frame 2447685 DL gt RR DL_RELEASE FACCH_F Frame 2447685 RR gt DL DL_RELEASE SACCH_TF Frame 2447685 DL gt RR DL_RELEASE SACCH_TF Frame 2447686 PH gt DL PH_CONNECT FACCH_F Frame 2447699 PH gt DL PH_CONNECT SACCH_TF Frame 2447699 PH gt DL PH_DATA FACCH_F SABM P1 CRO SAPIO MO Frame 2447716 A 18 Inter cell handover to TCH1 Single TCH on ARFCN 30 slot 4 APPENDIX A Protocol Log of a Typical Call DL gt DL R
258. ograms can also be written that do not use the special TESTS subsystem capabilities using only the IBASIC computer core Instrument BASIC Agilent Technologies 8922M S Instrument BASIC Overview Programs That Use the TESTS Subsystem The TESTS subsystem s capabilities were designed to allow the operator to pick and choose the tests and parameters they need from a larger set eliminating unnecessary tests and reducing test time This is especially helpful when a very large program has been written containing several tests and a multitude of associated specifications test parameters and frequencies Writing programs to run in this environment requires you to understand and adhere to the program structure and syntax required by the TESTS subsystem Programs That Do Not Use the TESTS Subsystem If you have a common test routine that uses the same tests and parameters every time it is run it may be easier to write your test program to run directly in the IBASIC computer without using the TESTS subsystem These programs are much like any stand alone program and development of these programs will not be covered by this chapter All of the general information sections of this chapter can be applied to these types of IBASIC programs By writing tests that do not use the TESTS subsystem you lose the ability to easily access and change the test order and associated parameters with the subsystem s editing screens although you can write you
259. ollowing general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation of this instrument Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended use of the instrument Agilent Technologies Inc assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements GENERAL This product is a Safety Class 1 instrument provided with a protective earth terminal The protective features of this product may be impaired if it is used in a manner not specified in the operation instructions All Light Emitting Diodes LEDs used in this product are Class 1 LEDs as per IEC 60825 1 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS This instrument is intended for indoor use in an installation category II pollution degree 2 environment It is designed to operate at a maximum relative humidity of 95 and at altitudes of up to 2000 meters Refer to the specifications tables for the ac mains voltage requirements and ambient operating temperature range BEFORE APPLYING POWER Verify that the product is set to match the available line voltage the correct fuse is installed and all safety precautions are taken Note the instrument s external markings described under Safety Symbols GROUND THE INSTRUMENT To minimize shock hazard the instrument chassis and cover must be connected to an electrical protective earth ground The instrument must be connect
260. on about the received signal strength RXLev and quality RXQual of the TCH and the adjacent cell BCH measurement The SDCCH Stand alone Dedicated Control Channel is sometimes configured on a BCH and sometimes on its own physical channel The SDCCH has a different multiframe structure to the TCH SDCCH bursts repeat less frequently than one per frame For this reason more than 8 SDCCH can share a physical channel The data rate on a SDCCH is lower than on the TCH During the call set up process there can be a lot of time between the mobile sending a RACH and getting service to the start of the conversation During this period no speech is transmitted though communication does take place This transitional time means less of the cells resource are used the SDCCH improves efficiency and provides a useful holding channel for the mobile until speech data needs to be exchanged The SIM Subscriber ID Module card plugs into every GSM mobile and holds all the unique subscriber information It also stores dialing lists network allowable usage etc Short Message Service Cell Broadcast This service is analogous to the Teletext service offered on television It permits a number of unacknowledged general messages to be broadcast to all mobiles in a particular region An electronic circuit that converts the audio signal into data and minimizes the number of bits needed to represent the audio The time delay between a valid trigger event an
261. onfigure 4 62 read only setting on the memory card 8 22 read write setting on the memory card 8 22 recall keys 5 7 receive call keys 5 7 receive pacing setting 4 62 Receive Transmit Pacing 8 6 record size Index 8 for data collection 8 35 Ref Level Spectrum Analyzer Main Controls 4 123 Ref Level Marker To Spectrum Analyzer Marker Controls 4 126 Reference Configure 4 52 reference setting 5 8 reference level RF Input 4 123 reference output option 001 4 51 reference set keys 5 8 Relative MS Timing Err Cell Control 4 43 release keys 5 8 Remote control A 12 ResAIIFS 4 10 4 14 Reset Cell Control 4 43 Oscilloscope Trigger Controls 4 79 reset call count 4 43 cell control 4 29 measurement 4 51 4 76 4 78 SACCH Meas 4 43 ResTypel 4 10 4 14 ResTypela 4 10 4 14 ResTypelIB 4 10 4 14 ResTypell 4 10 4 14 RF analyzer 4 112 RF analyzer screen keys 5 9 RF Anl Ampl Control Cell Control 4 44 RF Cnt Gate CW Meas 4 55 RF generator 4 115 amplitude 4 8 4 12 4 17 4 23 4 37 RF generator screen keys 5 9 RF In Out Configure 4 52 RF Input CW Meas 4 55 RF Analyzer 4 114 Spectrum Analyzer Auxiliary Con trols 4 128 RF Level Offset Configure 4 53 RF Output RF Generator 4 117 RF ovrload message 7 4 RF spectrum measurement 2 20 RFGen Volts Configure 4 52 Rise Pos Pulse 4 105 RJ 11 RS 232 adapter 8 5 RMS Error Phase Freq Multi burst 4 89 RMS Phase Erro
262. ons for the System Bus This feature is not supported in the Agilent 8922S The video output connector connects to the CRT hardware It can be used to connect a larger display VIDEO OUT is always active The Video Out format is a 15 kHz PAL compatible signal System Bus Pin Number Overview Table 2 1 Connectors Signal Descriptions for SYSTEM BUS Signal Descriptions for SYSTEM BUS System Bus Connector Pin Numbers Pin Number 1 Oo CO NT DA NY BY WT bo O ojl u alal AJo NI ej oS 6 18 Signal Name FP_DATA GND RP_GSM_RST_IN DEMOD_CLK RP_GSM_RST_OUT PULSE_MOD_IN RP_DMOD_TRIG RP_BURST_T2 SEQ_TRIG_OUT RP_RX_HOP RP_RST_SEQ_HOP RP_HOP_ADRSO RP_HOP_ADRS2 RP_HOP_ADRS4 RP_HOP_ADRS6 RP_HOP_ADRS8 RP_HOP_ADRS20 RP_RXD GND Pin Number 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Signal Name FP_CLOCK MEAS_TRIG_OUT DEMOD_DATA DEMOD_VALID G_EXT_TRIG_OUT GND RP_BURST_T1 RP_BURST_T3 RP_TX_HOP RP_SEQ_ HOP RP_HOP_INHIBIT RP_HOP_ADRS1 RP_HOP_ADRS3 RP_HOP_ADRS5 RP_HOP_ADRS7 RP_HOP_ADRS9 GND RP_TXD DEMOD_DATA DEMOD_CLK DEMOD_VALID FP_DATA FP_CLOCK NOTE G_EXT_TRIG_ OUT MEAS_TRIG_OUT Connectors Signal Descriptions for SYSTEM BUS DATA Pin 22 CLK Pin 4 VALID Pin 23 Outputs These are the digital demodulation data output signal the digital demodulation clock output signal and the digital demodulation v
263. or RF Analyzer RF Gen 4 115 Service 4 118 SMS cell broadcast 4 119 Spectrum Analyzer Auxiliary Con trols 4 127 Spectrum Analyzer Main Controls 4 122 Spectrum Analyzer Marker Controls 4 125 Spectrum Analyzer RF Gen Controls 4 124 SD 4 4 19 4 25 SD 8 4 19 4 25 Serial Baud 8 6 Configure 4 62 Serial In Configure 4 62 Serial In Field 8 6 serial input port control 4 62 serial interface pin numbers 6 17 Serial Port 8 5 Serial Port Connections 8 5 serial word length 4 59 Service A 12 Configure 4 53 serving cell 4 20 4 26 Settable Cell Configuration 4 21 4 26 Setting Interface Card A 6 setting high limit 5 4 setting low limit 5 5 setting reference 5 8 Setting up the Agilent 8922M A 5 Setting up the HP Agilent 37900D A 6 ShortBurst message 7 4 signaling 4 70 Single Cont Control 4 10 Meas Cntl 4 14 Measurement Sync 4 67 Phase Freq Main 4 87 Phase Freq Multi burst 4 89 single Cont Pulse 4 105 slow associated control channel 4 45 Software A 6 HP Agilent 37900D A 6 HP Agilent 37966B A 6 HP Agilent 37967A A 6 Span Spectrum Analyzer Main Controls 4 123 speaker off 4 6 volume control 4 6 Speaker ALC 4 6 Speaker Vol Audio 4 6 specifications enter into Test Executive 8 33 spectral purity test 3 8 spectrum analyzer cell control 4 29 spectrum analyzer test 3 12 Speech Cell Control 4 7 4 46 Speech Gain Cell Control 4 47 SRAM memory cards con
264. or Pulsed RF g gt eer A 9 N Ko ite A BQ ft gt a 2 4 APLSE gt Z 4 ES 2 cceccegiccosaea ree iN ae 2 faa ia Cn Fase Pa oO See nn ee gt Is an Error Message Displayed in the Sync Status field Making Measurements If You Have Problems with a Measurement The sync status field displays an error message for the following errors e Bad Sync demodulation error perform a Phase Frequency error measurement to identify which of the Sync Status error listed below may be the possible problem e FM Errors see solutions 1 2 3 4 e Short Burst see solutions 1 4 e Level Late see solutions 1 2 3 4 e Level Short see solutions 1 2 3 4 e Low Level see solution 3 e RF Ovrload see solution 3 Burst Definition Meas Cnt Burst Number Burst Type DES Burst Length 14 Midamble Start Bit Position 61 Tris Qual Gay Neas Tris Tris Source E et Burst Typet Tris Delay 0 75 5 T LE RACH 2 15C5 Use Nea 3 RACH Status No Data Bad Sync FM Errors Short Burst Level Late Level Short Low Level RF Ovrload Sync Status Meas Sync Burst Sel Sync Status urst Use FM ErrCount Iris Tining First Bit
265. p Mode Hop and RF Gen Hop Trig Arm and RP_TX_HOP occurs less than 258 us before RP_RX_HOP then Th above doesn t apply Rather the RF Analyzer tune freq will be hopped within Th2 of the RP_TX_HOP 3 When the RF Analyzer should hop before the RF Generator RP_RX_HOP rising edge should lead the RP_TX_HOP rising edge by at least 10 us 4 The RF Analyzer is tuned based on the address on the RP_HOP_ADRSO 10 signals Figure 6 6 RF Analyzer Hop Address Source Ext Timing Diagram 6 31 Connectors Timing Diagrams Inputs Tr RP_SEQ_HOP Results eca RF Generator output freq previous hop freq undef ined next freq Notes 1 This Timing Diagram applies even If RF Analyzer Hop Mode Hop and RF Analyzer Hop Trig Ara 2 The RF Generator Output power can also be pulsed off automatically during hopping by selecting RF Generator Mod Source Pulse Hop Trig Figure 6 7 RF Generator Hop Address Source Int Timing Diagram 6 32 Connectors Timing Diagrams Inputs Tr RP_SEQ_HOP 7 Results Th see Notes 1 8 aa RF Analyzer tune freq previous hop freq undef ined next Freq Notes 1 If RF Gen Hop Mode Hop and RF Gen Hop Trig Ara then Th2 applies instead of Th 2 If the next freq is the same as the currently tuned frequency no hopping witt occur This allows the RF Analyzer to settle longer which is needed for making accurate measurerents 3 RP_HOP_IWHIBIT is assumed to be high he
266. pattern cannot be found in the demodulated burst Possible causes of Bad Syncs are e Power was too low e Demodulation trigger too early or too late e FM bit errors found while synchronizing to desired midamble e RF overload increase RF Analyzer Amplitude setting e No Error appears when no synchronization error occurred This field allows you to set a normal or a tunable reference See Also Screens Configure 4 13 18 0 0 Reference 19 Count or Ratio Type NOTE 21 ppm BE ratios 22 Run Stop Meas Cntl 23 Single Cont Meas Cntl Screens Bit Error 2 This field is used to adjust the reference offset when using the tunable reference This field determines how the frame erasures or cyclic redundancy check CRC errors will be displayed Choices Count displays the number of frame erasures or cyclic redundancy check CRC errors Ratio displays the ratio of frame erasures or cyclic redundancy check CRC errors to total frames This field selects the type of bit error test results to display Res means residual Choices Typela ResTypela TypeIB ResTypeIB Typell ResTypell Typel ResTypel AIFS ResAIIFS Off Intermediate results for measurement type Off will return zeros These fields select the units ppm or for BE Ratios FE or CRC ratios When Count is selected these fields are blank See also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET Run starts a bit error test Th
267. peech through filters Gain control is available in the Speech Gain field DCAM must be off when Cond is selected See Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer None Uncond and Cond are not featured in the Agilent 8922S To hear the demodulated audio from the mobile station go to the Audio screen Under AF Anal In select SpeechOut The audio signal will also be available at the Demodulation Out Mon Speech Out connector Echo causes the Agilent 8922M S to send back the received speech signal to the mobile station The echo delay is the additional delay the Agilent 8922M S inserts before sending back speech to a mobile station PRBS generates a pseudo random bit sequence which is used for making bit error tests When selected a field called PRBS Pattrn is displayed refer to PRBS Pattern field description PRBS is selected automatically when Run is selected on the Bit Error Test screen 4 46 34 Speech Gain NOTE 35 TCH Control 36 TCH Parms 37 Test Screens Cell Control 2 CELL CONTROL 2 Coll Status Connected Coll Counts RE CallertMS RRITCH1 Ciphi Off Pages 0 Decode Errs MM Active RACHS 2 Bad Syncs Partial Adi Cell BSIC RK Levi 8 RK Levi 8 NCC 1 RX Qual 1 ARFCN 20 Boe 5 SO Pinia ie TCH Paras Relative MS Audio Cnil MS Cntl Timing Err Loopback 38 baa 0 25 T Call ARFCN DAI Sianalina Timeslot NS Parns Test Ti 37 42 Normal ype Speech Connect Spe
268. per the other Address Source Int Timing Diagrams 2 RP_HOP_INHIBIT is assumed to be high here Figure 6 10 Reset and Hold Hop Address Source Int Timing Diagram 6 35 Connectors Timing Diagrams Conditions RF Gen Hop Mode Hop RF Gen Hop Trig Ara Hop Address Source Int RP_RST_SEQ_HOP stays TTL HIGH TOR eee RP_SEQ_HOP RP_HOP_INHIBIT see Note 3 Results RF Generator output freq freq N undef ined undefined X freq N 3 undef ined 7 Notes 1 This Timing Diagram applies even tf RF Analyzer Hop Mode Hop and RF Analyzer Hop Trig Ara 2 The RF Generator Output power can also be pulsed off automatically during hopping by setecting RF Generator Mod Source Pulse Hop Trig 3 Note that freq N 2 is NOT hopped to but the hop counter is incremented to N42 4 RF Analyzer hopping is affected similarly by the RP_HOP_INHIBIT signal 5 Assumed here is a sequential hop table Figure 6 11 Hop Inhibit Address Source Int Timing Diagram 6 36 Messages Messages can be reviewed by pressing MEAS SYNC MSSG If you have the Agilent 8922M S Option 010 Multi Band Test System there may be additional error messages Refer to the appropriate Agilent 8922 Multi Band User s Guide for more information 7 1 Messages Communication Failures Communication Failures The following four messages require you to cycle power on the instrument to continue any operation e
269. program is paused e A question mark indicates the program is awaiting user input Three alpha characters are also displayed in the upper right corner of the screen to indicate status e An R indicates the Agilent 8922M S is in remote operation the absence of an R means the Agilent 8922M S has changed to local operation e An T indicates the Agilent 8922M S is talking on the GPIB e An L indicates the Agilent 8922M S is listening on the GPIB Setting Up the Test Execution Conditions Five Test Execution Condition fields are shown in Figure 8 12 on page 8 30 Set up each field according to your testing needs 8 29 Figure 8 12 Instrument BASIC Programming and Using the TESTS Subsystem i TEETS z Fracecare L caij a Librar Proaraa ut itart je EEGEN 1 2 3 5 4 Test Execution Conditions To Have Testing Stop or Continue on a UUT Failure Refer to item 1 in Figure 8 12 on page 8 30 On UUT Failure Continue Testing continues whenever the UUT Unit Under Test fails to meet its test specification limits When this occurs an error is listed on the test results printout and or is displayed on the CRT On UUT Failure Stop Testing stops whenever the UUT fails to meet test specification limits To Continue or Pause After Each Test Refer to item 2 in Figure 8 12 on page 8 30 Run Mode Continuous All tests run in sequence Testing p
270. r Push the card firmly into the slot 3 Rotate the Fuse Pull lever to its normal position Insert a fuse of the correct value in the holder Close the cover door Voltage Selection Card and Fuse Installation Non user replaceable fusing on the secondary of this instrument power supply are Fuse Current Type Volatge Fl 5A F5 0A H 250V F2 3A F3 0A H 250V F3 10A F 10A 32V F4 3A F 3 0A H 250V F5 0 5A F0 5A H 250V F6 3A F3 0A H 250V 1 3 Installing Your Agilent 8922M S Fuses and Power Cords Power Cords Plug Cable p Description Color Location Agilent Part 8120 1351 8120 1703 90 STR B51363A Mint Gray Mint Gray United Kingdom Cyprus Nigeria Rhodesia Singapore 8120 1369 8120 0696 STR STR NZSS198 ASC112 STR 90 STR STR STR 90 Austrailia Gray New Zealand 8120 1689 8120 1692 East and West Europe Saudi Arabia Egypt unpolarized in many nations United States Canada Mexico Philipines Taiwan Jade Gray U S Canada Dark Gray Japan only Dark Gray Japan only Mint Gray Mint Gray 8120 1378 8120 1521 STR STR NEMAS 15P STR 90 Jade Gray Jade Gray 8120 1751 STR STR 8120 4753 STR STA 8120 4754 STR 90 250V 8120 2104 STR STR SEV1011 79 Gray Switzerland 1959 24507 Type 12 8120 2296 STR 90 Gray 8120 3997 STR 90 177 Gray 250V 8120 0698 STR STR
271. r Phase Freq Main 4 87 RS 232 printer 8 31 RS 232 Serial port 8 5 Run Mode Continuous or Single Step 8 30 Run Test 8 15 Run Stop Control 4 10 Meas Cntl 4 14 S SACCH Meas Cell Control 4 45 save keys 5 9 Save Programs On Memory Cards 8 10 scope cell control 4 29 Scope In Audio 4 4 4 75 4 77 4 80 Scope Lvl Oscilloscope Trigger Controls 4 79 Screen Freeze Configure 4 53 screens 4 1 active cell 4 31 Index Audio 4 4 Bit Error 4 8 4 11 Cell Configuration DCS 1800 4 22 Cell Configuration E GSM 4 22 Cell Configuration E GSM900 4 22 Cell Configuration GSM 4 16 Cell Configuration GSM 900 4 16 Cell Configuration PCS 1900 4 22 Cell Control 4 37 Configure 4 49 CW Meas 4 54 Data Bits 4 93 Fast Bit Error 4 56 hopping 4 32 T O Configuration 4 59 Logging 4 63 A 11 main 4 27 4 33 4 35 Measurement Sync 4 64 Message 4 69 Mobile 4 57 Mode 4 57 MS Information Signaling 4 70 Oscilloscope Marker Controls 4 80 Oscilloscope Main Controls 4 75 Oscilloscope Trigger Controls 4 77 Output RF Spectrum Main View 4 82 Output RF Spectrum Trace View 4 84 Phase Err 4 91 Pulse 4 104 Pulse Fall 4 109 Pulse Rise 4 107 Pwr Ramp Fall Edge 4 99 Pwr Ramp Rise Edge 4 95 Pwr Ramp Summary 4 101 Pwr Ramp Top 2 dB 4 97 RF Generator RF Analyzer AF Gen 4 111 RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Ana lyzer 4 112 RF Generat
272. r RF Gen This field selects pulse modulation and triggering When Activated see Screens Cell Configuration these signals are internally generated Choices Off turns pulse modulation off Hop Trig automatically pulses the RF Generator off for one timeslot at a valid hop trigger Ext allows the pulse signal to be input from the MODULATION IN PULSE connector or pin 6 PULSE_MOD_IN on the SYSTEM BUS connector Normal and Ext pulses the RF signal gt 80 dB below the RF Generator Amplitude setting when a TTL low is present And when a TTL high is present the RF Generator output is at the set Amplitude Normal and Hop Trig pulses the RF signal gt 80 dB below the RF Generator Amplitude setting for one timeslot at a hop trigger 30 dB and EXT pulses the RF Generator output 30 dB above the RF Generator Amplitude setting when a TTL high is present And when a TTL low is present the RF Generator output is at the set RF Amplitude 30 dB and Hop Trig pulses the RF Generator output down 30 dB to the set Amplitude for one timeslot on a hop trigger This field selects the RF output port Choices Range RF IN OUT AUX RF OUT RF IN OUT 127 0 to 7 0 dBm AUX RF OUT 127 0 to 10 0 dBm 4 117 Screens Service Service GERY CGE Voltouw iW i Preaguanc kaz 0 00031 0 69551 Yali ler Contec aan gunker Connect con LAF Pan imi inlire This screen is documented in the service documentation
273. r an MS mobile station obtained IMSI into this field make a MS originated call then select Set Paging IMSI Alternatively set IMSI Attach Detach to On before the mobile phone camps to the Agilent 8922M S You can also enter the IMSI number manually This field allows the user to modify the BS PA MFRMS field in the Control Channel Information Element of the System Information Type 3 message The purpose of this field is to specify the multiframe period for transmission of Paging Request Messages Range 2 to 9 4 72 14 Power Class 15 TMSI On Off 16 Set Paging IMSI 17 Reallocation 18 TMSI Number Screens MS Information Signaling This field displays the power class of the mobile station as sent by the mobile station during a call This number will correspond with a maximum power level the mobile station is allowed to transmit When On is selected the Agilent 8922M S will attempt to identify the mobile station by its TMSI Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity number A random TMSI number is generated for reallocation to a mobile station The random TMSI number is displayed in the TMSI Number field The TMSI is checked as part of the call setup process During an initial call setup with a mobile station the TMSI will have to be assigned to the mobile station by the Agilent 8922M S This assigned TMSI is then expected by the Agilent 8922M S during subsequent call setups as long as a TMSI is used and the IMSI remai
274. r program to provide operator input during the test to change parameters Controlling HP 8922M S Functions Controlling Connected Instruments NOTE NOTE Instrument BASIC Configuration and Instrument Control Configuration and Instrument Control The Agilent 8922M S s IBASIC computer acts much like a system controller connected by a GPIB cable to the Agilent 8922M S but instead of a cable the Agilent 8922M S has its own internal control bus connected to the IBASIC controller The internal bus address is 8xx xx is any valid GPIB address When you write programs to run on the Agilent 8922M S s IBASIC computer to address Agilent 8922M S functions you must use the 8xx address to output commands For example if you want a program in the IBASIC computer to reset the Agilent 8922M S at the start of a test procedure the program code to do this would be written OUTPUT 814 RST When the Agilent 8922M S s GPIB Mode field on the I O Configure screen is set to Control it takes on the role of system controller This allows it to control other test instruments connected by GPIB cables Instruments controlled by the Agilent 8922M S use the normal 7xx GPIB address prefix For example if two Agilent 8922M S s are used in a test system and the second instrument s GPIB address is 715 a program running in the controlling Agilent 8922M S would output the command OUTPUT 715 RST to reset the control
275. rature 40 to 70 C Humidity Up to 95 Relative Humidity to 40 C Altitude up to 4600 m 15 000 feet The following power requirements are for mains connected equipment unless otherwise stated Power 100 120 220 240 Vac 48 to 440 Hz 10 of line voltage maximum 450 VA EMC Refer to the front section of this User s Guide for more information Supplemental Characteristics At RF Generator output levels lt 40 dBm typical leakage is lt 1 WV Leakage induced in a resonant dipole antenna 1 inch away from any surface except the rear panel WARNING For continued protection against fire hazard replace the line fuse only with the same type and line rating F 2 5A H 250V for 220 240V operation or F 5 0A H 250V for 100 120V operation The use of other fuses or materials is prohibited WARNING Shock hazard No operator serviceable parts inside Service by qualified personal only Cleaning To clean the instrument use a soft clean damp cloth to clean the front panel and covers 3 28 Operating Environment CAUTION CAUTION WARNING WARNING Lifting or Carrying the instrument Verifying Performance Agilent Technologies 8922M S Specifications This instrument is designed for indoor use only If the instrument is subjected to Agilent Class B condensation it is recommended that the instrument be powered up for at least 30 minutes before normal operation This instrument is designed for use in Install
276. re Figure 6 8 RF Analyzer Hop Address Int Timing Diagram 6 33 Connectors Timing Diagrams Conditions Hop Address Source Int and lt RF Gen Hop Mode Hop and RF Gen Hop Trig Ara J and or E RF Analyzer Hop Mode Hop and RF Analyzer Hop Trig Are Inputs RP_SEQ_HOP RP_RST_SEQ_HOP Results RESET occurs ae RF Generator or RF Analyzer next freq oe O n Notes 1 Tw and Tr for RP_SEQ_HOP as well as Th or Th2 apply as per the other Address Source Int Timing Diagrams 2 Note that RP_RST_SEQ_HOP is not required to be TTL LOW at the actual RP_SEQ_HOP rising edge in order to cause RESET RP_RST SEQ_HOP is only required to nave gone TIL LOW Tsr after the previous RP_SEQ_HOP rising edge and RP_RST_SEQ HOP must be TIL LOW For at least Tw 3 RP_HOP_INHIBIT is assumed to be high here Figure 6 9 Reset Hop Once Address Source Int Timing Diagram 6 34 Connectors Timing Diagrams Conditions Hop Address Source Int and RF Gen Hop Mode Hop and RF Gen Hop Trig Ara J and or C RF Analyzer Hop Mode Hop and RF Analyzer Hop Trig Arm J Inputs RP_SEQ_HOP RP_RST_SEQ_HOP Results RESET occurs m undefined frqtadrs A Y undefined ku ro k n ema anon Cr a RESET occurs RF Generator or RF analyzer undef ined next freq frqtadrs B Notes 1 Tw and Tr for RP_SEQ_HOP as well as Th or Th2 apply as
277. reen Select the LATCH field and find the selection labeled g_ext_trig_ enable SERV LATCH SEL g_ext_trig_enable Enter a 1 in the VALUE field SERV LATCH VAL 1 Select the LATCH field and find the selection labeled g_ext_trig SERV LATCH SEL g_ext_trig Enter the TIMESLOT and BITPOSITION on which you want the trigger to occur Example 432 hex is TIMESLOT 4 BITPOSITION 32 hex The maximum TIMESLOT 7 and the maximum BITPOSI TION 9C hex Bit 0 157 2 42 Making Measurements Advanced Features NOTE The GPIB requires the use of base 10 values 432h 1074d for example SERV LATCH VAL 1074 The value entered is relative to the beginning of the zero bit of the zero slot on the downlink baseband A 4 7 bit modulator delay occurs between the baseband and the RF domain which must also be taken into account Since the value may only be integer round to the nearest whole value The following timing error is introduced due to 156 157 bit timing Timeslot 0 4 No Error Timeslot 1 5 75 bit error early trigger Timeslot 2 6 50 bit error Timeslot 3 7 25 bit error 2 Use MEAS_TRIG_OUT on the rear panel SYSTEM_BUS connector This is the delayed trigger from the Measurement System In the normal ACTIVATED operation the Protocol Processor sends triggers to the Measurement System on the zero bit of each downlink TCH burst The Measurement System applies the Meas Trig Trigger Delay to this inpu
278. reen choices e The Edit Sequence screen lets you select the desired test s from the full set of available tests in the default Procedure file e The Edit Specifications screen defines the specifications used to generate pass fail messages during testing e The Edit Parameters screen is used to define instrument settings and characteristics to match those of the radio being tested audio load impedance audio power power supply voltage etc e The Edit Configuration screen identifies all connected GPIB equipped instruments and their GPIB addresses e The Procedure Manager screen is used to make or delete Procedures 8 28 IBASIC Programming Instrument BASIC Programming and Using the TESTS Subsystem IBASIC gives you control over the internal functionality of the Agilent 8922M S as well as control over any external instruments connected to the GPIB Refer to the Agilent 8922M S Agilent Instrument BASIC Programmer s Guide for details about IBASIC The manual contains important information about the IBASIC programming language code Test Procedure and Test Library file structures and programming and interfacing techniques Program Status A single character run indicator is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen to indicate program status e If the screen is blank the program is stopped e An asterisk indicates the program is running or doing other input output e A dash indicates the
279. reens CW Measurement This field displays the measured CW power This measurement is valid only for non pulsed signals at the front panel RF IN OUT connector This measurement is made at the frequency entered in the Frequency field See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG METER Units This field sets the frequency of the signal to be measured It needs to be within 500 kHz to ensure the correct readings of amplitude 3 and frequency 2 In the GSM band the value that is entered should be set to the nearest 100 kHz Selecting Meas Reset will erase any accumulated measurements used for calculating a final result and re start the measurement process for the following functions e HI LIMIT e LOLIMIT e AVG This field resets the AF Analyzer measurements See Also Keys HIGH LIMIT LO LIMIT AVG This field zeros the power meter RF power must be disconnected from the RF IN OUT port when executing this function This field sets the frequency counter s gate time Range 0 11 seconds to 1 second This field selects the front panel RF input for the RF analyzer Choices RF IN OUT AUX RF IN 4 55 1 Amplitude Base Station 2 BE Ratio 3 BE Ratio Count 4 Data Format Screens Fast Bit Error Fast Bit Error 3 13 x Sa Ni FAST BIT sk SRE Ratio El 0 07 RX Qual 1 RX Lew 8 1 0 2 to 0 44 BER Tee MOBILE REPORTS t 103 to 102 dEn Intermedi
280. result and re start the measurement process for the following functions e HI LIMIT e LOLIMIT e AVG This field resets the AF Analyzer measurements See Also Keys HIGH LIMIT LO LIMIT AVG This field selects the Speaker ALC mode ON maintains the speaker output at a constant amplitude for audio signals of different levels OFF allows the audio signal tone level to determine the speaker output Speaker ALC is not featured in the Agilent 8922S This field turns the Speaker Volume off or directs control to the front panel volume control POT selects front panel volume control knob OFF turns the speaker off Speaker Vol is not featured in the Agilent 8922S 4 6 13 Speech NOTE NOTE Screens Audio This field selects the speech mode Choices None Uncond unconditioned activates the MODULATION IN AM SPEECH connector on the front panel but the speech signal is not conditioned by filters and no gain control is provided Cond conditioned activates the MODULATION IN AM SPEECH connector on the front panel and conditions speech through filters Gain control is available in the Speech Gain field DCAM must be off when Cond is selected See Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer To hear the demodulated audio from the mobile station go to the Audio screen Under AF Anal In select SpeechOut The audio signal will also be available at the Demodulation Out Mon Speech Out connector Echo causes the Agilent 8922M S to send
281. rizontal divisions to be displayed previous to the trigger point The trigger point is indicated by small pointers that appear at the top and bottom of the graticule This field specifies whether triggering occurs on the trigger signal s positive going Pos or negative going Neg slope 4 78 Screens Oscilloscope Trigger Controls 10 Reset This field is used to arm a sweep trigger when Single is selected 11 Scope Lvl This field selects the trigger source Choices Scope Lvl uses the input signal level for triggering External uses the front panel MEASURE TRIGGER IN signal for triggering 4 79 Screens Oscilloscope Marker Controls Oscilloscope Marker Controls r OSCILLOSCOPE Marker Tine EE 10 00 Lvl E 0 08964 r T E E E T E E 1 AF Anl In This field selects the AF analyzer input Choices Scope In selects the SCOPE IN MEASURE front panel connector Speech Out selects the signal going to the MON SPEECH DEMODULATION OUT front panel connector AM Mod In selects the INAM SPEECH MODULATION front panel connector Speech In selects the IN AM SPEECH MODULATION front panel connector FM Demod selects the FM demodulation discriminator Pls Demod selects the pulse demodulation detector Audio In selects the IN AUDIO front panel connector Audio Out selects the signal going to the AUDIO OUT front panel connector NOTE Scope In AM Mod In and Speech In are not featured in the
282. rmware Configure 4 50 Firmware Error 7 3 firmware revision date 4 50 First bit Measurement Sync 4 66 Flatness Pwr Ramp Summary 4 102 Flush Log A 11 Logging A 11 FM Demod Audio 4 4 4 75 4 77 4 80 FM error message 7 4 FM Errors Measurement Sync 4 66 form feed for test results printout 8 35 T O configuration 4 60 frame erasure 4 9 4 12 Frame Errors Cell Control 4 39 frame errors call counts 4 31 4 39 Freq Offs Output RF Spectrum Main View 4 82 Frequency AF Generator 4 111 RF Analyzer 4 113 RF Generator 4 116 Spectrum Analyzer RF Gen Controls 4 124 frequency bit error ratio 4 5 CW 4 54 Index 3 Index frequency analyzer test 3 10 Frequency Error Phase Freq 4 86 Phase Freq Multi burst 4 89 frequency error continuous wave 4 54 frequency error measurement 2 15 frequency generator test 3 9 frequency offset output RF spectrum 4 82 spectrum analyzer 4 123 frequency span spectrum analyzer 4 123 fuse 1 3 FW Revision Configure 4 50 G Gl keys 5 11 G2 keys 5 11 G3 keys 5 11 gate time RF Analyzer 4 55 global G1 G2 G3 keys 5 3 global keys 5 11 GMSK RF Generator 4 116 GMSK modulation test RF analyzer 3 11 signal generator 3 9 GPIB address 8 35 instruments on the 700 bus 8 35 GPIB address 3 6 keys 5 3 selecting 4 60 GPIB Adrs 8 5 Configure 4 60 GPIB command syntax 8 3 GPIB Control A 12 GPIB Mode Control 8
283. rnal Input Supplemental Characteristics Minimum Resolution Verifying Performance Agilent Technologies 8922M S Specifications DC to 25 kHz 0 025 of setting 0 1 Hz 0 1 mV to 4 Vims 20 mA peak lt 1Q 2 of setting resolution 0 1 20 Hz to 25 kHz in 80 kHz BW Level 0 01 V 50LV Level 0 1 V 0 5 mV Level lt 1V 5 mV Level gt 1V 50 mV lt 50 mV Frequency Measurement 20 Hz to 400 kHz 0 02 1 count reference accuracy 20 MV ms to 30 Vims f lt 10kHz 0 01 Hz f lt 100kHz 0 1 Hz f 100kHz 1 Hz 3 25 Verifying Performance Agilent Technologies 8922M S Specifications AC Voltage Measurement Voltage Range Accuracy 20 Hz to 15 kHz Input gt 1 MV ms Residual Noise THD 15 kHz BW Supplemental Characteristics 3 dB Bandwidth Input Impedance Minimum Resolution 0 V to 30 Vms 3 of reading 175 uV 2 Hz to 100 kHz 1 MQ 145 pF at AUDIO IN 4 digits for inputs gt 100mV 3 digits for inputs lt 100 mV DC Voltage Measurement Voltage Range 100 mV to 42 V Accuracy 1 0 of reading DC Offset DC Offset 45 mV Supplemental Characteristics Minimum Resolution 1 0mV Distortion Measurement Fundamental Frequency 1 kHz 5 Hz Input Level Range 30 MV ms to 30 Vims Display Range 0 1 to 100 Accuracy 1 dB 0 5 to 100 distortion Residual THD noise 15 kHz BW Supplemental Characteristics Minimum Resolution The greater of 6
284. roblems Messages This field displays the average transmitted power over the useful bits in the measured burst It is measured from the center of the first useful bit to the center of the last useful bit This measurement is only available when using the RF IN OUT port See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG Units This field displays any errors that occurred while trying to synchronize to the demodulated data During multi burst measurement this field indicates the measurement progress When the measurement is complete the SyncStatus is displayed See Also Making Measurements Solving Problems Messages These fields select the time relative to the center of bit zero the amplitude will be measured on the amplitude envelope Bit zero is the first useful bit in the measured burst Range 50 0 to 593 0 us This field sets the time delay between a valid trigger event and the beginning of a measurement Range 0 to 5000 00 us 4 102 9 View 10 ZeroPower Screens Pwr Ramp Summary This field selects alternate views of the measurement Choices Rise Edge Top 2 dB Fall Edge Summary If you have option 006 installed you also have access to the following e Pulse e Puls Rise e Puls Fall This field zeros the power meter RF power must be disconnected from the RF IN OUT port when executing this function 4 103 1 Amplitude 2 Fall Pos 3 Meas Frequency 10 28 000000 Screens Pwr Ramp
285. s the same paging mode as last indicated 4 TMST reallocation in the Agilent 8922M S uses the two 2 octet TMSI size 5 The Agilent 8922M S does not turn off the transmitter during DTX when the voice activity detector VAD determines that there is no speech input present Instead the Agilent 8922M S sends a silence descriptor SID on every speech frame 6 USE MEM is not intended to be used with Pulse Pulse ON OFF Ratio measurements do not select USE MEM after making a pulse measurement 7 During a Pulse Pulse ON OFF Ratio measurement the following message can occur if the device under test is generating a larger signal than is expected RF Overpower occurred during Pulse On Off Ratio measurement This message cannot be queried via GPIB Use the Hardware Status Register Bit 5 to detect this condition when doing pulse measurements Option 006 spectrum analyzer must be installed to make pulse measurements 8 The Output RF Spectrum measurement and Pulse On Off Rise and Fall measurement results shown on the Main view screens are not accessible via GPIB or IBASIC These measurement results are available on the Trace view screens All GPIB and IBASIC actions with these fields refer to those fields shown on the Trace view screens 2 44 9 10 11 Making Measurements Advanced Features The RF Generator may become uncalibrated in a hopping situation when the last CW frequency setting was outside the GSM or DCS ban
286. s RF IN OUT Manual requires setting the RF Analyzer amplitude using the front panel keys This field is displayed only when AGC Mode is closed When selected the correct Open Auto DAC Value for the signal input using the present RF Analyzer setting is entered in the Open Auto Dac Value field A stable repeating RF signal is required for open loop calibration Doing an open loop calibration is useful for establishing an AGC DAC Value to be used when AGC Mode is Open See Also Screens RF Analyzer AGC Mode Open Auto DAC Value This field sets Frequency when RF Analyzer Hop Mode is set to Non Hop Range 10 0 to 1015 0 MHz This is the frequency entry field for the frequency assumed when making measurements while the RF Analyzer is frequency hopping This field selects between the Hop and Non Hop modes of the RF Analyzer Hop Mode cannot be set to Non Hop until Hop Trig is set to Disarm Do not make measurements with Hop Mode set to Hop and Hop Trig set to Disarm This field sets the Hop Offset when the RF Analyzer Hop Mode is set to Hop The frequency offset is applied to all of the frequencies in the RF Analyzer Hop Frequency table when the RF Analyzer is hopping Range 50 000 to 50 000 kHz 4 113 10 Hop Trig NOTE 11 Open Auto DAC Value 12 RF Input Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Analyzer This field selects whether the RF Analyzer is armed or disarmed to accept a hop trigger Hop Trig cannot
287. se error RMS phase error of the errors of each in any of the error in any last burst burst bursts of the bursts Frequency Mean of the MostPositive Most Frequency frequency errors of each burst frequency error in any of the bursts Negative frequency error in any of the bursts error of the last burst Single allows one test to be performed Cont allows testing to automatically repeat 4 89 8 Sync Status 9 Trig Delay 10 View NOTE 11 Wanted Screens Phase and Frequency Error Multi burst ON This field displays any errors that occurred while trying to synchronize to the demodulated data See Also Making Measurements Solving Problems Messages This field sets the time delay between a valid trigger event and the beginning of a measurement Range 0 to 5000 00 us This field selects alternate views of the measurement Selecting any of these alternate views displays information relating to the Last Burst Only Choices Phase Err Data Bits This field defines the number of bursts to be measured during a measurement cycle The default value is 10 Range 1 to 999 4 90 NOTE 1 Bursts 2 Marker 3 Marker Pos Screens Phase Freq Phase Err Phase Freq Phase Err r PHASE ERROR HOF ft Phase Err 2 53 Bursts 10 1 E dee VW SyncStatus Ir i i wt L No Error 5 MOBILE jee Chan on qanl TR Lev lal i AO Tineslot
288. ss the following keys to do this D MS INFO e Move the cursor to the Paging IMSI field and enter the IMSI using the numeric data entry keypad CND ORG CALL Performing a location update from the MS INFO screen allows the Agilent 8922M S to update the IMSI This can be done by either e changing the Current location parameters and waiting for the mobile phone to re camp e setting IMSI Attach Detach to On before powering on the phone When the phone camps its IMSI is set on the MS INFO screen and a call can be made from the Agilent 8922M S Changing Channel Timeslot and the Transmit Level You can alter the parameters of the call before the call has been set up or during a call They are displayed on the right hand side of the screen under MOBILE PHONE 4 see Figure 2 2 on page 2 6 The parameters are e Channel e Transmit Level TX Level Timeslot Channel To change channel highlight the field and enter a new channel number from the keypad There is no interruption of communication between the Agilent 8922M S and the mobile phone For additional information on valid Absolute RF Channel Numbers ARFCNs consult the specifications in Chapter 3 TX Level This is a coded number used by the Agilent 8922M S to command the mobile phone to transmit at a particular power When the TX Level is changed two things happen e The mobile phone should change its transmitted power e The Amplitude field in the Expe
289. synchronization occurrences since the last reset See Also Cell Control 2 This field indicates the burst type Random Access Channel RACH or the Traffic Channel TCH and Colour Code of the expected signal This field displays the channel number the Agilent 8922M S is taking measurements from For a GSM900 mobile phone the channel number may vary from 1 through 124 For an E GSM mobile phone the channel number may vary from 0 through 124 and 975 through 1023 If you change the channel number the frequency field value also changes The converse of this is not the case You may enter anon GSM standard frequency on another screen this value must be between 10 MHz to 1000 MHz This field indicates the number of decode errors since the last Reset See Also Cell Control 2 4 31 5 Single Hop Screens Cell Control Active Cell This field selects whether communication between the Agilent 8922M S and the mobile phone will be on one channel only or hopping across channels The channels it will hop across is defined on the Cell Config screen The channel field displays MAI or MA2 The Cell Config screen displays the channels to be included in hopping in the MA1 and MA2 areas See Also Cell Config MA1 MA2 4 32 1 GSM900 E GSM DCS1800 PCS1900 2 Active Cell TestMode C W Generator Cell Control Test Mode TRAFFIC Channel Tineslot BCCH ONLY CONTROL Screens Cell Control Test Mode MEASUREMEN
290. t 8922M or Agilent 8922S by following the instructions in the following section titled Using the Compatibility Switch Forward Conversion Back Conversion To turn the instrument from the Agilent 8922M S back to an Agilent 8922G or an Agilent 8922E select the following keys e CONFIG this is accessible from the Cell Control screen in the bottom right hand corner e Compatible select 8922G or 8922E e HP IB Adrs 22 The instrument is now set up as an Agilent 8922G or Agilent 8922E and ready for Performance Verification testing To Configure the GPIB Addresses To Run the Program Verifying Performance Installing and Operating the Software Forward Conversion To return the instrument from an Agilent 8922G back to an Agilent 8922M or an Agilent 8922E to an Agilent 8922S select the following keys e More this is accessible from the Cell Control screen in the bottom right hand corner Scroll down the list and select CONFIG e Compatible select 8922M or 8922S e HP IB Adrs 14 The instrument is returned to an Agilent 8922M or Agilent 8922S 1 With the program loaded type EDIT DEFAULT_ADDRESS press CENTER Modify each line to indicate the proper instrument address 700 730 N It is now possible to re store the program as PT_8922 or store it under a different name 1 Type RUN press CENTER 2 Follow the directions as they appear on the screen Notes on Running the Program The first screen w
291. t PH PH_DATA SACCH_TF UI PO CR1 SAPIO MO RR System Information Type 6 Frame 2448976 RR gt DL DL_RELEASE FACCH_F Frame 2448978 DL gt RR DL_RELEASE FACCH_F Frame 2448978 RR gt DL DL_RELEASE SACCH_TF Frame 2448978 DL gt RR DL_RELEASE SACCH_TF Frame 2448978 PH gt DL PH_CONNECT FACCH _F Frame 2448982 PH gt DL PH_CONNECT SACCH_TF Frame 2448982 PH gt DL MPH_ACCESS RACH Frame 2448987 DL gt RR MDL_ACCESS RACH Frame 2448988 RR gt DL DL_UNIT_DATA FACCH_F RR Physical Information 06 2d 00 Frame 2448988 DL gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2448988 DL gt PH PH_DATA FACCH_F UI PO CR1 SAPIO MO RR Physical Information Frame 2448988 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2448997 RR gt DL DL_UNIT_DATA FACCH_F RR Physical Information 06 2d 00 Frame 2448998 DL gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2448998 DL gt PH PH_DATA FACCH_F UI PO CR1 SAPIO MO RR Physical Information Frame 2448998 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2449006 RR gt DL DL_UNIT_DATA FACCH_F RR Physical Information 06 2d 00 Frame 2449009 DL gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2449009 DL gt PH PH_DATA FACCH_F UI PO CR1 SAPIO MO RR Physical Information Frame 2449009 PH gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2449014 RR gt DL DL_UNIT_DATA FACCH_F RR Physical Information 06 2d 00 A 20 APPENDIX A Protocol Log of a Typical Call Frame 2449020 DL gt DL READY_TO_SEND FACCH_F Frame 2449020 DL gt PH PH_DATA FACCH_F UI PO CR1 SAPIO MO RR Physical Information Fram
292. t and then after the elapsed time begins making its measurement After this elapsed time the Measurement System also sends a trigger transition to the MEAS_TRIG_OUT signal on the rear panel SYSTEM_BUS connector The trigger is only generated when a measurement is being made This signal may be used to trigger an externally connected measurement device such as the HP Agilent 71150 250 GSM high performance spectrum analyzers 2 43 Unexpected Operations NOTE Making Measurements Advanced Features These are descriptions of operations which may be unclear to the user as to how they occurred These are NOT defects 1 The Agilent 8922M S occasionally sends ABORTS to the attached protocol mon itor These ABORTS are normal and logging data is not lost 2 Inthe FA and SD 4 FA control channel configurations the Agilent 8922M S sends speech frames rather than fill frames on the FACCH when there is nothing else to send 3 The DRX ON mode corresponds to the NORMAL paging mode The Agilent 8922M S sends continuous paging mode NORMAL on the idle PCH blocks The DRX OFF mode corresponds to the REORGANIZE paging mode The Agilent 8922M S sends continuous paging mode REORGANIZE on the idle PCH blocks When in the REORGANIZE paging mode the Agilent 8922M S is guaranteed to page on a random PCH block which is not the block expected in the NORMAL paging mode The active PCH block will page the MS with the paging mode set to SAME The SAME mode mean
293. t position of a user defined synchronization pattern Range 0 to 147 This field displays problems that were detected during digital demodulation or DSP analyzer measurements See Also Making Measurements Solving Problems Messages This field sets the time delay between a valid trigger event and the beginning of a measurement Range 0 to 5000 00 us This field selects whether a trigger qualifier will be used Choices Normal no trigger qualifier is used RF Power trigger events will only be valid when RF power is detected at the selected input If no RF Power is present at the time of the trigger the measurement will re arm after seven timeslots If no measurements are being made while in continuous Cont check Trig Qual see Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer If it is set to RF Power change it to Normal This field selects the source of the trigger When Activated see Screens Cell Configuration triggers for digital demodulation are generated internally Choices Ext Demod selects triggering through RP_DMOD_TRIG on the rear panel SYSTEM BUS CONNECTOR RF Rise selects triggering when the rising edge of an RF signal is detected RF Rise is used with pulsed RF input signals Ext Meas selects triggering through the MEASURE TRIGGER IN front panel connector 4 68 Screens Message Message ar Scaae Praga FREY La ratura 1o thi Brey loud dora Pladde aait for Baia Stardom coed Leerandan ta coee lave tias SPSL ma
294. t used Press SHIFT 1 HI LIMIT ress GOFF This key is used to retain measurement results by stopping swept or continuously updated measurements This key is used to adjust the increment value by a factor of 10 To display the increment value press INCR SET This key is used to adjust the increment value by a factor of x10 To display the increment value press INCR SET 12 INCR SET 13 LO LIMIT 14 MEAS ARM Keys Function Keys This key is used to display or set the increment value 1 Press HOREET 2 Enter an increment value using the DATA keys This key is used if you want to be alerted when a measurement is less than a specified value To Set a Low Limit e Position the cursor at the measurement field of your choice e Press e Press J LO LIMIT e Enter the value you want the lower limit to be e Press or a units key A LO or L annunciator will appear If a limit is exceeded during a measurement a beep will sound the beeper ON OFF control can be found in the Configure screen and Measurement low limit exceeded will be displayed The LO annunciator will also flash as long as the measurement is displayed To Turn Off or On a Low limit When a limit is turned off its value is retained but is not used e Press e Press J LO LIMIT e Press This key is used to arm a one time only Meas Trig Single measurement After MEAS ARM is pressed the instrument will wait
295. ta See Also Making Measurements Solving Problems Messages This field sets the time delay between a valid trigger event and the beginning of a measurement Range 0 to 5000 00 us This field selects the alternate Views of the Pulse On Off Ratio measurement Choices Rise Edge Top 2 dB Fall Edge Summary 4 110 1 Amplitude 2 Coupling 3 Frequency Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer AF Gen RF Generator RF Analyzer AF Gen GENERATOR 7 RF AHALYIEE 45 Bad S9urce RE ben AF Gen Hor Lontral m i EE Ger Fraqueecy a0 jLude i E E Qutmut Alien Hold EF Analy BF Anglvzer er Ham Ditaet Raalituda HIC Badi lren uta DAC Folue This field is the AF Generator Audio Out amplitude setting Range 0 0 mV rms to 8 84 V rms This field selects ac or dc coupling of the AF Generator Audio Out signal This field is the AF Generator Audio Out Frequency setting Range dc to 30 kHz 4 111 1 Accuracy 2 AGC Mode Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Analyzer RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Analyzer RF Gen Frequency MHz RF Output RF IN OUT RF Gen Anplitude dBi Atten Hold 6 9 12 RF Analyzer Hop Offset P0000 kHz LRF Input RF Analyzer Anplitude 13 0 Mod Source AGC AGC Mode Open Auta DAC Value 34 11 2 RF GENERATOR Z RF ANALYZER _ R
296. tain a battery 8 23 initializing 8 21 write protection 8 22 Static Random Access Memory SRAM memory cards 8 21 Status Digital Demod 4 67 Stop Length 8 6 Configure 4 62 Stop logging A 10 sweep time oscilloscope 4 76 sweep trigger arming 4 79 Sync Mode Measurement Sync 4 67 Sync Pattern Start Position Measurement Sync 4 67 4 68 Sync Status Measurement Sync 4 68 Output RF Spectrum Main View 4 82 Output RF Spectrum Trace View 4 85 Phase Freq Data Bits 4 94 Phase Freq Main 4 87 Phase Freq Multi burst 4 90 Phase Freq Phase Err 4 92 Pulse 4 105 Pulse Fall 4 110 Index 9 Index Pulse Rise 4 108 Pwr Ramp Fall Edge 4 100 Pwr Ramp Rise Edge 4 96 Pwr Ramp Summary 4 102 Pwr Ramp Top 2 dB 4 98 sync status message 7 4 what to do 2 30 synchronization errors DSP Analyzer 4 96 4 98 4 100 4 102 measurement synchronization 4 68 output RF spectrum 4 82 Output RF Spectrum Trace View 4 85 Phase Freq 4 94 pulse fall 4 110 pulse on off ratio 4 105 pulse rise 4 108 synchronization mode measurement synchronization 4 67 system bus 6 18 pin number overview 6 18 signal descriptions 6 18 system information A 10 T Talk amp Listn mode 4 60 TCH Control Cell Control 4 47 TCH parameters 4 47 TCH Parms Cell Control 4 47 Test Cell Control 4 47 test equipment 3 4 Test Execution Conditions 8 29 Test Executive parameters 8 34 specifications 8 33 test sequ
297. ted to the reference circuitry This connector is the main timebase reference input Normally it is connected to Option 001 REF OUT if option 001 is installed using an Agilent supplied short jumper cable RF IN can also be connected to a user provided 1 2 5 10 or 13 MHz reference by selecting the appropriate frequency from the Reference field on the Configure screen If RF IN is left unconnected the internal timebase will not be locked to any external reference See Also Screens Configure Specifications This connector is used in conjunction with the HP Agilent 83220A and HP Agilent 83220E DCS PCS Test Sets Refer to either the HP Agilent 83220A or HP Agilent 83220E User s Guides for further information 12 SERIAL PORT 13 SYSTEM BUS NOTE 14 VIDEO OUT Connectors Rear Panel Connectors of the Agilent Technologies 8922M S The serial interface port is a multipin connector It is connected to the main microprocessor It is used to connect a terminal to develop IBASIC programs locally without an external GPIB controller It can also be used for printing the contents of the display SERIAL PORT is always active Specifications Baud Rates 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 Reserved r Transmit g Ground B No Connect Receive Reserved The system bus connector is used to externally control frequency hopping and contains duplications of several individual connectors See Also Signal Descripti
298. ter I F None Memory Size 32K Plotter I F None HP Mode Yes Video Type Select your display type Forms Path Enter path if used Screen Size Enter the size Set the Terminal Configuration settings lt e ten esoon FT Ro ae moan of Terminal ID 2392A Local Echo OFF CapsLock OFF Start Col 01 Bell ON XmitFnctn A NO SPOW B NO InhEolWrp C NO Line Page D LINE InhHndShk G No Inh DC2 H NO Esc Xfer N YES ASCII 8 Bits YES FldSeperator US BlkTerminator RS ReturnDef CR Copy Fields Type Ahead No ROW Size 80 Host Prompt Character D1 Horiz Scrolling Increment 08 Large Key Set the Remote Configuration settings Sr Pmeonae oe f Baud Rate 4800 Parity Data Bits None 8 Eng Ack No Asterisk OFF Chk Parity NO SR CH LO Recv Pace None Xmit Pace None CS CB Xmit No Instrument BASIC Configuration and Instrument Control Verifying Serial Port 1 Access the Agilent 8922M S s TESTS screen to IBASIC Operation 2 Select IBASIC from the Test Function field to access the IBASIC Controller screen 3 Position the cursor in the top left corner of the screen The top of the screen contains two command lines for entering commands and editing code Type SCRATCH ENTER Note this clears any existing programs in memory Type 10 PRINT HELLO WORLD ENTER Type 20 END ENTER Press on the Agilent 8922M S or type RUN on your terminal to run this two l
299. tered for Trigger Delay The value 473 4T is derived from the 468 75 bits of delay between downlink and uplink plus the 4 7 bits of modula tion delay inside the Agilent 8922M S All timing is refer enced to the beginning of bit zero on the downlink TCH timeslot DCH or BCCH timeslot if TCH is not active When the RF Generator is set to a high level relative to the analyzer RF input some error may be introduced in the analyzer s power detector This is due to the isolation limits between generator and analyzer on the RF IN OUT port This only occurs when the RF Generator and RF Analyzer share the RF IN OUT port If the RF Generator uses the AUX RF OUT port no error occurs i 2 AEs 10 10 Error 10LOG 10 10 RFin 20 dBm RFin is the amplitude in dBm of the signal into the RF IN OUT port Normally the setting in dBm of the RF Analyzer Amplitude RF gen is the setting in dBm of the RF Generator Because the two components are not always in phase the actual error will often be slightly less 2 40 Making Measurements Advanced Features Power Ramp Setting The mobile transmitter output ramp should settle so that it complies with the power Time Peak Carrier Power Measurement Assumptions And Algorithm mask GSM Rec 11 10 by the time output level calibration is done in the manufacturing process The power mask is displayed in the Power Ramp screens Peak Carrier Power measurement method is not made to GSM
300. ternally control when the amplitude is pulsed ON TTL HIGH or OFF TTL LOW It also pulses the envelope up TTL HIGH and down TTL LOW when in 30 dB Pulse mode This connector can be used in combination with AM MODULATION IN to generate pulsed and or shaped amplitude envelopes of different levels for each RF generator pulse in real time PULSE MODULATION IN is selected when the RF generator s modulation source Pulse field is set to Ext This connector is connected directly in parallel with PULSE_MOD_IN on the SYSTEM BUS connector The two inputs are directly coupled to each other Avoid putting signals on both inputs simultaneously Requirements High drive requirements 100 WA Low drive requirements 1 mA TTL HIGH On or Higher Level TTL LOW Off or Lower Level See Also Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer Mod Source Specifications Signal Descriptions for the System Bus The RF input output is connected to the input section to the RF analyzer and the RF generator s step attenuators It is the main device under test DUT connection for the radio s RF signals It is normally used for transceiver testing This connector is not reverse power protected but can handle high power levels for extended periods of time because there is a temperature sensor for this signal If you have the Agilent 8922M S Option 010 Multi Band Test System do not connect the mobile to this port This is connector is selected when the RF generator s
301. test procedure To add tests select the following keys according to the labelled steps in Figure 8 15 on page 8 34 1 Press or select Insrt Stp to insert a step 2 Select the test name example TEST_09 to modify the inserted step 3 Select a new Test name for the inserted step 4 Press or select Delet Stp to remove steps from a procedure TESTS Edit Seauence Step Test Nome Description MS information TA in channel tests TH peak power Ta ORFS due to modulation TH ORFS due to romping om OB oo oe Ra reference sensitivity TCH FS Ra usable input level ranae RA titebose tuning range MS speech auality CP end call Oso oo u Test ae 2 3 4 Figure 8 15 Edit Sequence Screen on the HP Agilent 83212X NOTE The tests you select determine the specifications that are required Editing Test Parameters From the Edit Procedure screen see Procedure Development section in this chapter select the following keys 8 34 Instrument BASIC Programming and Using the TESTS Subsystem 1 and select the field Test Function at the bottom of the screen 2 From the list of Choices in the revealed box select Edit Parm and edit the Test Parameters as described below 3 When finished editing parameters select TESTS to return to test screen a Select either Edit SeqnorEdit Spec from the test function field to continue editing OR b If editing is complete select and press or select Continue to ret
302. that maps the number of the test with the subroutine that defines this test 750 If there is an error then the program stops and the error is reported 760 End this IF statement 770 Increment the step for the Test index 780 If there are no more steps specified or if the number of tests run is 51 then leave the test seqn loop 790 End the Tst IF statement 800 Increment the Channel number 810 Stop stepping through the channels if the number of channels reaches 51 or if the Receive or Transmit frequencies are specified at 1 820 The goto location for the stop test softkey 830 Clear the screen 840 Indicate that the test is finished 850 Goto the end statement 860 The goto location if an error occurs in one of the subroutines 870 Clear the screen 8 42 Instrument BASIC Programming and Using the TESTS Subsystem 880 Indicate that one of the tests have failed 890 The goto for the end of the program 900 End of the main program 910 Subroutine T0O1 This corresponds with test 1 This subroutine illustrates how to enter values from the Parameters Configuration and Specification screens 920 930 Includes the common variables 940 Dimension some variables that will be used to store values from the configure screen 960 Indicate that the first test is now active 980 Enter the value of the first Parameter This is the value of the first parameter on the Parameter Screen 990 Initialize th
303. the Agilent 8922M S should be transmitting See Also Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Generator This field displays the audio measurements screen 4 27 4 Bit Error 5 Call Status 6 Channel Base Station 7 CW Meas 8 dBm 9 GSM900 E GSM DCS1800 P CS1900 10 Out RF SP 11 Peak Power NOTE 12 Phase Frq Screens Cell Control Active Cell This field displays the bit error or fast bit error measurements screen depending on which mode has been set in these screens See Also Screens Bit Error or Fast Bit Error This field displays the status of the communication between the mobile phone and the Agilent 8922M S For the active cell the states are e Inactive e Proceeding e Alerting e Connected This field selects which channel the Agilent 8922M S transmits the Broadcast Channel BCCH information If this is changed during a call the call will be deactivated This field displays the CW measurements screen This field displays the units of the Peak Power measurement See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG UNITS METER This field selects the type of mobile that is to be tested Choices GSM 900 E GSM DCS 1800 PCS 1900 This field displays the output RF spectrum measurements screen This field displays the measured peak carrier power The measurement display will not update if there is no signal to measure This includes the case where the expected input level has
304. the manual for specific Warning or Caution information to avoid personal injury or damage to the product viii Sales and Service Offices Sales and Service Offices Any adjustment maintenance or repair of this product must be performed by qualified personnel Contact your customer engineer through your local Agilent Technologies Service Center You can find a list of local service service representatives on the web at http www agilent tech com services English index html You can also contact one of the following centers and ask for a test and measurement sales representative Asia Pacific Agilent Technologies 19 F Cityplaza One 1111 King s Road Taikoo Shing Hong Kong SAR tel 852 2599 7889 fax 852 2506 9233 Japan Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd Measurement Assistance Center 9 1 Takakura Cho Hachioji Shi Yokyo 192 8510 tel 81 426 56 7832 fax 81 426 56 7840 Australia New Zealand Agilent Technologies Australia Pty Ltd 347 Burwood Highway Forest Hill Victoria 3131 tel 1 800 629 485 Australia fax 61 3 9272 0749 tel 0 800 738 378 New Zealand fax 64 4 802 6881 Sales and Service Offices Canada Agilent Technologies Canada Inc 5150 Spectrum Way Mississauga Ontario L4W 5G1 tel 1 877 894 4414 Europe Agilent Technologies Test amp Measurement European Marketing Organisation P O Box 999 1180 AZ Amstelveen The Netherlands tel 31 2
305. the selected input port Range RF IN OUT 27 9 to 41 0 dBm AUX RF IN 58 0 to 20 0 dBm See Also Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Analyzer This field displays the level at the current marker position See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF AVG Units 4 84 3 MarkerPos 4 OutRFSpec 5 SyncStatus 6 Trig Delay 7 View Screens Output RF Spectrum Trace View Option 006 Only This field controls the marker position Choices MarkerPos selects the position of the marker on the screen Freq Offs selects the frequency offset for the trace Meas Mode selects the output RF spectrum measurement mode This field displays the measured Output RF Spectrum power at the specified Freq Offset setting See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF AVG Units This field displays any errors that occurred while trying to synchronize to the demodulated data See Also Making Measurements Solving Problems Messages This field sets the time delay between a valid trigger event and the beginning of a measurement Range 0 to 5000 00 us This field selects the alternate views of the Output RF Spectrum measurement Choices Main displays the Output RF spectrum display as a text screen Trace displays Output RF Spectrum power spectral density at the Freq Offset setting versus time 4 85 1 Amplitude 2 Frequency Error Screens Phase and Frequency Error Multiburst OFF Phase and Frequency Error M
306. ting is the HP Thinkjet Choices HP Printers Deskjet Laserjet Paintjet Quietjet Thinkjet Epson Printers FX 80 LQ 850 4 60 13 Parity 14 Print Adrs 15 Print Cancel 16 Printer Port 17 Print Title Screens 1 0 Configuration This field selects parity for the rear panel serial port Choices None Odd Even Always 1 Always 0 This field sets the GPIB print address This field only appears when the Printer Port is set to GPIB Range 0 through 30 This field cancels printing See Also Keys Print This field allows you to select the printer port The default setting is Serial Choices Serial HP IB Note that the GPIB address is also required with this selection Parallel This field is used to enter a title up to 50 characters to be printed at the top of all screen printouts Choices Done enters the data into the Agilent 8922M S Position moves the cursor to any position in the title block Over Ins When the cursor is blinking you are in insert mode when the cursor is not blinking you are in typeover mode Delete erases the character at the cursor Del End erases all the characters from the cursor position to the end of the string including the character at the cursor Bk Space erases the characters in the space previous to the cursor Upper and lower case letters A through Z Numerals 0 through 9 Special characters space_ amp lt gt 7 Jer tli 4 61 18 Rev Pace
307. tion to be changed manually 0 dB 10 dB 20 dB 30 dB 40 dB 4 128 Screens Tests Tests TEETS Fracecore Lecaijos Letorarr Preeraa Aetooktard je Oe UUT Failure aut Bde futout Fepulotg Quteet Degtimatica 1 RO Loe rrinie ty Bear Goteul Heeaina Tesi function Instrument BASIC Refer to chapter 8 Instrument BASIC for information about the Tests Screen 4 129 Screens Tests 4 130 Keys Keys Key Map Key Map 17 S N 15 18 3 i n Lolli CALL gt SIA FUNCTIONS DATA REF SET METER AVG _ one IE men 5i INCR nes A d ia YES Ato 12 32 20 19 5 2 1 ADRS 2 ASSIGN 3 AVG 4 CANCEL 5 CELL CNTL Keys Function Keys Function Keys This key is used to display the GPIB address See Also Screens Config This key is used to assign global G1 G2 G3 and local L1 L2 keys for single keystroke access to a field on the currently displayed screen or to display a field from another screen See Also Global Keys Local Keys This key allows you to display the average value of a number of measurements when the instrument is continuously making measurements To Use Measurement Averaging 1 Position the cursor in front of the measurement s unit of measure 2 Press SHIFT CINCRX10 AVG The default number of average samples is
308. to 127 dBm Level Resolution 0 1 dB Level Accuracy GSM Bands 1 0 dB levels gt 127dBm maximum over range gt 12 dB 1 0 dB typically for levels 2 127 dBm while hopping 50 MHz to 1 GHz 1 5 dB levels gt 107 dBm 2 0 dB levels gt 127 dBm 10 MHz to 50 MHz 2 0 dB levels gt 107 dBm 2 5 dB levels gt 127 dBm Reverse Power 15 Watts continuous 100 Watts for 10 seconds minute SWR 1 5 1 Aux RF Out Connector Level Range 4 to 127 dBm Level Resolution 0 1 dB Level Accuracy GSM Bands 1 0 dB levels gt 107 dBm 1 0 dB typically for levels gt 107 dBm while hopping 50 MHz to 1 GHz 1 5 dB levels gt 107 dBm 2 0 dB levels gt 127 dBm 10 MHz to 50 MHz 2 0 dB levels gt 107 dBm 2 5 dB levels gt 127 dBm Reverse Power 200 milliwatts SWR 2 0 1 level lt 4 dBm 1 GSM frequency bands are 880 to 915 MHz and 925 to 960 Mhz 2 Level accuracy degrades 0 2 dB when using the RF in out connector for both RF generator and RF analyzer In 30dB pulse mode level accuracy specifications are typical 3 15 Verifying Performance Agilent Technologies 8922M S Specifications Spectral Purity Spurious Signals for lt 1 dBm output level at Aux RF Out or lt 19 dBm output level at RF In Out Harmonics lt 25 dBc Non harmonics lt 50 dBc gt 5 kHz offset from carrier 0 3 GMSK Modulation After one timeslot 577s from an isolated RF Generator
309. traces will be slowed down while multiple bursts are collected This field is only shown when multi burst is ON It shows the burst count setting This field provides the option of specifying the bits used for calculating an ideal phase trajectory The DSP Analyzer calculates the ideal phase trajectory then compares it with the transmitted signal s phase trajectory to determine phase and frequency error Choices Expected causes the DSP Analyzer to calculate the ideal phase trajectory using the bits displayed on the Meas Sync screen This field is called Midamble or User Defined Sync Pattern depending on which Burst Type is chosen Measured causes the DSP Analyzer to calculate the ideal phase trajectory based entirely on demodulated data bits 4 93 NOTE 3 Polarity 4 SyncStatus 5 Trig Delay 6 Trg Timing 7 View Screens Phase Freq Data Bits When measuring noisy signals approx 10 rms define your entire burst as a User Defined Sync Pattern and select Expected This will eliminate the problem of bit errors causing gross peak phase errors See Also Screens Measurement Sync This field toggles the polarity of the displayed bits This field displays any errors that occurred while trying to synchronize to the demodulated data See Also Making Measurements Solving Problems Messages This field sets the time delay between a valid trigger event and the beginning of a measurement Range 0 to 5000 00 us
310. trum Analyzer Marker Controls 4 126 Markerl Oscilloscope Trigger Controls 4 78 MarkerPos Pulse Fall 4 110 Pulse Rise 4 107 Mask Pwr Ramp Fall Edge 4 100 Pwr Ramp Rise Edge 4 96 Pwr Ramp Top 2 dB 4 98 Max Hold Spectrum Analyzer Main Controls 4 123 MCC Cell Config 4 20 4 26 Meas Cntl Bit Error Test 4 14 Meas Num Bit Error Test 4 12 Meas Reset Audio 4 6 Configure 4 51 CW Meas 4 55 Oscilloscope Main Controls 4 76 Oscilloscope Marker Controls 4 81 Oscilloscope Trigger Controls 4 78 Spectrum Analyzer MainControls 4 123 Measurement Bit Error Test 4 13 measurement arming keys 5 5 measurement averaging 5 3 measurement control 4 10 4 14 Measurement Summary Index 6 Pwr Ramp Summary 4 102 measurement summary message 2 17 measurement synchronization 4 64 measurement synchronization screen keys 5 6 memory cards backing up programs 8 23 batteries 8 24 COPY_PL program 8 23 initializing 8 21 inserting and removing 8 20 SRAM and OPT part numbers 8 21 write protect switch 8 22 message screen keys 5 6 messages 7 1 bad sync 7 4 Communication Failures 7 2 Firmware Errors 7 3 FM error 7 4 level late 7 4 level short 7 4 low level 7 4 measurement summary 2 17 no error 7 4 protocol errors 7 5 RF overload 7 4 short burst 7 4 sync status 7 4 meter keys 5 6 Midamble Measurement Sync 4 66 Midamble Start Bit Position Measurement S
311. trument setup recall 5 7 save 5 9 Intensity Configure 4 50 Interface Card A 6 interfacing techniques 8 29 intermediate bits tested Bit Error Test 4 8 internal control bus 8 3 Index K keys 5 2 assign 5 3 average 5 3 cancel 5 3 cell configuration screen 5 4 cell control screen 5 3 end call 5 4 G1 5 11 G2 5 11 G3 5 11 global G1 G2 G3 5 3 GPIB address 5 3 high limit 5 4 hold 5 4 increment 5 4 L1 5 10 L2 5 10 local L1 L2 5 3 low limit 5 5 measurement arming 5 5 measurement synchronization screen 5 6 message screen 5 6 meter 5 6 mobile station information screen 5 6 no 5 6 on off 5 6 originate call 5 6 previous 5 6 print 5 6 recall 5 7 receive call 5 7 reference set 5 8 release 5 8 RF analyzer screen 5 9 RF generator screen 5 9 save 5 9 tests screen 5 9 use memory 5 9 yes 5 9 L Ll keys 5 10 L2 keys 5 10 LAC Cell Config 4 19 4 25 LAI Cell Config 4 20 4 26 level oscilloscope 4 76 Level div Oscilloscope Trigger Controls 4 78 level late message 7 4 level short message 7 4 level test RF Analyzer 3 11 Signal Generator 3 7 Library Files 8 37 Library files 8 2 Limit Cell Control 4 40 line feed T O configuration 4 60 line voltage 1 3 lines page T O configuration 4 60 Loading A Program 8 10 local L1 L2 keys 5 3 local keys 5 10 location area code 4 19 4 25 area identification 4 20 4 26 update 4 7
312. tting See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG Units Single allows one test to be performed Cont allows testing to automatically repeat This field sets the time delay between a valid trigger event and the beginning of a measurement Range 0 to 5000 00 us This field selects the alternate views of the Output RF Spectrum measurement Choices Main displays the Output RF spectrum display as a text screen Trace displays Output RF Spectrum power spectral density at the Freq Offset setting versus time 4 83 1 Amplitude 2 Marker Screens Output RF Spectrum Trace View Option 006 Only Output RF Spectrum Trace View Option 006 Only a _ 78 2 eni Oe ATARIA PA ENA ee ne E H H i 75 81 BENRA PE a ETTE Jele fi rl QUERF Spec a paepae 29 00 4 SyneStotus E Ho Error my ee 7 Chori 5 TK Ley Timeslot OUTPUT RF SPECTRUN Anplitude 13 0 MarkerPos o 00 This view displays output RF spectrum power spectral density at the Freq Offset setting versus time The Agilent 8922M S uses a 3 pole synchronously tuned filter to make Output RF Spectrum measurements rather than a 5 pole filter as specified in the GSM recommendations Refer to Section titled Output RF Spectrum Measurements Using a 3 Pole Synchronously Tuned Measurement Filter in Chapter 2 This is a copy of the RF Analyzer Amplitude field This is the amplitude to be assumed at
313. tups to be recalled later Changes made on the Configure and Tests screens are automatically maintained through power down and Preset cycles Help Message and Tests screens cannot be saved The states of the following fields will not be saved Demod Arm Hop Arm Activated Meas Arm To Save an Instrument Setup 1 Make any changes to the instrument that you want to SAVE 2 Press p to save 3 Name the setup using the data keys or the Save choices at the bottom right of the screen You can use numbers letters or a combination of both This key is used to access the Tests screen This is where the IBASIC Test Software Applications can be run from Refer to chapter 8 Instrument BASIC for more information This key arms and triggers a DSP measurement using data captured in memory USE MEM is not available when continuous measurements are selected Select single in the MEAS SYNC screen to allow this operation See Also Screens Measurement Sync Trig Source Use Mem Status Use Mem Screens Measurement Sync Status Single Cont Meas Trig Screens Cell Configuration This key is used to respond to Yes No questions that appear on the screen L1 L2 NOTE Keys Local Keys Local Keys Keys L1 and L2 are local keys They are used to move between fields on the screen that is currently displayed To Assign a Local Key e Use the knob to position the cursor at the field of your choice e Press Press L1 A
314. ultiburst OFF 5 4 2 i PHASE AND FREQUENCY ERROR RMS Phase Error Freauency Error 1 87 36 20 Peak Phase Error Syne Status Multi burst Meas Trig RF Analyzer MOBILE 7 pho Error p ot This is a copy of the RF Analyzer Amplitude field This is the amplitude to be assumed at the selected input port Range RF IN OUT 27 9 to 41 0 dBm AUX RF IN 58 0 to 20 0 dBm See Also Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Analyzer This field displays the derived Frequency Error over the useful bits in the measured burst See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG METER Units 4 86 3 ON OFF 4 Peak Phase Error 5 RMS Phase Error 6 Single Cont 7 Sync Status 8 Trig Delay 9 View Screens Phase and Frequency Error Multiburst OFF This field enables or disables multi burst measurement The default for this field is OFF Choices ON enables multi burst measurement The display changes to show Bursts measured fields Wanted Done and Errors OFF disables multi burst measurement See Also Screens Phase and Frequency Error Multi burst ON This field displays the measured Peak Phase Error over the useful bits in the measured burst See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG METER Units This field displays the measured RMS Phase Error over the useful bits in the measured burst See Also Keys ON OFF HI LIMIT LO LIMIT REF SET AVG METER Single
315. umber Measurement Sync 4 64 Burst Sel Measurement Sync 4 65 burst selection measurement synchronization 4 65 Burst Type Measurement Sync 4 65 Burst Used Measurement Sync 4 65 Bursts Phase Freq Data bits 4 93 Phase Freq Phase Err 4 91 bursts measured 4 90 C CA Cell Configuration 4 18 4 24 cache A 10 buffers A 11 call count reset 4 43 call counts frame errors 4 31 4 39 pages 4 42 RACHs 4 43 Call Status Cell Control 4 38 Caller Cell Control 4 38 Camping On A 5 LAC A 5 MCC A 5 MNC A 5 More information A 5 Power level A 5 camping on 4 71 cancel keys 5 3 Index 2 CBCH 4 119 cell allocation 4 18 4 24 cell configurationscreen keys 5 4 cell control active cell 4 31 cell control screen keys 5 3 Center Freq Spectrum Analyzer Main Controls 4 123 Center Freq Marker To Spectrum Analyzer Marker Controls 4 125 center frequency spectrum analyzer 4 123 4 125 Clear Log A 10 A 11 Agilent 8922M A 10 Logging A 11 clock input connector 6 3 clock input selection 4 18 4 24 clock output connector 6 3 closed loop AGC RF analyzer 4 112 Code Files 8 37 Code files 8 2 color code 4 18 4 24 command line 8 16 comments for the Output Heading field 8 31 communication failure message 7 2 completed bits tested Bit Error Test 4 9 4 12 4 15 CONFIGURE 8 5 CONFIGURE Screen Aux RF Out 4 50 Connect Cell Control 4 39 Connection A 2 A 4 Agilent 8922M to HP
316. up recovery Non fatal 0x00a0 Channel coder failure BCH hang up Cycle power to recover Fatal 0x00a2 Channel coder failure 0x00a3 Speech coder failure 0x00a5 Invalid GSM Protocol Processor ROMS 0x00a6 RTI failed to configure 0x00a7 Channel or Speech coder failed to boot Ox00aa Channel or Speech coder I O overloaded 0x00ab T100 expired Ox00ac Protocol Message Allocation failed Data Link layer error codes are proprietary to the Agilent 8922M S The defined error codes are as follows Call disconnected DL Error 0x00 Causes 0x00c8 SAPI incorrect 0x00c9 Timer T200 expired 0x00ca Re establish link 0x00cb Unexpected UA respons 0x00cc Unexpected DM respons 0x00cd Unexpected DM response in multiframe Ox00ce Unexpected S frame Ox00cf Frames out of sequence 0x00d0 Bad parameters in U frame 0x00d1 Bad parameters in S frame 0x00d2 Bad M bit in I frame 0x00d3 I frame length incorrect 0x00d4 Invalid frame 0x00d5 Unexpected SABM 0x00d6 SABM in I frame 0x00d7 Unexpected releas 7 8 Radio Resource Layer Disconnects Mobility Management Layer Disconnects Call Control Layer Disconnects Messages Disconnects The RR sub layer only generates timer expiry error codes Call disconnected RR Error 0x00 Causes No RR reports are supported Mobility Management sub layer error codes are proprietary to the Agilent 8922M S The defined error codes are as follows
317. ur memory card into the Agilent 8922M S and enter the following command on your computer OUTPUT 714 PROG EXEC INITIALIZE INTERNAL Insert the initialized memory card into the Agilent 8922M S Define the memory card as the Mass Storage device by entering the following command on your computer OUTPUT 714 PROG EXEC MSI INTERNAL Save your program to the memory card by entering the following command on your computer OUTPUT 714 PROG EXEC SAVE lt filename gt Press Locat Insert the disk into the drive Access the IBASIC controller screen from the Test Function field on the TESTS screen Using the knob select the field and enter the following command to save your program STORE lt filename gt 7xx x Once the program is loaded into the IBASIC Controller s RAM it can be run by using the knob to enter the RUN command or by selecting the Run field in the top right corner of the screen A Test Procedure file includes all the user defined channels frequencies limits and values from the Test Executive for the radio under test You can make as many Test Procedure files as needed for the different radios you are testing 1 Press the front panel key and select the Location field Refer to item 1 see Figure 8 2 on page 8 12 2 Choose the location Card ROM RAM or Disk where the Test Procedure is
318. urn to the Edit Proc screen then press or select Run to run the modified test procedure NOTE For a fuller explanation of the fields see Edit Parameter TESTS Edit Parameters Farn Description mr rint All Volue Units 1 AE INSI number Cdisits 1 5 2 AE IMSI number digits 6 15 3 CP base station colour code 4 5 CP public land mobile network color code CP serving cell BCH ARFCH CF local area code code no T CP mobile country code 8 CP mobile network code 9 CPi control chan tyre O S0 8 1 5074 10 CP test with cipherina 0 no tyes 11 CP delovyt of advancel for trigger 1e default traffic channel Figure 8 16 Edit Parameters Screen on the HP Agilent 83212X Select the following information according to the labelled steps in Figure 8 16 on page 8 35 1 Select the parameter to modify either by scrolling with the knob or entering the Parameter Number with the Data Keypad 2 Select the Description Value and enter a new parameter value Configuring External Instruments for GPIB Control Use the following instructions to configure the IBASIC computer to see external instruments on the GPIB 700 bus 8 35 Instrument BASIC Programming and Using the TESTS Subsystem 1 Select the front panel key and then the Test Function Edit Cnfg A configuration screen similar to that shown in Figure 8 17 on page 8 37 appears 2 Select the Calling Name field and enter the instrument s name i
319. veeesneeaees 4 95 Pwr Ramp Top 2 dB cciis csccsiiies saesees ptescesnedsenuccunteshssouaessavevasinases 4 97 Contents 2 Contents Pwr Ramp Fall Edge seisen nioo ieoi aR 4 99 Pwr Ramp SUMmary 2 cscesecessssaddssetevadevssescvsssssorestusssteseestescteeeentexs 4 101 Pwr Ramp Pulse Option 006 Only ssssessesssseresesreersrrerrereresessee 4 104 Pwr Ramp Pulse Rise Option 006 Only sssssseeeseeeseeereeerseee 4 107 Pwr Ramp Pulse Fall Option 006 Only sssseeeeeseeeseeesereeseee 4 109 RF Generator RF Analyzer AF Gen eseeseeseeeseeeeeeeereereesreeee 4 111 RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Analyzer s es 4 112 RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Gen ee eeeeeeseceneeeeeeeeneeeenes 4 115 STe aal a sscsact apaseienseagiere ape ahasseets asso cu scansesagasyebucenceesastoaaSebassaviansaese 4 118 SMS Cell Bro dtaSt onses rie eiii EEEE Ea 4 119 Spectrum Analyzer Main Controls Option 006 Only 4 122 Spectrum Analyzer RF Gen Controls Option 006 Only 4 124 Spectrum Analyzer Marker Controls Option 006 Only 4 125 Spectrum Analyzer Auxiliary Controls 00 eee ee eeeeeeeeees 4 127 MOSS E E EA 4 129 5 Keys Key Map witch nnd eatin a el a E E R 5 2 FUnCHON KEYS erreian EEEE 5 3 eE E T Weadevenaceetesenaes 5 10 Global Keys sicas e eE E EER 5 11 Umts KEYS inrer enri rE Eie EEEE EE EEEE TE EE TEE EEEE 5 12 Contents 3 Contents 6 Connectors Front Panel Connectors of the Agilent Tec
320. want to use the user interface screen functions of the TESTS subsystem If the program is simple enough that there is no need for user input or if all the user input is simple enough to be accomplished through INPUT statements then a NO LIB option is available Procedure Files A Procedure allows the user to define which of the test subroutines parameters and specifications defined in the Library will be used to test a specific Radio There may be many Procedures defined that use the same IBASIC Code and Library each using a different subset of the choices available in the Library These files are preceded with a lower case p but are not required to have the same base name as either the Library or the Code The name of the corresponding Library if any is stored in each Procedure file 8 26 Instrument BASIC Programming and Using the TESTS Subsystem pNamet1 Parameters Specifications and IBASIC Test Code Test Library test for each radio cName IName Procedure 2 Code for all possible Set of all parameters gee pName2 radio tests specifications and tests Procedure 1 Procedure N pNameN Figure 8 10 TESTS Subsystem Screens TESTS Subsystem File Relationship The TESTS subsystem uses several screens to create select and copy files and to run tests The Main TESTS Subsystem Screen Refer to Figure 8 11 on page 8 28 The Main TESTS screen is accessed by press
321. wed by the user to ensure safe operation and to maintain the instrument in a safe condition Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Information Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Information This product has been designed to meet the protection requirements of the European Communities Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC directive EN55011 1991 Group 1 Class A EN50082 1 1992 IEC 1000 4 2 1995 ESD IEC 1000 4 3 1995 Radiated Susceptibility IEC 1000 4 4 1995 EFT In order to preserve the EMC performance of this product any cable which becomes worn or damaged must be replaced with the same type and specification Sound Emission Manufacturer s Declaration This statement is provided to comply with the requirements of the German Sound Emission Directive from 18 January 1991 This product has a sound pressure emission at the operator position lt 70 dB A O Sound Pressure Lp lt 70 dB A O At Operator Position O Normal Operation O According to ISO 7779 1988 EN 27779 1991 Type Test Herstellerbescheinigung Diese Information steht im Zusammenhang mit den Anforderungen der Maschinenlarminformationsverordnung vom 18 Januar 1991 O Schalldruckpegel Lp lt 70 dB A Am Arbeitsplatz g O Normaler Betrieb O Nach ISO 7779 1988 EN 27779 1991 Typprfung Declaration of Conformity Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN45014 Manufacturer s Name
322. y 6 Position This field sets the Marker Position for the trace Range 0 to 10 divisions 7 Ref Level Marker This field changes the Ref Level setting to the level at the marker position To 4 126 1 Controls 2 Auto Hold Input Atten Screens Spectrum Analyzer Auxiliary Controls Spectrum Analyzer Auxiliary Controls r SPECTRUM ANALYZER RBWS 30kHz Harker EAEE N AEEA E A A Frea 314 600000 Lul eieceze r A E EAA A E E E E S TOT Od Ref Level dEn Hold MOBILE Chan Th Lev Tineslot 1 EEE easReset More 3 2 5 4 This field selects the alternate Controls of the Spectrum Analyzer measurement Choices Main RF Gen Marker Auxiliary This field selects the Input Attenuator mode or value The list of choices depends on the Radio Type selected on the Configure screen GSM900 E GSM DCS1800 or PCS 1900 See Also Screens Configure Radio Type 4 127 3 RF Input 4 Video BW 5 0 dB Input Atten Screens Spectrum Analyzer Auxiliary Controls This field selects the RF input port for the spectrum analyzer Choices RF IN OUT AUX RF IN Range RF IN OUT 27 9 to 41 0 dBm AUX RF IN 58 0 to 20 0 dBm The video bandwidth field can be set to one of three settings e 30kHz e 100kHz e 1 MHz Choices GSM900 E GSM DCS 1800 and PCS 1900 Auto selects the input attenuation automatically Hold allows the input attenua
323. ync 4 67 MM Cell Control 4 41 MNC Cell Config 4 20 4 26 mobile country code 4 20 4 26 network code 4 20 4 26 mobile allocation number 4 40 number 1 4 19 4 25 number 2 4 20 4 25 mobile allocation index offset 1 4 20 4 26 offset 2 4 20 4 26 mobile station information 4 70 timing error 4 43 mobile station information screen keys 5 6 mobility management 4 41 Mode Cell Control 4 41 Configure 4 60 Output RF Spectrum Main View 4 83 Mode field 8 5 model T O configuration 4 60 modulation output RF spectrum power 4 83 multi burst measurements 2 15 N NCC Cell Configuration 4 20 4 26 NetwkOnly A 12 Next Peak Marker To Spectrum Analyzer Marker Controls 4 125 no keys 5 6 no error message 7 4 Norm Cell Control 4 41 O Off 4 10 4 14 Offset Configure 4 51 On UUT Failure continue or stop 8 29 On Off Phase Freq Multi burst 4 89 on off keys 5 6 One Time Programmable Index OTP memory cards 8 21 open loop AGC calibration RF analyzer 4 113 Open Auto DAC Value RF Analyzer 4 114 open loop AGC RF analyzer 4 112 operating environment 1 8 Opt 001 Ref Out 4 51 options 1 8 originate call keys 5 6 oscilloscope 4 75 arming 4 78 trigger level 4 78 triggering 4 78 oscilloscope test 3 10 Other fusing 1 3 Output Destination CRT or Printer 8 31 Output Heading comments 8 31 Output Results All or Failures 8 30 Output RF Spectrum Output RF Spectrum
324. z OUT is always active See Also Specifications REF IN The 13 MHz output connector is connected to the 13 MHz oscillator in the reference circuitry This signal is a general purpose 13 MHz reference output sine wave It can either be free running or locked to any external reference of 1 2 5 10 or 13 MHz reference Typically it is locked to the high stability timebase reference option 001 if it is installed connected and enabled 13 MHz OUT is always active See Also Specifications REF IN 6 10 3 AM 4 EMMI BUS Agilent 8922M Only Connectors Rear Panel Connectors of the Agilent Technologies 8922M S This connector is used in conjunction with the HP Agilent 83220A and HP Agilent 83220E DCS PCS Test Sets Refer to either the HP Agilent 83220A or HP Agilent 83220E User s Guides for further information The EMMI bus is the Digital Audio Interface defined by GSM Rec 11 10 sec HI 1 4 The EMMI Bus is used to emulate the GSM standard man to machine interface and for DAI control The pin assignment of the connector is as follows Pin Usage Function To From 1 Chassis ground 2 EMMI TX Signal To ME 3 EMMI RX Signal From ME 4 6 Not used 7 EMMI Signal ground 8 10 Not Used 11 DAI Test control 1 To ME 12 DAI Signal ground To ME 13 DAI Test control2 To ME 14 21 Not Used 22 DAI Reset To ME 23 DAI Data From ME 24 DAI Data Clock From ME 25 DAI Data To ME ME M
325. zer screen See Also Screens RF Generator RF Analyzer RF Generator This field sets the absolute RF channel number for the serving cell Broadcast Channel 4 17 4 Aux BCCH NOTE NOTE 6 BCC Screens Cell Configuration GSM 900 This field allows selection of data and clock outputs This is not featured in the Agilent 8922S Choices Off causes the front panel MODULATION IN OUT DATA and CLOCK connectors to be inputs Adjacent causes data and clock signals to be output on the front panel MODULATION IN OUT DATA and CLOCK connectors These signals can be connected to a 0 3 GMSK generator HP Agilent 8657A B Option 022 A mobile station should be able to camp on to the Aux BCCH The BCC Base Station Colour Code is displayed in this field and has a number plus 1 modulo 4 relationship with Serv Cell BCC The data output includes a midamble which will result in discrete sidebands If random data is desired use an HP Agilent 8904A Option 001 or 002 to generate random data and clock signals to the 0 3 GMSK generator See Also Connectors and Timing Diagrams CLOCK MODULATION Connectors and Timing Diagrams IN OUT DATA MODULATION This field is a 124 element Boolean array defining which ARFCNs are in the base station allocation The serving cell ARFCN does not have to be set to a 1 in this table Choices Done exits the choices menu Position moves the cursor to the desired position in the array 0 means the AR

Agilent Technologies Cell Phone S GSM User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents